AiM 2589 Coca Cola and Field House, Hot Water Upgrades Project

Transcription

COCA-COLA BUILDING & ATHLETIC FIELD HOUSE
DOMESTIC HOT WATER & HEATING HOT WATER
RENOVATIONS
Las Cruces, NM
PROJECT MANUAL
March 31, 2015
Wilson & Company, Inc., Engineers & Architects
4900 Lang Ave NE
Albuquerque, NM 87109
Telephone: (505) 348-4000
www.wilsonco.com
File: 14-400-029-03
NMSU COCA-COLA BUILDING AND ATHLETIC FIELD HOUSE
DOMESTIC HOT WATER & HEATING HOT WATER RENOVATIONS
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Division 00 – Procurement and Contracting Requirements
Division 01 – General Requirements
01 3000 - Administrative Requirements
01 4000 - Quality Requirements
01 5000 -Temporary Facilities and Controls
01 5100 - Temporary Utilities
01 6000 - Product Requirements
01 7000 - Execution and Closeout Requirements
01 7800 - Closeout Submittals
Division 02 – Existing Conditions
02 4100 - Demolition
Division 07 – Thermal & Moisture Protection
07 8400 - Firestopping
Division 08 - Openings
08 1113 - Hollow Metal Doors and Frames
08 7100 - Door Hardware
Division 09 - Finishes
09 2116 - Gypsum Board Assemblies
09 6500 - Resilient Base
09 9000 - Paints and Coatings
Division 22 – Plumbing
22 0010 - Plumbing General Provisions
22 0516 - Expansion Fittings and Loops for Plumbing Piping
22 0519 - Meters and Gages for Plumbing Piping
22 0548 - Vibration and Seismic Controls for Plumbing Piping and Equipment
22 0553 - Identification for Plumbing Piping and Equipment
22 0716 - Plumbing Equipment Insulation
22 0719 - Plumbing Piping Insulation
22 1005 - Plumbing Piping
22 1006 - Plumbing Piping Specialties
22 3000 - Plumbing Equipment
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Division 23 – Mechanical
23 0010 - Mechanical General Provisions
23 0516 - Expansion Fittings and Loops for HVAC Piping
23 0519 - Meters and Gages for HVAC Piping
23 0548 - Vibration and Seismic Controls for HVAC Piping and Equipment
23 0553 - Identification for HVAC Piping and Equipment
23 0593 - HVAC Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing
23 0713 - Duct Insulation
23 0719 - HVAC Piping Insulation
23 0913 - Instrumentation and Control Devices for HVAC
23 2113 - Hydronic Piping
23 2114 - Hydronic Specialties
23 2123 - Hydronic Pumps
23 5233.13 - Finned Water-Tube Boilers
Division 26 – Electrical
26 0500 - Basic Electrical Materials and Methods
26 0519 - Conductors and Cables
26 0533 - Raceways and Boxes
26 0553 - Electrical Identification
26 2416 - Panelboards
26 2726 - Wiring Devices
26 2816 - Safety Switches and Enclosed Circuit Breakers
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SECTION 01 3000
ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Preconstruction meeting.
B. Progress meetings.
C. Construction progress schedule.
D. Progress photographs.
E. Submittals
PART 2 PRODUCTS - NOT USED
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 PRECONSTRUCTION MEETING
A. Engineer will schedule a meeting after Notice of Award.
B. Attendance Required:
1. Owner.
2. Engineer.
3. Contractor.
C. Agenda:
1. Description of procedures based upon construction management process.
2. Submission of executed bonds and insurance certificates.
3. Distribution of Contract Documents.
4. Submission of list of Subcontractors, schedule of values, and progress schedule.
5. Designation of personnel representing the parties in Contract, and the Engineer.
6. Procedures and processing of field decisions, submittals, substitutions, applications
for payments, proposal request, change orders, and contract closeout procedures.
a. Submittal Numbering System: In accordance with Submittal Procedures article
included in this Section.
7. Scheduling.
8. Site Mobilization
a. Owner's requirements and occupancy prior to completion.
b. Construction facilities and controls provided by Owner.
c. Temporary utilities provided by Owner.
14-400-029-03 / 14-400-029-03 NMSU DHW & HHW CD'S
01 3000 - 1
d.
e.
f.
On-site location of stored materials.
Site access and parking.
Compliance with Owner's security requirements.
D. Record minutes and distribute copies within two days after meeting to participants, with
two copies to Engineer, Owner, participants, and those affected by decisions made.
3.2 PROGRESS MEETINGS
A. Schedule and administer meetings throughout progress of the Work at maximum bimonthly intervals.
B. Attendance Required: Job superintendent, major Subcontractors and suppliers, Owner,
Engineer, as appropriate to agenda topics for each meeting.
C. Agenda:
1. Review minutes of previous meetings.
2. Review of Work progress.
3. Field observations, problems, and decisions.
4. Identification of problems that impede, or will impede, planned progress.
5. Review of submittals schedule and status of submittals.
6. Maintenance of progress schedule.
7. Corrective measures to regain projected schedules.
8. Planned progress during succeeding work period.
9. Maintenance of quality and work standards.
10. Effect of proposed changes on progress schedule and coordination.
11. Other business relating to Work.
D. Record minutes and distribute copies within two days after meeting to participants, with
two copies to Engineer, Owner, participants, and those affected by decisions made.
3.3 CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS SCHEDULE
A. Within 5 days after date of the Agreement, submit preliminary schedule.
B. If preliminary schedule requires revision after review, submit revised schedule within
five days.
C. Within 10 days after review of preliminary schedule, submit draft of proposed complete
schedule for review.
D. Within 10 days after joint review, submit complete schedule.
E. Submit updated schedule with each Application for Payment.
3.4 PROGRESS PHOTOGRAPHS
A. Submit photographs with each application for payment, taken not more than 3 days
prior to submission of application for payment.
B. Photography Type: Digital; electronic files.
14-400-029-03 / 14-400-029-03 NMSU DHW & HHW CD'S
01 3000 - 2
C. Provide photographs when work is considered ready for Substantial Completion in
accordance with Section 01 7000.
D. Provide photographs of site and construction throughout progress of Work produced by
an experienced photographer, acceptable to Engineer.
E. Digital Photographs: 24 bit color, minimum resolution of 1024 by 768, in JPG format;
provide files unaltered by photo editing software.
1. File Naming: Include project identification, date and time of view, and view
identification.
3.5 SUBMITTALS
A. Refer to Section 01 3300 – Submittal Procedures.
END OF SECTION
14-400-029-03 / 14-400-029-03 NMSU DHW & HHW CD'S
01 3000 - 3
This page intentionally left blank.
SECTION 01 4000
QUALITY REQUIREMENTS
PART 1 GENERAL
A. References and standards.
B. Quality assurance submittals.
C. Control of installation.
D. Tolerances.
E. Manufacturers' field services.
1.2 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A. Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements: Submittal procedures.
B. Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements: Requirements for material and product
quality.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Design Data: Submit for Engineer's knowledge as contract administrator for the
limited purpose of assessing conformance with information given and the design
concept expressed in the contract documents, or for Owner's information.
B. Certificates: When specified in individual specification sections, submit certification
by the manufacturer and Contractor or installation/application subcontractor to
Engineer, in quantities specified for Product Data.
1. Indicate material or product conforms to or exceeds specified requirements.
Submit supporting reference data, affidavits, and certifications as appropriate.
2. Certificates may be recent or previous test results on material or product, but must
be acceptable to Engineer.
C. Manufacturer's Instructions: When specified in individual specification sections,
submit printed instructions for delivery, storage, assembly, installation, start-up,
adjusting, and finishing, for the Owner's information. Indicate special procedures,
perimeter conditions requiring special attention, and special environmental criteria
required for application or installation.
D. Erection Drawings: Submit drawings for Engineer's benefit as contract administrator
or for Owner.
1. Submit for information for the limited purpose of assessing conformance with
information given and the design concept expressed in the contract documents.
14-400-029-03 / 14-400-029-03 NMSU DHW & HHW CD'S
01 4000 - 1
2.
Data indicating inappropriate or unacceptable Work may be subject to action by
Engineer or Owner.
1.4 REFERENCES AND STANDARDS
A. For products and workmanship specified by reference to a document or documents not
included in the Project Manual, also referred to as reference standards, comply with
requirements of the standard, except when more rigid requirements are specified or are
required by applicable codes.
B. Conform to reference standard of date of issue current on date of Contract Documents,
except where a specific date is established by applicable code.
C. Obtain copies of standards where required by product specification sections.
D. Maintain copy at project site during submittals, planning, and progress of the specific
work, until Substantial Completion.
E. Should specified reference standards conflict with Contract Documents, request
clarification from Engineer before proceeding.
F. Neither the contractual relationships, duties, or responsibilities of the parties in Contract
nor those of Engineer shall be altered from the Contract Documents by mention or
inference otherwise in any reference document.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 CONTROL OF INSTALLATION
A. Monitor quality control over suppliers, manufacturers, products, services, site
conditions, and workmanship, to produce Work of specified quality.
B. Comply with manufacturers' instructions, including each step in sequence.
C. Should manufacturers' instructions conflict with Contract Documents, request
clarification from Engineer before proceeding.
D. Comply with specified standards as minimum quality for the Work except where more
stringent tolerances, codes, or specified requirements indicate higher standards or more
precise workmanship.
E. Have Work performed by persons qualified to produce required and specified quality.
F. Verify that field measurements are as indicated on shop drawings or as instructed by the
manufacturer.
G. Secure products in place with positive anchorage devices designed and sized to
withstand stresses, vibration, physical distortion, and disfigurement.
14-400-029-03 / 14-400-029-03 NMSU DHW & HHW CD'S
01 4000 - 2
3.2 TOLERANCES
A. Monitor fabrication and installation tolerance control of products to produce acceptable
Work. Do not permit tolerances to accumulate.
B. Comply with manufacturers' tolerances. Should manufacturers' tolerances conflict with
Contract Documents, request clarification from Engineer before proceeding.
C. Adjust products to appropriate dimensions; position before securing products in place.
3.3 MANUFACTURERS' FIELD SERVICES
A. When specified in individual specification sections, require material or product
suppliers or manufacturers to provide qualified staff personnel to observe site
conditions, conditions of surfaces and installation, quality of workmanship, as
applicable, and to initiate instructions when necessary.
B. Report observations and site decisions or instructions given to applicators or installers
that are supplemental or contrary to manufacturers' written instructions.
3.4 DEFECT ASSESSMENT
A. Replace Work or portions of the Work not conforming to specified requirements.
B. If, in the opinion of Engineer, it is not practical to remove and replace the Work,
Engineer will direct an appropriate remedy or adjust payment.
END OF SECTION
14-400-029-03 / 14-400-029-03 NMSU DHW & HHW CD'S
01 4000 - 3
SECTION 01 5000
TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS
PART 1 GENERAL
A. Temporary sanitary facilities.
B. Temporary controls: Barriers and enclosures.
C. Vehicular access and parking.
D. Waste removal facilities and services.
E. Project identification sign.
F. Field offices.
A. Section 01 5100 - Temporary Utilities: power, heat, ventilation and water.
1.3 TEMPORARY SANITARY FACILITIES
A. Use of existing facilities is not permitted.
B. Provide and maintain required facilities and enclosures. Provide at time of project
mobilization.
C. Maintain daily in clean and sanitary condition.
1.4 BARRIERS
A. Provide barriers to prevent unauthorized entry to construction areas, to prevent access to
areas that could be hazardous to workers or the public, to allow for owner's use of site
and to protect existing facilities and adjacent properties from damage from construction
operations and demolition.
B. Protect non-owned vehicular traffic, stored materials, site, and structures from damage.
1.5 STORAGE
A. Provide storage facilities as required for scope of work.
B. Locate stored materials within locked fencing area and/or within locked storage
containers.
C. Coordinate location of storage facilities with Owner as required to allow:
14-400-029-03 / 14-400-029-03 NMSU DHW & HHW CD'S
01 5000 - 1
1.
2.
Use of site and premises by Owner.
Use of site and premises by the public.
D. Owner's facilities may not be used for storage.
1.6 VEHICULAR ACCESS AND PARKING
A. Coordinate access and haul routes with governing authorities and Owner.
B. Provide and maintain access to fire hydrants, free of obstructions.
C. Existing parking areas may be used for construction parking.
1. Coordinate area(s) with Owner prior to beginning work.
1.7 WASTE REMOVAL
A. Provide waste removal facilities and services as required to maintain the site in clean
and orderly condition.
1.8 PROJECT IDENTIFICATION
A. Project sign is at Contractor's option.
1. Erect on site at location established by Owner.
2. No other signs are allowed without Owner permission except those required by
law.
1.9 FIELD OFFICES
A. Field Office is at Contractor's option.
1. Locate office in coordination with Owner's requirements.
1.10 REMOVAL OF UTILITIES, FACILITIES, AND CONTROLS
A. Remove temporary utilities, equipment, facilities, materials, prior to Substantial
Completion inspection.
B. Clean and repair damage caused by installation or use of temporary work.
C. Restore existing facilities used during construction to original condition.
PART 3 EXECUTION - NOT USED
END OF SECTION
14-400-029-03 / 14-400-029-03 NMSU DHW & HHW CD'S
01 5000 - 2
SECTION 01 5100
TEMPORARY UTILITIES
PART 1 GENERAL
A. Temporary utilities – power, heat, ventilation and water.
1.2 TEMPORARY UTILITIES
A. Power/Cost of Energy: By Owner.
B. Heat/Ventilation: By Contractor. Provide heating devices and heat as needed to
maintain specified conditions for construction operations.
1.
Maintain minimum ambient temperature of 68 degrees F (20 degrees C) in areas
where construction is in progress, unless indicated otherwise in specifications.
2.
Prior to operation of permanent equipment for temporary heating purposes, verify
that installation is approved for operation, equipment is lubricated and filters are in
place.
3.
Provide and pay for operation, maintenance, and regular replacement of filters and
worn or consumed parts.
C. Water: By Owner.
PART 3 EXECUTION - NOT USED
END OF SECTION
14-400-029-03 / 14-400-029-03 NMSU DHW & HHW CD'S
TEMPORARY UTILITIES
01 5100 - 1
SECTION 01 6000
PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS
PART 1 GENERAL
A. General product requirements.
B. Transportation, handling, storage and protection.
C. Product option requirements.
D. Substitution limitations and procedures.
E. Maintenance materials, including extra materials, spare parts, tools, and software.
1.2 DEFINITIONS
A. Furnish: Supply and deliver to project site, ready for installation.
B. Install: Place in position for service or use.
C. Provide: Furnish and install, complete and ready for intended use.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data Submittals: Submit manufacturer's standard published data. Mark each
copy to identify applicable products, models, options, and other data. Supplement
manufacturers' standard data to provide information specific to this Project.
B. Shop Drawing Submittals: Prepared specifically for this Project; indicate utility and
electrical characteristics, utility connection requirements, and location of utility outlets
for service for functional equipment and appliances.
C. Sample Submittals: Illustrate functional and aesthetic characteristics of the product,
with integral parts and attachment devices. Coordinate sample submittals for interfacing
work.
1. For selection from standard finishes, submit samples of the full range of the
manufacturer's standard colors, textures, and patterns.
D. Indicate utility and electrical characteristics, utility connection requirements, and
location of utility outlets for service for functional equipment and appliances.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 NEW PRODUCTS
14-400-029-03 / 14-400-029-03 NMSU DHW & HHW CD'S
01 6000 - 1
A. Provide new products unless specifically required or permitted by the Contract
Documents.
B. Do not use products having any of the following characteristics:
1. Made using or containing CFC's or HCFC's.
2. Made of wood from newly cut old growth timber.
C. Adhesives and Joint Sealants:
1. Provide only products having lower volatile organic compound (VOC) content than
required by South Coast Air Quality Management District Rule No.1168.
2. Specific Product Categories: Comply with limitations specified elsewhere.
D. Wiring Terminations: Provide terminal lugs to match branch circuit conductor
quantities, sizes, and materials indicated. Size terminal lugs to NFPA 70, include lugs
for terminal box.
E. Cord and Plug: Provide minimum 6 foot cord and plug including grounding connector
for connection to electric wiring system. Cord of longer length is specified in individual
specification sections.
2.2 PRODUCT OPTIONS
A. Products Specified by Reference Standards or by Description Only: Use any product
meeting those standards or description.
B. Products Specified by Naming One or More Manufacturers: Use a product of one of the
manufacturers named and meeting specifications, no options or substitutions allowed.
C. Products Specified by Naming One or More Manufacturers with a Provision for
Substitutions: Submit a request for substitution for any manufacturer not named.
2.3 MAINTENANCE MATERIALS
A. Furnish extra materials, spare parts, tools, and software of types and in quantities
specified in individual specification sections.
B. Deliver to Project site; obtain receipt prior to final payment.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES
A. Instructions to Bidders specify restrictions for submitting requests for substitutions
during the bidding period. Comply with requirements specified in this section.
1. Substitution requests during the bidding period must be submitted by Bidders.
Such requests must be accompanied by Bidder's letter of transmittal, signed by a
person legally authorized to bind the Bidder to a Contract. Substitution requests
received from others will not be considered.
14-400-029-03 / 14-400-029-03 NMSU DHW & HHW CD'S
01 6000 - 2
B. Engineer will not consider requests for substitutions after date of Agreement except as
follows:
1. Substitutions may be considered when a product becomes unavailable through no
fault of the Contractor.
C. Document each request with complete data substantiating compliance of proposed
substitution with Contract Documents.
D. A request for substitution constitutes a representation that the submitter:
1. Has investigated proposed product and determined that it meets or exceeds the
quality level of the specified product.
2. Will provide the same warranty for the substitution as for the specified product.
3. Will coordinate installation and make changes to other Work that may be required
for the Work to be complete with no additional cost to Owner.
4. Waives claims for additional costs or time extension that may subsequently become
apparent.
5. Will reimburse Owner and Engineer for review or redesign services associated with
re-approval by authorities.
E. Substitutions will not be considered when they are indicated or implied on shop drawing
or product data submittals, without separate written request, or when acceptance will
require revision to the Contract Documents.
F. Engineer reserves the right to reject substitutions on basis of color, pattern,
compatibility, or aesthetic qualities, even though fabrication and materials are
equivalent.
G. Substitution Submittal Procedure:
1. Submit two copies of request for substitution for consideration. Limit each request
to one proposed substitution.
2. Submit shop drawings, product data, and certified test results attesting to the
proposed product equivalence. Burden of proof is on proposer.
3. The Engineer will notify Contractor in writing of decision to accept or reject
request.
3.2 TRANSPORTATION AND HANDLING
A. Coordinate schedule of product delivery to designated prepared areas in order to
minimize site storage time and potential damage to stored materials.
B. Transport and handle products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
C. Transport materials in covered trucks to prevent contamination of product and littering
of surrounding areas.
D. Promptly inspect shipments to ensure that products comply with requirements,
quantities are correct, and products are undamaged.
E. Provide equipment and personnel to handle products by methods to prevent soiling,
disfigurement, or damage.
F. Arrange for the return of packing materials, such as wood pallets, where economically
14-400-029-03 / 14-400-029-03 NMSU DHW & HHW CD'S
01 6000 - 3
feasible.
3.3 STORAGE AND PROTECTION
A. Designate receiving/storage areas for incoming products so that they are delivered
according to installation schedule and placed convenient to work area in order to
minimize waste due to excessive materials handling and misapplication.
B. Store and protect products in accordance with manufacturers' instructions.
C. Store with seals and labels intact and legible.
D. Store sensitive products in weather tight, climate controlled, enclosures in an
environment favorable to product.
E. For exterior storage of fabricated products, place on sloped supports above ground.
F. Provide bonded off-site storage and protection when site does not permit on-site storage
or protection.
G. Cover products subject to deterioration with impervious sheet covering. Provide
ventilation to prevent condensation and degradation of products.
H. Prevent contact with material that may cause corrosion, discoloration, or staining.
I.
Provide equipment and personnel to store products by methods to prevent soiling,
disfigurement, or damage.
J.
Arrange storage of products to permit access for inspection. Periodically inspect to
verify products are undamaged and are maintained in acceptable condition.
END OF SECTION
14-400-029-03 / 14-400-029-03 NMSU DHW & HHW CD'S
01 6000 - 4
SECTION 01 7000
EXECUTION AND CLOSEOUT REQUIREMENTS
PART 1 GENERAL
A. Examination, preparation, and general installation procedures.
B. Cleaning and protection.
C. Starting of systems and equipment.
D. Demonstration and instruction of Owner personnel.
E. Closeout procedures, except payment procedures.
F. General requirements for maintenance service.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. See Section 01 3000 for submittal procedures.
B. Project Record Documents: Accurately record actual locations of capped and active
utilities.
1.3 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Use of explosives is not permitted.
B. Provide working, 2A10 BC fire extinguishers within 25 feet of all welding activities.
C. Grade site to drain. Maintain excavations free of water. Provide, operate, and
maintain pumping equipment.
D. Protect site from puddling or running water.
E. Ventilate enclosed areas to assist cure of materials, to dissipate humidity, and to prevent
accumulation of dust, fumes, vapors, or gases.
F. Dust Control: Execute work by methods to minimize raising dust from construction
operations. Provide positive means to prevent air-borne dust from dispersing into
atmosphere and over adjacent property.
1. Provide dust-proof enclosures to prevent entry of dust generated outdoors.
2. Provide dust-proof barriers between construction areas and areas continuing to be
occupied by Owner.
G. Erosion and Sediment Control: Plan and execute work by methods to control surface
drainage from cuts and fills, from borrow and waste disposal areas. Prevent erosion
and sedimentation.
14-400-029-03 / 14-400-029-03 NMSU DHW & HHW CD'S
01 7000 - 1
1.
2.
Minimize amount of bare soil exposed at one time.
Provide temporary measures such as berms, dikes, and drains, to prevent water
flow.
3. Construct fill and waste areas by selective placement to avoid erosive surface silts
or clays.
4. Periodically inspect earthwork to detect evidence of erosion and sedimentation;
promptly apply corrective measures.
H. Noise Control: Provide methods, means, and facilities to minimize noise produced by
construction operations.
I.
Rodent Control: Provide methods, means, and facilities to prevent rodents from
accessing or invading premises.
J.
Pollution Control: Provide methods, means, and facilities to prevent contamination of
soil, water, and atmosphere from discharge of noxious, toxic substances, and pollutants
produced by construction operations. Comply with federal, state, and local regulations.
1.4 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate scheduling, submittals, and work of the various sections of the Project
Manual to ensure efficient and orderly sequence of installation of interdependent
construction elements.
B. Notify affected utility companies and comply with their requirements.
C. Verify that utility requirements and characteristics of new operating equipment are
compatible with building utilities. Coordinate work of various sections having
interdependent responsibilities for installing, connecting to, and placing in service, such
equipment.
D. Coordinate space requirements, supports, and installation of mechanical and electrical
work that are indicated diagrammatically on Drawings. Follow routing shown for
pipes, ducts, and conduit, as closely as practicable; place runs parallel with lines of
building. Utilize spaces efficiently to maximize accessibility for other installations, for
maintenance, and for repairs.
E. In finished areas except as otherwise indicated, conceal pipes, ducts, and wiring within
the construction. Coordinate locations of fixtures and outlets with finish elements.
G. Coordinate completion and clean-up of work of separate sections.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 PATCHING MATERIALS
A. New Materials: As specified in product sections; match existing products and work for
patching and extending work.
B. Type and Quality of Existing Products: Determine by inspecting and testing products
14-400-029-03 / 14-400-029-03 NMSU DHW & HHW CD'S
01 7000 - 2
where necessary, referring to existing work as a standard.
C. Product Substitution: For any proposed change in materials, submit request for
substitution described in Section 01 6000.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that existing site conditions and substrate surfaces are acceptable for subsequent
work. Start of work means acceptance of existing conditions.
B. Verify that existing substrate is capable of structural support or attachment of new work
being applied or attached.
C. Examine and verify specific conditions described in individual specification sections.
D. Take field measurements before confirming product orders or beginning fabrication, to
minimize waste due to over-ordering or misfabrication.
E. Verify that utility services are available, of the correct characteristics, and in the correct
locations.
F. Prior to Cutting: Examine existing conditions prior to commencing work, including
elements subject to damage or movement during cutting and patching. After
uncovering existing work, assess conditions affecting performance of work. Beginning
of cutting or patching means acceptance of existing conditions.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Clean substrate surfaces prior to applying next material or substance.
B. Seal cracks or openings of substrate prior to applying next material or substance.
C. Apply manufacturer required or recommended substrate primer, sealer, or conditioner
prior to applying any new material or substance in contact or bond.
3.3 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS
A. convene a preinstallation meeting at the site prior to commencing work of the section.
B. Require attendance of parties directly affecting, or affected by, work of the specific
section.
C. Notify Engineer four days in advance of meeting date.
D. Prepare agenda and preside at meeting:
1. Review conditions of examination, preparation and installation procedures.
2. Review coordination with related work.
E. Record minutes and distribute copies within seven days after meeting to participants,
14-400-029-03 / 14-400-029-03 NMSU DHW & HHW CD'S
01 7000 - 3
with two copies to Engineer, Owner, participants, and those affected by decisions made.
3.4 LAYING OUT THE WORK
A. Verify locations of survey control points prior to starting work.
B. Promptly notify Engineer of any discrepancies discovered.
C. Contractor shall locate and protect survey control and reference points.
D. Protect survey control points prior to starting site work; preserve permanent reference
points during construction.
E. Promptly report to Engineer the loss or destruction of any reference point or relocation
required because of changes in grades or other reasons.
F. Replace dislocated survey control points based on original survey control. Make no
changes without prior written notice to Engineer.
G. Utilize recognized engineering survey practices.
H. Establish elevations, lines and levels. Locate and lay out by instrumentation and
similar appropriate means:
1. Site improvements including pavements; stakes for grading, fill and topsoil
placement; utility locations, slopes, and invert elevations; and other elevations as
indicated on the drawings.
2. Grid or axis for structures.
3. Foundations, column locations, ground floor elevations.
I.
Periodically verify layouts by same means.
J.
Maintain a complete and accurate log of control and survey work as it progresses.
3.5 GENERAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS
A. Install products as specified in individual sections, in accordance with manufacturer's
instructions and recommendations, and so as to avoid waste due to necessity for
replacement.
B. Make vertical elements plumb and horizontal elements level, unless otherwise indicated.
C. Install equipment and fittings plumb and level, neatly aligned with adjacent vertical and
horizontal lines, unless otherwise indicated.
D. Make consistent texture on surfaces, with seamless transitions, unless otherwise
indicated.
E. Make neat transitions between different surfaces, maintaining texture and appearance.
3.6 ALTERATIONS
A. Drawings showing existing construction and utilities are based on casual field
observation only.
14-400-029-03 / 14-400-029-03 NMSU DHW & HHW CD'S
01 7000 - 4
1. Verify that construction and utility arrangements are as shown.
2. Report discrepancies to Engineer before disturbing existing installation.
3. Beginning of alterations work constitutes acceptance of existing conditions.
B. Keep areas in which alterations are being conducted separated from other areas that are
still occupied.
1. Provide, erect, and maintain temporary dustproof partitions of construction
specified in Section 01 5000.
C. Maintain weatherproof exterior building enclosure except for interruptions required for
replacement or modifications; take care to prevent water and humidity damage.
1. Where openings in exterior enclosure exist, provide construction to make exterior
enclosure weatherproof.
2. Insulate existing ducts or pipes that are exposed to outdoor ambient temperatures
by alterations work.
D. Remove existing work as indicated and as required to accomplish new work.
1. Remove rotted wood, corroded metals, and deteriorated masonry and concrete;
replace with new construction specified.
2. Remove items indicated on drawings.
3. Relocate items indicated on drawings.
4. Where new surface finishes are to be applied to existing work, perform removals,
patch, and prepare existing surfaces as required to receive new finish; remove
existing finish if necessary for successful application of new finish.
5. Where new surface finishes are not specified or indicated, patch holes and damaged
surfaces to match adjacent finished surfaces as closely as possible.
E. Services (Including but not limited to HVAC, Plumbing, Fire Protection, and
Electrical): Remove, relocate, and extend existing systems to accommodate new
construction.
1. Maintain existing active systems that are to remain in operation; maintain access to
equipment and operational components; if necessary, modify installation to allow
access or provide access panel.
2. Where existing systems or equipment are not active and Contract Documents
require reactivation, put back into operational condition; repair supply, distribution,
and equipment as required.
3. Where existing active systems serve occupied facilities but are to be replaced with
new services, maintain existing systems in service until new systems are complete
and ready for service.
a. Disable existing systems only to make switchovers and connections; minimize
duration of outages.
b. Provide temporary connections as required to maintain existing systems in
service.
4. Verify that abandoned services serve only abandoned facilities.
5. Remove abandoned pipe, ducts, conduits, and equipment, including those above
accessible ceilings; remove back to source of supply where possible, otherwise cap
stub and tag with identification; patch holes left by removal using materials
specified for new construction.
14-400-029-03 / 14-400-029-03 NMSU DHW & HHW CD'S
01 7000 - 5
F. Protect existing work to remain.
1. Prevent movement of structure; provide shoring and bracing if necessary.
2. Perform cutting to accomplish removals neatly and as specified for cutting new
work.
3. Repair adjacent construction and finishes damaged during removal work.
4. Patch as specified for patching new work.
G. Adapt existing work to fit new work: Make as neat and smooth transition as possible.
H. When existing finished surfaces are cut so that a smooth transition with new work is not
possible, terminate existing surface along a straight line at a natural line of division and
make recommendation to Engineer.
I.
Where removal of partitions or walls results in adjacent spaces becoming one, rework
floors, walls, and ceilings to a smooth plane without breaks, steps, or bulkheads.
J.
Where a change of plane of 1/4 inch or more occurs in existing work, submit
recommendation for providing a smooth transition for Engineer review and request
instructions.
K. Where foot traffic is required over existing roof systems, comply with requirements of
existing roof manufacturer to protect existing components. If existing roofing
manufacturer cannot be identified, protect existing system with exterior grade plywood
of suitable thickness to prevent damage from occurring or other materials that are
acceptable to the Engineer.
L. Trim existing wood doors as necessary to clear new floor finish. Refinish trim as
required.
M. Patching: Where the existing surface is not indicated to be refinished, patch to match
the surface finish that existed prior to cutting. Where the surface is indicated to be
refinished, patch so that the substrate is ready for the new finish.
N. Refinish existing surfaces as indicated.
O. Where rooms or spaces are indicated to be refinished, refinish all visible existing
surfaces to remain to the specified condition for each material, with a neat transition to
adjacent finishes.
P. If mechanical or electrical work is exposed accidentally during the work, re-cover and
refinish to match.
1. Patch as specified for patching new work.
Q. Clean existing systems and equipment.
R. Remove demolition debris and abandoned items from alterations areas and dispose of
off-site; do not burn or bury.
S. Do not begin new construction in alterations areas before demolition is complete.
T. Comply with all other applicable requirements of this section.
3.7 CUTTING AND PATCHING
14-400-029-03 / 14-400-029-03 NMSU DHW & HHW CD'S
01 7000 - 6
A. Whenever possible, execute the work by methods that avoid cutting or patching.
B. See Alterations article above for additional requirements.
C. Perform whatever cutting and patching is necessary to:
1. Complete the work.
2. Fit products together to integrate with other work.
3. Provide openings for penetration of mechanical, electrical, and other services.
4. Match work that has been cut to adjacent work.
5. Repair areas adjacent to cuts to required condition.
6. Repair new work damaged by subsequent work.
7. Remove samples of installed work for testing when requested.
8. Remove and replace defective and non-conforming work.
D. Execute cutting and patching to complete the work, to uncover work to install
improperly sequenced work, to remove and replace defective or non-conforming work,
to remove samples of installed work for testing when requested, to provide openings in
the work for penetration of mechanical and electrical work, to execute patching to
complement adjacent work, and to fit Products together to integrate with other work.
E. Execute work by methods that avoid damage to other work and that will provide
appropriate surfaces to receive patching and finishing. In existing work, minimize
damage and restore to original condition.
F. Employ skilled and experienced installer to perform cutting for weather exposed and
moisture resistant elements, and sight exposed surfaces.
G. Cut rigid materials using masonry saw or core drill. Pneumatic tools not allowed
without prior approval.
H. Restore work with new products in accordance with requirements of Contract
Documents.
I.
Fit work air tight to pipes, sleeves, ducts, conduit, and other penetrations through
surfaces.
J.
At penetrations of fire rated walls, partitions, ceiling, or floor construction, completely
seal voids with fire rated material, to full thickness of the penetrated element.
K. Patching:
1. Finish patched surfaces to match finish that existed prior to patching. On
continuous surfaces, refinish to nearest intersection or natural break. For an
assembly, refinish entire unit.
2. Match color, texture, and appearance.
3. Repair patched surfaces that are damaged, lifted, discolored, or showing other
imperfections due to patching work. If defects are due to condition of substrate,
repair substrate prior to repairing finish.
L. Refinish surfaces to match adjacent finish. For continuous surfaces, refinish to nearest
intersection or natural break. For an assembly, refinish entire unit.
M. Make neat transitions. Patch work to match adjacent work in texture and appearance.
Where new work abuts or aligns with existing, perform a smooth and even transition.
14-400-029-03 / 14-400-029-03 NMSU DHW & HHW CD'S
01 7000 - 7
N. Visual Requirements: Do not cut and patch in a manner that would, in the Engineer's
opinion, reduce the building's aesthetic qualities. Do not cut and patch construction in
a manner that would result in visual evidence of cutting and patching. Remove and
replace construction cut and patched in a visually unsatisfactory manner.
O. Patch or replace surfaces that are damaged, lifted, discolored, or showing other
imperfections due to patching work. Repair substrate prior to patching finish. Finish
patches to produce uniform finish and texture over entire area. When finish cannot be
matched, refinish entire surface to nearest intersections.
1. Patch with durable seams that are as invisible as possible. Comply with specified
tolerances.
a. Restore exposed finishes of patched areas and extend finish restoration into
retained adjoining construction in a manner that will eliminate evidence of
patching and refinishing.
b. Where removing walls or partitions extends one finished area into another,
patch and repair floor and wall surfaces in the new space. Provide an even
surface of uniform color and appearance. Remove existing floor and wall
coverings and replace with new materials, if necessary, to achieve uniform
color and appearance.
1) Where patching occurs in a smooth painted surface, extend final paint coat
over entire unbroken surface containing the patch after the area has
received primer and second coat.
2) Patch repair, or rehang ceilings as necessary to provide an even-plane
surface of uniform appearance.
3.8 PROGRESS CLEANING
A. Maintain areas free of waste materials, debris, and rubbish. Maintain site in a clean
and orderly condition.
B. Remove debris and rubbish from pipe chases, plenums, attics, crawl spaces, and other
closed or remote spaces, prior to enclosing the space.
C. Broom and vacuum clean interior areas prior to start of surface finishing, and continue
cleaning to eliminate dust.
D. Collect and remove waste materials, debris, and trash/rubbish from site periodically and
dispose off-site; do not burn or bury.
3.9 PROTECTION OF INSTALLED WORK
A. Protect installed work from damage by construction operations.
B. Provide special protection where specified in individual specification sections.
C. Provide temporary and removable protection for installed products. Control activity in
immediate work area to prevent damage.
D. Provide protective coverings at walls, projections, jambs, sills, and soffits of openings.
E. Protect finished floors, stairs, and other surfaces from traffic, dirt, wear, damage, or
14-400-029-03 / 14-400-029-03 NMSU DHW & HHW CD'S
01 7000 - 8
movement of heavy objects, by protecting with durable sheet materials.
F. Prohibit traffic or storage upon waterproofed or roofed surfaces. If traffic or activity is
necessary, obtain recommendations for protection from waterproofing or roofing
material manufacturer.
G. Remove protective coverings when no longer needed; reuse or recycle plastic coverings
if possible.
3.10 SYSTEM STARTUP
A. Coordinate schedule for start-up of various equipment and systems.
B. Notify Engineer and owner seven days prior to start-up of each item.
C. Verify that each piece of equipment or system has been checked for proper lubrication,
drive rotation, belt tension, control sequence, and for conditions that may cause damage.
D. Verify tests, meter readings, and specified electrical characteristics agree with those
required by the equipment or system manufacturer.
E. Verify that wiring and support components for equipment are complete and tested.
F. Execute start-up under supervision of applicable Contractor personnel in accordance
with manufacturers' instructions.
G. When specified in individual specification Sections, require manufacturer to provide
authorized representative to be present at site to inspect, check, and approve equipment
or system installation prior to start-up, and to supervise placing equipment or system in
operation.
H. Submit a written report that equipment or system has been properly installed and is
functioning correctly.
3.11 DEMONSTRATION AND INSTRUCTION
A. Demonstrate operation and maintenance of products to Owner's personnel two weeks
prior to date of Substantial Completion.
B. Utilize operation and maintenance manuals as basis for instruction. Review contents of
manual with Owner's personnel in detail to explain all aspects of operation and
maintenance.
C. Prepare and insert additional data in operations and maintenance manuals when need for
additional data becomes apparent during instruction.
D. The amount of time required for instruction on each item of equipment and system is
that specified in individual sections.
3.12 ADJUSTING
14-400-029-03 / 14-400-029-03 NMSU DHW & HHW CD'S
01 7000 - 9
A. Adjust operating products and equipment to ensure smooth and unhindered operation.
3.13 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES
A. Make submittals that are required by governing or other authorities.
1. Provide copies to Owner.
B. Notify Engineer when work is considered ready for Substantial Completion.
1. Progress Photographs: Take photographs as evidence of existing project
conditions as follows:
a. Within 24 hours of Engineer's request provide progress photographs of the
work at locations as directed.
b. Provide factual presentation.
c. Provide correct exposure and focus, high resolution and sharpness, maximum
depth of field, and minimum distortion.
d. A maximum of 24 photographs will be required.
e. Deliver photographs to Engineer's office via electronic mail or overnight
delivery.
f. Engineer reserves the right to determine whether project is ready for
Substantial Completion Inspection based solely upon the evidence from the
progress photos.
g. If Engineer deems project is not ready for Substantial Completion Inspection,
notify Engineer when work is ready, and submit new progress photographs at
locations as directed by Engineer.
C. Submit written certification that Contract Documents have been reviewed, work has
been inspected, and that work is complete in accordance with Contract Documents and
ready for Engineer's review.
1. Include comprehensive list of items to be completed or corrected prior to final
payment (Contractor's Punch List). Failure to include an item on the list does not
alter the responsibility of the Contractor to complete all work in accordance with
the Contract Documents.
D. Upon receipt of Contractor's certification that the work is complete, the Engineer will
make an inspection to determine whether the work or designated portion thereof can be
occupied or utilized by the Owner for its intended use (substantially complete).
1. If the Engineer determines any item, whether or not included on the Contractor's
Punch List, is not substantially complete, the Contractor shall, before issuance of
the Certificates of Substantial Completion, complete or correct such item upon
notification by the Engineer.
2. If the Engineer determines any item not included on the Contractor's Punch List is
not in accordance with the Contract Documents, and that the work is substantially
complete, the Engineer will provide the Contractor with a list of the items
(Engineer's Punch List), and include it with the executed Certificates of Substantial
Completion, for completion or correction.
E. Correct items of work listed in executed Certificates of Substantial Completion and
comply with requirements for access to Owner-occupied areas.
14-400-029-03 / 14-400-029-03 NMSU DHW & HHW CD'S
01 7000 - 10
F. Notify Engineer when work is considered finally complete.
G. Complete items of work determined by Engineer's final inspection.
3.14 MAINTENANCE
A. Provide service and maintenance of components indicated in specification sections.
B. Maintenance Period: As indicated in specification sections or, if not indicated, not less
than one year from the Date of Substantial Completion or the length of the specified
warranty, whichever is longer.
C. Examine system components at a frequency consistent with reliable operation. Clean,
adjust, and lubricate as required.
D. Include systematic examination, adjustment, and lubrication of components. Repair or
replace parts whenever required. Use parts produced by the manufacturer of the
original component.
E. Maintenance service shall not be assigned or transferred to any agent or subcontractor
without prior written consent of the Owner.
END OF SECTION
14-400-029-03 / 14-400-029-03 NMSU DHW & HHW CD'S
01 7000 - 11
SECTION 01 7800
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
PART 1 GENERAL
A. Project Record Documents.
B. Operation and Maintenance Data.
C. Warranties and bonds.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Project Record Documents: Submit documents to Engineer with claim for final
Application for Payment.
B. Submit 1 copy of Project Record Documents 15 days prior to final inspection. This
copy will be reviewed and returned after final inspection, with Engineer comments.
Revise content of all document sets as required prior to final submission.
1. Submit two sets of revised final documents in final form within 10 days after final
inspection.
a. Final form of record specifications and record shop drawings: Marked-up
originals.
C. Operation and Maintenance Data:
1. For equipment, or component parts of equipment put into service during
construction and operated by Owner, submit completed documents within ten days
after acceptance.
2. Submit one copy of completed documents 15 days prior to final inspection. This
copy will be reviewed and returned after final inspection, with Engineer comments.
Revise content of all document sets as required prior to final submission.
3. Submit two sets of revised final documents in final form within 10 days after final
inspection.
D. Warranties and Bonds:
1. For equipment or component parts of equipment put into service during
construction with Owner's permission, submit documents within 10 days after
acceptance.
2. Make other submittals within 10 days after Date of Substantial Completion, prior to
final Application for Payment.
3. For items of Work for which acceptance is delayed beyond Date of Substantial
Completion, submit within 10 days after acceptance, listing the date of acceptance
as the beginning of the warranty period.
14-400-029-03 / 14-400-029-03 NMSU DHW & HHW CD'S
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
01 7800 - 1
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS
A. Maintain on site one set of the following record documents; record actual revisions to
the Work:
1. Drawings.
2. Specifications.
3. Addenda.
4. Change Orders and other modifications to the Contract.
5. Reviewed shop drawings, product data, and samples.
6. Manufacturer's instruction for assembly, installation, and adjusting.
B. Ensure entries are complete and accurate, enabling future reference by Owner.
C. Store record documents separate from documents used for construction.
D. Record information concurrent with construction progress.
E. Specifications: Legibly mark and record at each product section description of actual
products installed, including the following:
1. Manufacturer's name and product model and number.
2. Product substitutions or alternates utilized.
3. Selection of options and information on concealed construction that cannot
otherwise be readily discerned later by direct observation.
4. Changes made by Addenda and modifications.
F. Record Drawings and Shop Drawings: Legibly mark each item to record actual
construction including:
1. Measured locations of internal utilities and appurtenances concealed in
construction, referenced to visible and accessible features of the Work.
2. Field changes of dimension and detail.
3. Details not on original Contract drawings.
4. Concealed elements that would be difficult to measure and record at a later date.
5. New information that is important to the Owner but was not shown on Contract
Drawings or Shop Drawings.
6. Related change-order numbers where applicable.
G. Label each sheet of record drawings to read "Record Drawing." Label cover sheet of
specifications to read "Record Specifications." Label each sheet of record shop
drawings to read "Record Shop Drawing."
3.2 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA
A. For Each Product or System: List names, addresses and telephone numbers of
Subcontractors and suppliers, including local source of supplies and replacement parts.
14-400-029-03 / 14-400-029-03 NMSU DHW & HHW CD'S
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
01 7800 - 2
B. Product Data: Mark each sheet to clearly identify specific products and component
parts, and data applicable to installation. Delete inapplicable information.
C. Drawings: Supplement product data to illustrate relations of component parts of
equipment and systems, to show control and flow diagrams. Do not use Project Record
Documents as maintenance drawings.
D. Typed Text: As required to supplement product data. Provide logical sequence of
instructions for each procedure, incorporating manufacturer's instructions.
3.3 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA FOR MATERIALS AND FINISHES
A. For Each Product, Applied Material, and Finish:
1. Product data, with catalog number, size, composition, and color and texture
designations.
2. Information for re-ordering custom manufactured products.
B. Instructions for Care and Maintenance: Manufacturer's recommendations for cleaning
agents and methods, precautions against detrimental cleaning agents and methods, and
recommended schedule for cleaning and maintenance.
C. Additional information as specified in individual product specification sections.
3.4 WARRANTIES AND BONDS
A. Obtain warranties and bonds, executed in duplicate by responsible Subcontractors,
suppliers, and manufacturers, within 10 days after completion of the applicable item of
work. Except for items put into use with Owner's permission, leave date of beginning
of time of warranty until the Date of Substantial completion is determined.
B. Verify that documents are in proper form, contain full information, and are notarized.
C. Co-execute submittals when required.
D. Retain warranties and bonds until time specified for submittal.
E. Include originals of each in operation and maintenance manuals, indexed separately on
Table of Contents.
END OF SECTION
14-400-029-03 / 14-400-029-03 NMSU DHW & HHW CD'S
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
01 7800 - 3
SECTION 02 4100
DEMOLITION
PART 1 GENERAL
A. Selective demolition of building elements for alteration purposes.
1.2 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. ASTM D 4832 - Standard Test Method for Preparation and Testing of Controlled Low
Strength Material (CLSM) Test Cylinders; 2010.
B. NFPA 241 - Standard for Safeguarding Construction, Alteration, and Demolition
Operations; 2009.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Remove: Remove and legally dispose of items except those indicated to be reinstalled,
salvaged, or to remain the Owner's property.
B. Remove and Salvage: Items indicated to be removed and salvaged remain the Owner's
property. Remove, clean, and pack or crate items to protect against damage. Identify
contents of containers and deliver to Owner's designated storage area.
C. Remove and Relocate: Remove items indicated; clean, service, and otherwise prepare
them for reuse; store and protect against damage. Reinstall items in the same locations
or in locations indicated.
D. Existing to Remain: Protect construction indicated to remain against damage and
soiling during selective demolition. When permitted by the Engineer, items may be
removed to a suitable, protected storage location during selective demolition and then
cleaned and reinstalled in their original locations.
1.4 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
A. Sequence demolition work in phases as indicated in Section 01 1000.
B. Demolition work: Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.
1.5 SUBMITTALS
B. Project Record Documents: Accurately record actual locations of capped and active
utilities and subsurface construction.
1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Minimize production of dust due to demolition operations; do not use water if that will
result in ice, flooding, sedimentation of public waterways or storm sewers, or other
pollution.
B. Materials Ownership: Except for items or materials indicated to be reused, salvaged,
reinstalled, or otherwise indicated to remain the Owner's property, demolished
14-400-029-03 / 14-400-029-03 NMSU DHW & HHW CD'S
DEMOLITION
02 4100 - 1
materials shall become the Contractor's property and shall be removed from the site
with further disposition at the Contractor's option.
C. Visual Requirements: Do not cut and patch construction exposed on the exterior or in
occupied spaces in a manner that would, in the Engineer's opinion, reduce the facility's
aesthetic qualities.
1. Do not cut and patch construction in a manner that would result in visual evidence
of cutting and patching.
2. Remove and replace construction cut and patched in a visually unsatisfactory
manner.
D. Notify Owner 7 calendar days in advance, of work that may create dust, noise, and
odors.
PART 2 PRODUCTS -- NOT USED
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 GENERAL PROCEDURES AND PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Comply with other requirements specified in Division 01.
B. Comply with applicable codes and regulations for demolition operations and safety of
adjacent structures and the public.
1. Obtain required permits.
2. Comply with applicable requirements of NFPA 241.
3. Use of explosives is not permitted.
4. Take precautions to prevent catastrophic or uncontrolled collapse of structures to
be removed; do not allow worker or public access within range of potential
collapse of unstable structures.
5. Provide, erect, and maintain temporary barriers and security devices.
6. Use physical barriers to prevent access to areas that could be hazardous to workers
or the public.
7. Conduct operations to minimize effects on and interference with adjacent
structures and occupants.
8. Do not close or obstruct roadways or sidewalks without permit.
9. Conduct operations to minimize obstruction of public and private entrances and
exits; do not obstruct required exits at any time; protect persons using entrances
and exits from removal operations.
10. Obtain written permission from owners of adjacent properties when demolition
equipment will traverse, infringe upon or limit access to their property.
C. Do not begin removal until receipt of notification to proceed from Owner.
D. Do not begin removal until built elements to be salvaged or relocated have been
removed.
E. Protect existing structures and other elements that are not to be removed.
1. Provide bracing and shoring.
2. Prevent movement or settlement of adjacent structures.
14-400-029-03 / 14-400-029-03 NMSU DHW & HHW CD'S
DEMOLITION
02 4100 - 2
3. Stop work immediately if adjacent structures appear to be in danger.
F. Minimize production of dust due to demolition operations; do not use water if that will
result in ice, flooding, sedimentation of public waterways or storm sewers, or other
pollution.
G. If hazardous materials are discovered during removal operations, stop work and notify
Engineer and Owner; hazardous materials include regulated asbestos containing
materials, lead, PCB's, and mercury.
1. NESHAPS have been performed (Industrial Hygiene And Safety Technology, Inc.,
dated November 22, 2013) for this facility; No hazardous materials discovered.
H. Prior to Cutting: Examine existing conditions prior to commencing work, including
elements subject to damage or movement during cutting and patching. After uncovering
existing work, assess conditions affecting performance of work. Beginning of cutting or
patching means acceptance of existing conditions.
I. Partial Removal of Paving and Curbs: Neatly saw cut at right angle to surface.
3.2 EXISTING UTILITIES
A. Coordinate work with utility companies; notify before starting work and comply with
their requirements; obtain required permits.
B. Protect existing utilities to remain from damage.
C. Do not disrupt public utilities without permit from authority having jurisdiction.
D. Do not close, shut off, or disrupt existing life safety systems that are in use without at
least 7 days prior written notification to Owner.
E. Do not close, shut off, or disrupt existing utility branches or take-offs that are in use
without at least 3 days prior written notification to Owner.
F. Locate and mark utilities to remain; mark using highly visible tags or flags, with
identification of utility type; protect from damage due to subsequent construction, using
substantial barricades if necessary.
G. Remove exposed piping, valves, meters, equipment, supports, and foundations of
disconnected and abandoned utilities.
3.3 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION FOR ALTERATIONS
A. Drawings showing existing construction and utilities are based on casual field
observation and existing record documents only.
1. Verify that construction and utility arrangements are as shown.
2. Report discrepancies to Engineer before disturbing existing installation.
3. Beginning of demolition work constitutes acceptance of existing conditions that
would be apparent upon examination prior to starting demolition.
B. Separate areas in which demolition is being conducted from other areas that are still
occupied.
1. Provide, erect, and maintain temporary dustproof partitions of construction.
C. Maintain weatherproof exterior building enclosure except for interruptions required for
replacement or modifications; take care to prevent water and humidity damage.
14-400-029-03 / 14-400-029-03 NMSU DHW & HHW CD'S
DEMOLITION
02 4100 - 3
1.
Cover exposed parapet framing and sheathing with waterproof tarps; secure as
required to prevent blow-off.
D. Remove existing work as indicated and as required to accomplish new work.
1. Remove rotted wood, corroded metals, and deteriorated masonry and concrete;
replace with new construction specified.
2. Remove items indicated on drawings.
3.4 DEMOLITION, DEBRIS AND WASTE REMOVAL
A. Remove demolition, debris, junk, and trash from site.
B. Remove from site all materials not to be reused on site; do not burn or bury.
C. Disposal of demolition, debris, and waste: Provide in accordance with requirements of
authorities having jurisdiction.
D. Leave site in clean condition, ready for subsequent work.
E. Clean up spillage and wind-blown debris from public and private lands.
END OF SECTION
14-400-029-03 / 14-400-029-03 NMSU DHW & HHW CD'S
DEMOLITION
02 4100 - 4
SECTION 07 8400
FIRESTOPPING
PART 1 GENERAL
A. Firestopping systems.
B. Firestopping of all penetrations and joints to fire rated assemblies, whether indicated on
drawings or not, and other openings indicated.
A. ASTM E814 - Standard Test Method for Fire Tests of Through-Penetration Fire Stops;
2011a.
B. ITS (DIR) - Directory of Listed Products; Intertek Testing Services NA, Inc.; current
edition.
C. FM P7825 - Approval Guide; Factory Mutual Research Corporation; current edition.
D. SCAQMD 1168 - South Coast Air Quality Management District Rule No.1168; current
edition; www.aqmd.gov.
E. UL (FRD) - Fire Resistance Directory; Underwriters Laboratories Inc.; current edition.
1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Conform to requirements listed or to those of the local authorities having jurisdiction,
whichever is more stringent.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. See Section 01300 for submittal procedures.
B. Product Data: Provide data on product characteristics.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Fire Testing: Provide firestopping assemblies of designs that provide the scheduled fire
ratings when tested in accordance with methods indicated.
1. Listing in the current-year classification or certification books of UL, FM, or ITS
(Warnock Hersey) will be considered as constituting an acceptable test report.
2. Valid evaluation report published by ICC Evaluation Service, Inc. (ICC-ES) at
www.icc-es.org will be considered as constituting an acceptable test report.
B. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the products
specified in this section with minimum three years documented experience.
1.6 FIELD CONDITIONS
A. Comply with firestopping manufacturer's recommendations for temperature and
conditions during and after installation. Maintain minimum temperature before, during,
and for 3 days after installation of materials.
B. Provide ventilation in areas where solvent-cured materials are being installed.
14-400-029-03 / 14-400-029-03 NMSU DHW & HHW CD'S
FIRESTOPPING
07 8400 - 1
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 FIRESTOPPING - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Firestopping: Any material meeting requirements.
B. Primers, Sleeves, Forms, Insulation, Packing, Stuffing, and Accessories: Type required
for tested assembly design.
C. Fire Ratings: See Drawings for required systems and ratings.
2.2 FIRESTOPPING SYSTEMS
A. Firestopping: Any material meeting requirements.
1. Fire Ratings: Use any system listed by UL, FM, or ITS (Warnock Hersey) or tested
in accordance with ASTM E814 that has F Rating equal to fire rating of penetrated
assembly and minimum T Rating Equal to F Rating and that meets all other
specified requirements.
2.3 MATERIALS
A. Firestopping Sealants: Provide only products having lower volatile organic compound
(VOC) content than required by South Coast Air Quality Management District Rule
No.1168.
B. Firestopping Silicone Sealant: Gun grade, non-slump, ready-to-use, single component,
neutral cure, elastomeric silicone firestop that also acts as a barrier to water leakage and
airborne sound transmission.
1. Elongation: 600 percent.
2. Durability and Longevity: Permanent.
C. Elastomeric Firestopping: Single component elastomeric compound and compatible
sealant; conforming to the following:
D. Foam Firestopping: Single component foam compound; conforming to the following:
E. Fibered Compound Firestopping: Formulated compound mixed with incombustible
non-asbestos fibers; conforming to the following:
1. Density: 1 lb/cu ft.
F. Fiber Firestopping: Mineral fiber insulation used in conjunction with elastomeric
surface sealer forming airtight bond to opening; conforming to the following:
1. Density: 1 lb/cu ft.
G. Firestop Blocks: Ready-to-use, intumescent flexible block based on a two-component
polyurethane foam, conforming to the following:
14-400-029-03 / 14-400-029-03 NMSU DHW & HHW CD'S
FIRESTOPPING
07 8400 - 2
H. Firestop Blankets: Preformed, semirigid, non-asbestos, non-combustible mineral fiber
felt which is factory pre-cut to facilitate immediate installation; suitable for friction
fitted into openings or secured with impaling clips.
1. Density: Four pounds per cubic foot.
2. Moisture Absorption: < 1%; inorganic, will not mildew.
3. Product and Manufacturer: A/D FIREBARRIER Mineral Wool,: www.adfire.com
I. Primers, Sleeves, Forms, Insulation, Packing, Stuffing, and Accessories: Type required
for tested assembly design.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verify openings are ready to receive the work of this section.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Clean substrate surfaces of dirt, dust, grease, oil, loose material, or other matter that
could adversely affect bond of firestopping material.
B. Remove incompatible materials that could adversely affect bond.
C. Install backing materials to arrest liquid material leakage.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. Firestop all interruptions to fire rated assemblies, materials, and components resulting
from work of this Contract.
B. Install firestopping material where conduits, piping, and other items penetrate fire rated
assemblies.
C. Install materials in manner described in fire test report and in accordance with
manufacturer's instructions, completely closing openings.
D. Do not cover installed firestopping until inspected by authority having jurisdiction.
E. Install labeling required by code.
3.4 CLEANING
A. Clean adjacent surfaces of firestopping materials.
3.5 PROTECTION
A. Clean adjacent surfaces of firestopping materials.
B. Protect adjacent surfaces from damage by material installation.
END OF SECTION
14-400-029-03 / 14-400-029-03 NMSU DHW & HHW CD'S
FIRESTOPPING
07 8400 - 3
SECTION 08 1113
HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES
PART 1 GENERAL
A. Fire-rated steel frames.
D. Fire-rated steel doors.
A. Section 08 7100 - Door Hardware.
B. Section 09 9000 - Painting and Coating: Field painting.
A. ANSI/ICC A117.1 - American National Standard for Accessible and Usable Buildings
and Facilities; International Code Council; 2009.
B. ANSI A250.8 - SDI-100 Recommended Specifications for Standard Steel Doors and
Frames; 2003.
C. ANSI A250.10 - Test Procedure and Acceptance Criteria for Prime Painted Steel
Surfaces for Steel Doors and Frames; 1998 (R2011).
D. ASTM A653/A653M - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated
(Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process; 2011.
E. ASTM C236 - Standard Test Method for Steady-State Thermal Performance of
Building Assemblies by Means of a Guarded Hot Box; 1989 (Reapproved 1993).
F. BHMA A156.115 - Hardware Preparation in Steel Doors and Steel Frames; 2006.
G. DHI A115 Series - Specifications for Steel Doors and Frame Preparation for Hardware;
Door and Hardware Institute; 2000 (ANSI/DHI A115 Series).
H. NAAMM HMMA 840 - Guide Specifications for Installation and Storage of Hollow
Metal Doors and Frames; The National Association of Architectural Metal
Manufacturers; 2007.
I. UL (BMD) - Building Materials Directory; Underwriters Laboratories Inc.; current
edition.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
B. Product Data: Materials and details of design and construction, hardware locations,
reinforcement type and locations, anchorage and fastening methods, and finishes.
1. Fire Rated Doors and Frames:
a. Provide manufacturer's data indicating conformance with NFPA 80.
b. Provide independent testing agency data indicating conformance with fire
rating requirements indicated.
14-400-029-03 / 14-400-029-03 NMSU DHW & HHW CD'S
08 1113 - 1
C. Shop Drawings: Details of each opening, showing elevations, glazing, frame profiles,
and identifying location of different finishes, if any.
D. Certificates:
1. Provide evidence of manufacturer's membership in the Steel Door Institute or the
Hollow Metal Manufacturer's Association.
E. Installation Instructions: Manufacturer's published instructions, including any special
installation instructions relating to this project.
A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Provide all products from a single manufacturer who is a
member of the Hollow Metal Manufacturer's Association or the Steel Door Institute.
B. Fire Rated Assemblies: Provide assemblies tested by Underwriters Laboratory, Inc.,
Intertek Testing Services, or Factory Mutual.
1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Store in accordance with NAAMM HMMA 840.
B. Protect with resilient packaging; avoid humidity build-up under coverings; prevent
corrosion.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 DOORS AND FRAMES
A. Requirements for All Doors and Frames:
1. Accessibility: Comply with ANSI/ICC A117.1.
2. Hardware Preparation: In accordance with BHMA A156.115, with reinforcement
welded in place, in addition to other requirements specified in door grade standard.
B. Combined Requirements: If a particular door and frame unit is indicated to comply with
more than one type of requirement, comply with all the specified requirements for each
type; for instance, an exterior door that is also indicated as being sound-rated must
comply with the requirements specified for exterior doors and for sound-rated doors;
where two requirements conflict, comply with the most stringent.
2.2 STEEL DOORS
A. General:
1. Grade: ANSI A250.8 Level 3, physical performance Level A, Model 2, seamless.
2. Core: Vertical steel stiffeners.
3. Thickness: 1-3/4 inches.
4. Galvanizing: All components hot-dipped zinc-iron alloy-coated (galvannealed) in
accordance with ASTM A653/A653M, with A40/ZF120 coating.
5. Texture: Smooth faces.
6. Insulating Value: U-value of 0.50, when tested in accordance with ASTM C1363
or ASTM C 236.
7. Product and Manufacturer: 747T Series with flush top and bottom, Curries
Company, a division of Essex Industries, Inc.: www.curies.com or approved equal.
14-400-029-03 / 14-400-029-03 NMSU DHW & HHW CD'S
08 1113 - 2
2.3 STEEL FRAMES
A. General:
1. Comply with the requirements of grade specified for corresponding door.
a. ANSI A250.8 Level 1 Doors: 16 gage frames.
b. Frames for Wood Doors: Comply with frame requirements specified in ANSI
A250.8 for Level 2
2. Finish: Factory primed, for field finishing.
3. Provide mortar guard boxes for hardware cut-outs in frames to be installed in
masonry or to be grouted.
4. Grout Holes: Factory prepare frames with openings for grout holes at frames that
will be grouted after wall construction is completed. Provide 12 gage reinforced
plates with 1-3/8" diameter grout holes. Locate on rabbet of frame, in quantities as
required to install grout throughout frame.
a. Filler Plates: Provide filler plates for each grout hole, of same gage as frame.
5. Frame Anchors: Manufacturer's standard anchoring devices for indicated opening
types, minimum six per frame, with anchoring device accessories specified in
manufacturer's installation instructions.
a. Existing concrete or masonry construction: Provide pipe sleeve anchors. Set
frames and secure to adjacent construction with bolts.
b. Masonry or concrete construction: Provide masonry wire anchors or masonry
T-shaped anchors.
c. Metal stud construction: Provide Z-clip or universal type anchors. Attach
anchors to studs with screws.
d. Door Frames: Provide 3 anchors minimum for each jamb for frames up to 78
inches in height; 4 anchors up to 96 inch jamb height; one additional anchor
each 24 inches or fraction thereof over 96 inch jamb height.
1) Door frame anchor locations: Provide anchors on each jamb at hinge and
strike levels.
e. Window frame anchor locations: One anchor for each 30 inches of frame
height or fraction thereof.
6. Frames in Masonry Walls: Size to suit masonry coursing with head member 4
inches high to fill opening without cutting masonry units.
7. Frames Installed Back-to-Back: Reinforce with steel channels anchored to floor
and overhead structure.
2.4 ACCESSORY MATERIALS
A. Silencers: Resilient rubber, fitted into drilled hole; 3 on strike side of single door, 3 on
center mullion of pairs, and 2 on head of pairs without center mullions.
B. Temporary Frame Spreaders: Provide for all factory- or shop-assembled frames.
2.5 FINISH MATERIALS
A. Primer: Rust-inhibiting, complying with ANSI A250.10, door manufacturer's standard.
B. Bituminous Coating: Asphalt emulsion or other high-build, water-resistant, resilient
coating.
14-400-029-03 / 14-400-029-03 NMSU DHW & HHW CD'S
08 1113 - 3
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verify existing conditions before starting work.
B. Verify that opening sizes and tolerances are acceptable.
C. Verify connections for electrical hardware are available before starting work.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Coat inside of frames to be installed in masonry or to be grouted, with bituminous
coating, prior to installation.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. Install in accordance with the requirements of the specified door grade standard and
NAAMM HMMA 840.
B. Coordinate frame anchor placement with wall construction.
C. Coordinate installation of hardware.
D. Coordinate installation of electrical connections to electrical hardware items.
3.4 TOLERANCES
A. Clearances Between Door and Frame: As specified in ANSI A250.8.
B. Maximum Diagonal Distortion: 1/16 in measured with straight edge, corner to corner.
3.5 ADJUSTING
A. Adjust for smooth and balanced door movement.
END OF SECTION
14-400-029-03 / 14-400-029-03 NMSU DHW & HHW CD'S
08 1113 - 4
SECTION 08 7100
DOOR HARDWARE
PART 1 GENERAL
A. Hardware for fire-rated doors.
B. Thresholds.
C. Weatherstripping, seals and sweeps.
A. Section 08 1113 - Hollow Metal Doors and Frames.
A. ANSI/ICC A117.1 - American National Standard for Accessible and Usable Buildings
and Facilities; International Code Council; 2009.
B. BHMA A156.2 - American National Standard for Bored and Preassembled Locks &
Latches; Builders Hardware Manufacturers Association; 2011 (ANSI/BHMA A156.2).
C. BHMA A156.4 - American National Standard for Door Controls - Closers; Builders
Hardware Manufacturers Association, Inc.; 2008 (ANSI/BHMA A156.4).
D. BHMA A156.8 - American National Standard for Door Controls - Overhead Stops and
Holders; Builders Hardware Manufacturers Association, Inc.; 2010 (ANSI/BHMA
A156.8).
E. BHMA A156.18 - American National Standard for Materials and Finishes; Builders
Hardware Manufacturers Association, Inc.; 2006 (ANSI/BHMA A156.18).
F. BHMA A156.22 - American National Standard for Door Gasketing and Edge Seal
Systems, Builders Hardware Manufacturers Association; 2012 (ANSI/BHMA
A156.22).
G. DHI (LOCS) - Recommended Locations for Architectural Hardware for Standard Steel
Doors and Frames; Door and Hardware Institute; 2004.
H. NFPA 80 - Standard for Fire Doors and Other Opening Protectives; 2013.
I. NFPA 101 - Life Safety Code; National Fire Protection Association; 2012.
J. UL (BMD) - Building Materials Directory; Underwriters Laboratories Inc.; current
edition.
A. Coordinate the manufacture, fabrication, and installation of products onto which door
hardware will be installed.
B. Furnish templates for door and frame preparation to manufacturers and fabricators of
products requiring internal reinforcement for door hardware.
C. Convey Owner's keying requirements to manufacturers.
14-400-029-03 / 14-400-029-03 NMSU DHW & HHW CD'S
DOOR HARDWARE
08 7100 - 1
1.5 SUBMITTALS
B. Product Data: Manufacturer's catalog literature for each type of hardware, marked to
clearly show products to be furnished for this project.
1. Include material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles,
operational descriptions and finishes.
C. Shop Drawings:
1. Indicate locations and mounting heights of each type of hardware, schedules, and
catalog cuts.
D. Hardware Schedule: Detailed listing of each item of hardware to be installed on each
door. Use door numbering scheme as included in the Contract Documents. Identify
electrically operated items and include power requirements.
1. Coordinate preparation of the hardware schedule with the hardware supplier,
detailing fabrication and assembly of door hardware, as well as procedures and
diagrams.
2. Coordinate the hardware schedule with doors, frames, and related work to ensure
proper size, thickness, hand, function, and finish of door hardware.
3. Number each set independently, matching the same numbering system listed in the
Hardware Schedule at the end of this Section. Include quantities, model numbers,
finishes, and other characteristics as indicated.
E. Keying Schedule: Submit for approval of Owner.
1. Include keying system explanation, door numbers, key set symbols, hardware set
numbers and special instructions.
2. Do not order permanent cylinders until keying schedule is approved by Owner.
F. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate special procedures, perimeter
conditions requiring special attention.
G. Maintenance Data: Include data on operating hardware, lubrication requirements, and
inspection procedures related to preventative maintenance.
H. Keys: Deliver with identifying tags to Owner by security shipment direct from
hardware supplier.
I. Warranty: Submit manufacturer's warranty and ensure that forms have been completed
in Owner's name and registered with manufacturer.
A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the products
specified in this section with minimum 10 years of documented experience.
B. Hardware Supplier Qualifications: Company specializing in supplying commercial door
hardware with 10 years of documented experience.
A. Package hardware items individually; label and identify each package with door
opening code to match hardware schedule.
14-400-029-03 / 14-400-029-03 NMSU DHW & HHW CD'S
DOOR HARDWARE
08 7100 - 2
1.8 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate the work with other directly affected sections involving manufacture or
fabrication of internal reinforcement for door hardware.
B. Furnish templates for door and frame preparation.
C. Coordinate Owner's keying requirements during the course of the Work.
1.9 WARRANTY
A. Warranty Period: Written warranty, executed by manufacturer(s), agreeing to repair or
replace components of standard and electrified door hardware that fails in materials or
workmanship within specified warranty period after final acceptance by the Owner.
Failures include, but are not limited to, the following:
1. Structural failures including excessive deflection, cracking, or breakage.
2. Faulty operation of the hardware.
3. Deterioration of metals, metal finishes, and other materials beyond normal
weathering.
B. Standard Warranty Period: One year from date of Substantial Completion, unless
otherwise indicated.
C. Special Warranty Periods:
1. Cylindrical (bored) locks and latches: Seven years.
2. Exit Devices: Five years.
3. Manual door closers: Ten years.
1.10 MAINTENANCE PRODUCTS
A. Provide special wrenches and tools applicable to each different or special hardware
component.
B. Provide maintenance tools and accessories supplied by hardware component
manufacturer.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 DOOR HARDWARE - GENERAL
A. Provide all hardware specified or required to make doors fully functional, compliant
with applicable codes, and secure to the extent indicated.
B. Provide all items of a single type of the same model by the same manufacturer.
C. Provide products that comply with the following:
1. Applicable provisions of federal, state, and local codes.
2. ANSI/ICC A117.1, American National Standard for Accessible and Usable
Buildings and Facilities.
3. Applicable provisions of NFPA 101, Life Safety Code.
4. Fire-Rated Doors: NFPA 80.
5. All Hardware on Fire-Rated Doors: Listed and classified by UL as suitable for the
purpose specified and indicated.
14-400-029-03 / 14-400-029-03 NMSU DHW & HHW CD'S
DOOR HARDWARE
08 7100 - 3
6.
Hardware for Smoke and Draft Control Doors: Provide hardware that enables door
assembly to comply with air leakage requirements of the applicable code.
D. Finishes: All door hardware the same finish unless otherwise indicated.
1. Primary Finish: Satin chrome plated over nickel on brass or bronze, 626 (approx
US26D).
2. Finish Definitions: BHMA A156.18.
3. Exceptions:
a. Where base metal is specified to be different, provide finish that is an
appearance equivalent according to BHMA A156.18.
b. Hinges for Fire-Rated Doors: Steel base metal with plated finish.
E. Fasteners:
1. Concrete and Masonry Substrates: Stainless steel machine screws and lead
expansion shields.
2. Provide flat-head Phillips screws for installation with each hardware item to match
hardware finish except as otherwise indicated or as otherwise required by
manufacturer.
3. Provide concealed fasteners for hardware components exposed when door is
closed; Provide sleeves for each thru bolt or use hex screw fasteners.
F. Designations: Requirements for quantity, item, size, finish or color, grade, function, and
other distinctive qualities of each type of door hardware are indicated in the Door
Hardware Sets at the end of this Section. Products are identified by using door
hardware designations, as follows:
1. Named Manufacturer's Products: Product designation and manufacturer are listed
for each door hardware type required for the purpose of establishing requirements;
Manufacturer's names are abbreviated.
2.2 HINGES
A. Hinges: Provide hinges on every swinging door.
1. Provide hinges in the quantities indicated.
2. Interior Doors: Except as otherwise indicated, provide nonrising pins.
B. Manufacturers - Hinges:
1. Assa Abloy McKinney: www.assaabloydss.com.
2. Bommer Industries, Inc.: www.bommer.com.
3. C. R. Laurence Co., Inc.: www.crl-arch.com.
4. Hager Companies: www.hagerhinge.com.
5. Ives: www.ives.ingersollrand.com.
6. Stanley Black & Decker: www.stanleyblackanddecker.com.
2.3 LOCKS AND LATCHES
A. Locks: Provide a lock for every door, unless specifically indicated as not requiring
locking.
1. Hardware Sets indicate locking functions required for each door.
2. If no hardware set is indicated for a swinging door provide an office lockset.
14-400-029-03 / 14-400-029-03 NMSU DHW & HHW CD'S
DOOR HARDWARE
08 7100 - 4
3.
Trim: Provide lever handle or pull trim on outside of all locks unless specifically
stated to have no outside trim.
4. Lock Cylinders: Provide key access on outside of all locks unless specifically
stated to have no locking or no outside trim.
B. Lock Cylinders: Manufacturer’s standard tumbler type, six-pin standard core.
1. Provide cams and/or tailpieces as required for locking devices required.
C. Keying: Grand master keyed.
1. Comply with Owner's instructions for masterkeying.
2. Tag each key with a label which identifies the Room Name (or, in the case of
master keys, the type of master key).
D. Latches: Provide a latch for every door that is not required to lock, unless specifically
indicated "push/pull" or "not required to latch".
2.4 CYLINDRICAL LOCKSETS
A. Cylindrical Locks:
B. Locking Functions: As defined in BHMA A156.2, and as follows:
1. Office: F82 Grade 1, key not required to lock, unlocks upon exit.
2. Classroom: F84, key required to lock.
3. Storeroom: F86, always locked, key required to lock, may not be left unlocked.
C. Manufacturers - Cylindrical Locksets:
1. Assa Abloy Corbin Russwin, Sargent, or Yale: www.assaabloydss.com.
2. Best Access Systems: www.bestlock.com.
3. Hager Companies: www.hagerco.com.
4. Schlage Lock Company: www.schlage.com.
5. Corbin-Russwin: www.corbin-russwin.com.
6. No substitutions.
2.5 CLOSERS
A. Closers: Complying with BHMA A156.4.
1. Provide surface-mounted, door-mounted closers unless otherwise indicated.
2. Provide a door closer on every fire- and smoke-rated door. Spring hinges are not
an acceptable self-closing device unless specifically so indicated.
3. At corridors, locate door-mounted closer on room side of door.
B. Door Closers, Surface Mounted (Heavy Duty): Grade 1 surface mounted, heavy duty
door closers with complete spring power adjustment, sizes 1 thru 6; and fully
operational adjustable according to door size, frequency of use, and opening force.
Closers to be rack and pinion type, one piece cast iron or aluminum alloy body
construction, with adjustable backcheck and separate non-critical valves for closing
sweep and latch speed control. Provide non-handed units and high impact, noncorrosive plastic covers standard.
C. Manufacturers - Closers:
1. Assa Abloy Norton or Sargent: www.assaabloydss.com.
3. DORMA Group North America: www.dorma-usa.com.
14-400-029-03 / 14-400-029-03 NMSU DHW & HHW CD'S
DOOR HARDWARE
08 7100 - 5
4.
5.
Hager Companies: www.hagerco.com.
LCN: www.lcnclosers.com.
2.6 STOPS AND HOLDERS
A. Stops: Complying with BHMA A156.8; provide a stop for every swinging door, unless
B. Manufacturers - Wall and Floor Stops/Holders:
1. Assa Abloy McKinney or Rockwood: www.assaabloydss.com.
4. Glynn-Johnson: www.glynn-johnson.com.
5. Hager Companies: www.hagerhinge.com.
6. Ives: www.ives.ingersollrand.com.
7. Rockwood Manufacturing Company: www.rockwoodmfg.com.
2.7 GASKETING AND THRESHOLDS
A. Weatherstripping, Seals, Astragals, and Door Gaskets:
B. Gaskets: Complying with BHMA A156.22.
1. On each door in smoke partition, provide smoke gaskets; top, sides, and meeting
stile of pairs. If fire/smoke partitions are not indicated on drawings, provide smoke
gaskets on each door identified as a "smoke door" and 20-minute rated fire doors.
C. Manufacturers - Gasketing and Thresholds:
2. National Guard Products, Inc.: www.ngpinc.com.
3. Pemko Manufacturing Company: www.pemko.com.
4. Reese Enterprises, Inc.: www.reeseusa.com
5. Zero International, Inc.: www.zerointernational.com.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that doors and frames are ready to receive work; labeled, fire-rated doors and
frames are present and properly installed, and dimensions are as indicated on shop
drawings.
B. Notify Engineer of any discrepancies or conflicts between the door schedule, door
types, drawings and scheduled hardware. Proceed only after such discrepancies or
conflicts have been resolved in writing.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install hardware in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and applicable codes.
B. Use templates provided by hardware item manufacturer.
C. Install hardware on fire-rated doors and frames in accordance with code and NFPA 80.
D. Mounting heights for hardware from finished floor to center line of hardware item:
14-400-029-03 / 14-400-029-03 NMSU DHW & HHW CD'S
DOOR HARDWARE
08 7100 - 6
1.
For steel frames: Comply with DHI "Recommended Locations for Architectural
Hardware for Steel Doors and Frames."
E. Floor Stops: Do not mount floor stops where they will impede traffic.
1. Set floor stops 12 inches from wall; locate to abut door when door is in fully open
position.
3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Provide an Architectural Hardware Consultant to inspect installation and certify that
hardware and installation has been furnished and installed in accordance with
manufacturer's instructions and as specified.
3.4 ADJUSTING
A. Adjust hardware for smooth operation.
B. Adjust gasketing for complete, continuous seal; replace if unable to make complete
seal.
3.5 PROTECTION
A. Protect finished Work under provisions of Section 01 7000.
HARDWARE SETS
4.1 HARDWARE SCHEDULE
A. Manufacturer's product designation: Manufacturers are listed for hardware items to
establish minimum requirements. Provide product designated or equivalent product of
another manufacturer listed in Part 2 for specific hardware category.
1. Manufacturer's Abbreviations:
a. (BES): Best Access Systems; www.bestlock.com.
b. (IVE): Ives: www.ives.ingersollrand.com.
c. (LCN): LCN; www.lcnclosers.com.
d. (NGP): National Guard Products, Inc.; www.ngpinc.com.
e. (VON): Von Duprin; us.allegion.com/
HW SET: HW-01
Each to have:
3
EA HINGE
1
EA STOREROOM LOCK
1
EA SURFACE CLOSER
1
EA THRESHOLD
1
EA KICK PLATE
1
EA FLOOR STOP
1
EA SMOKE SEALS
3
EA SILENCER
5BB1 4.5 X 4.5
93K7D 15D
4011 X TB
425E X DW
8400 10" X 2" LDW
FS444
SS
SR64
652
626
689
628
630
628
IVE
GRY
IVE
BES
LCN
NGP
IVE
IVE
IVE
END OF SECTION
14-400-029-03 / 14-400-029-03 NMSU DHW & HHW CD'S
DOOR HARDWARE
08 7100 - 7
SECTION 09 2116
GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES
PART 1 GENERAL
A. Metal channel ceiling framing.
B. Gypsum board.
C. Joint treatment and accessories.
D. Gypsum board suspension system.
A. ASTM C 635 - Standard Specification for the Manufacture, Performance, and Testing
of Metal Suspension Systems for Acoustical Tile and Lay-in Panel Ceilings; 2004.
B. ASTM C645 - Standard Specification for Nonstructural Steel Framing Members; 2013.
C. ASTM C665 - Standard Specification for Mineral-Fiber Blanket Thermal Insulation for
Light Frame Construction and Manufactured Housing; 2012.
D. ASTM C754 - Standard Specification for Installation of Steel Framing Members to
Receive Screw-Attached Gypsum Panel Products; 2011.
E. ASTM C840 - Standard Specification for Application and Finishing of Gypsum Board;
2011.
F. ASTM C1047 - Standard Specification for Accessories for Gypsum Wallboard and
Gypsum Veneer Base; 2010a.
G. ASTM C1396/C1396M - Standard Specification for Gypsum Board; 2013.
H. ASTM E2178 - Test Method for Air Permeance of Building Materials.
I. GA-216 - Application and Finishing of Gypsum Board; Gypsum Association; 2013.
1.3 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS
A. Engineer, design, fabricate, and erect the pre-engineered gypsum board suspension
system to withstand loads from winds, gravity, seismic, structural movement including
movement thermally induced, and to resist in-service use conditions that the building
will experience, including exposure to the weather, without failure.
1. Design Loads: Basic design loads, as well as auxiliary and collateral loads, are
indicated on the drawings.
2. Basic design loads include live load, wind load, and seismic load, in addition to the
dead load.
3. Collateral loads include additional dead loads over and above the weight of the
pre-engineered building system such as sprinkler systems and roof-mounted
mechanical systems.
4. Size and fabricate gypsum board suspension system free of distortion or defects
detrimental to appearance or performance.
14-400-029-03 / 14-400-029-03 NMSU DHW & HHW CD'S
09 2116 - 1
1.4 SUBMITTALS
B. Shop Drawings: Provide layout of gypsum board suspension system including details,
accessories, connection attachments, openings, dimensions, panel layout, anchorage,
fasteners, and general construction details; provide professional seal and signature.
C. Product Data: Provide data on metal framing, gypsum board, accessories, joint
finishing system, accessories, joint finishing system, and impact-resistant gypsum
board.
D. Test Reports: For all stud framing products that do not comply with ASTM C645 or C
754, provide independent laboratory reports showing maximum stud heights at required
spacings and deflections.
E. Gypsum Board Suspension System Installer Qualifications: Submit certification that
installer has been erecting the gypsum board suspension specified in this section for the
period of time indicated in the Quality Assurance article below.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES
A. Provide completed assemblies complying with ASTM C840 and GA-216.
1. See PART 3 for finishing requirements.
2.2 METAL FRAMING MATERIALS
A. Framing System Components: ASTM C 645; galvanized sheet steel, of size and
properties necessary to comply with ASTM C 754 for the spacing indicated, with
maximum deflection of wall framing of L/240 at 5 psf.
1. Exception: The minimum metal thickness and section properties requirements of
ASTM C 645 are waived provided steel of 40 ksi minimum yield strength is used,
the metal is pre-engineered, the effective thickness is at least twice the base metal
thickness, and maximum stud heights are determined by testing in accordance with
ASTM E 72 using assemblies specified by ASTM C 754.
2. Studs: "C" shaped with flat or formed webs.
a. Size: As indicated.
b. Gage: 18 gage, minimum.
3. Track: U shaped, depth and gage to match studs.
4. Ceiling Channels: C-shaped.
5. Braces: C shaped, depth and gage as indicated.
6. Hat-shaped Furring Channels: Roll-formed, corrosion-resistant steel, hat-shaped
sections, minimum depth of 7/8 inch.
7. Resilient Furring Channels: 1/2 inch depth, for attachment to substrate through one
leg only.
B. Ceiling Hangers: Type and size as specified in ASTM C754 for spacing required.
14-400-029-03 / 14-400-029-03 NMSU DHW & HHW CD'S
09 2116 - 2
2.3 BOARD MATERIALS
A. Gypsum Board: Paper-faced gypsum wallboard as defined in ASTM C 1396/C 1396M;
sizes to minimize joints in place; ends square cut.
1. Application: Use for vertical surfaces and ceilings, unless otherwise indicated.
2. Fire-Rating: Type X board, UL or WH listed.
3. Thickness:
a. Vertical Surfaces: 5/8 inch.
b. Ceilings: 5/8 inch.
2.4 GYPSUM BOARD SUSPENSION SYSTEM
A. Pre-engineered gypsum board suspension system consisting of straight main tees along
with straight furring cross channels or cross tees, that join together to support gypsum
board and independently supported light fixtures and air diffusers; designed by
manufacturer to meet structural, seismic, fire resistance, and other applicable code
requirements.
1. Product and Manufacturer: USG Drywall Suspension System, USG Corporation:
www.usg.com or approved equal.
2.5 ACCESSORIES
A. Clip Angles: Formed angles from galvanized steel or rolled zinc sheets, gage to match
metal framing; of configuration indicated.
B. Powder Actuated Anchorage Device(s) for Masonry and Concrete: Knurled, ballistic
point with pre-mounted steel washers.
E. Metal Furring Channel Clips: Galvanized wire clips to attach hat-shaped furring to 11/2 inch deep ceiling channels.
F. Anchorage to Substrate: Secure framing components to substrate with tie wire, nails,
screws, and other metal supports, of type and size to suit application; to rigidly secure
materials in place.
G. Hanger Wire: ASTM A 641, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper, pre-stretched.
1. Size: Provide wire diameter so that its stress at 3 times the hanger design load
(ASTM C 635, Table 1, Direct Hung) will be less than the yield stress of wire, but
provide not less than 12 gage diameter wire.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that project conditions are appropriate for work of this section to commence.
3.2 CUTTING & PATCHING
A. Repair existing damaged gypsum board and gypsum board finishes to match original
condition. Fill holes, cuts, cracks, dents, and other irregularities.
B. Repair or replace damaged corner bead, trim, control joints, and other accessories to
match original condition.
14-400-029-03 / 14-400-029-03 NMSU DHW & HHW CD'S
09 2116 - 3
C. Where replacement of gypsum board is necessary, match type, thickness, and finish of
original gypsum board.
D. Do not cut and patch construction in a manner that would result in visual evidence of
cutting and patching.
3.3 FRAMING INSTALLATION
A. Metal Framing: Install in accordance with ASTM C754 and manufacturer's
instructions.
B. Suspended Ceilings and Soffits: Space framing and furring members as indicated.
1. Laterally brace entire suspension system.
C. Studs: Space studs as indicated at 16 inches on center.
1. Partitions Terminating at Bracing: Provide bracing system consisting of same stud
type spaced 48 inches on center, angled between 35 and 50 degrees, fastened to
stud framing 6 - 12 inches above ceiling and anchored to structural framing
members above ceiling.
a. Bracing perpendicular to structural members: Unless indicated otherwise
terminate bracing with top runner anchored to structure.
b. Bracing parallel to structural members: Unless indicated otherwise secure top
runner of bracing to perpendicular main runners of same size and gage as
partition stud, spaced 24 inches on center maximum; Anchor main runners to
structure as required to meet design requirements.
2. Attach ceiling runner securely to substrate in accordance with manufacturer's
instructions.
D. Openings: Reinforce openings as required for weight of doors or operable panels, using
not less than double studs at jambs.
E. Hat-Shaped Furring Channels: Install at locations indicated, not more than 4 inches
from floor and ceiling lines and abutting walls.
1. Orientation: Horizontal.
2. Spacing: At 16 inches on center.
F. Brake Metal: 18 gage formed steel sheet, ASTM A 653/A 653M SS Grade 50, with
G60/Z180 hot dipped galvanized coating; provide in configurations as indicated.
G. Blocking: Provide support of plumbing fixtures, toilet partitions, cabinets, toilet
accessories, shelves, fire extinguisher mounting brackets, urinal screens, and wall
mounted items in accordance with Section 06 1000.
H. Blocking: Provide 2x dimensional lumber (hem fir #2 or better) support of plumbing
fixtures, toilet partitions, cabinets, toilet accessories, shelves, fire extinguisher
mounting brackets, urinal screens, and wall mounted items.
3.4 GYPSUM BOARD SUSPENSION SYSTEM INSTALLATION
A. Install gypsum board suspension system in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B. Provide seismic bracing in accordance with requirements of authorities having
jurisdiction.
14-400-029-03 / 14-400-029-03 NMSU DHW & HHW CD'S
09 2116 - 4
C. Install after major above-ceiling work is complete. Coordinate the location of hangers
with other work
D. Where ducts or other equipment prevent the regular spacing of hangers, reinforce the
nearest affected hangers and related carrying channels to span the extra distance.
3.5 BOARD INSTALLATION
A. Comply with ASTM C 840. Install to minimize butt end joints, especially in highly
visible locations.
B. Single-Layer Non-Rated: Install gypsum board perpendicular to framing, with ends and
edges occurring over firm bearing.
C. Fire-Rated Construction: Install gypsum board in strict compliance with requirements
of assembly listing.
D. Installation on Metal Framing: Use screws for attachment of all gypsum board.
3.6 JOINT TREATMENT
A. Paper Faced Gypsum Board: Use paper joint tape, bedded with ready-mixed vinylbased joint compound and finished with ready-mixed vinyl-based joint compound.
B. Finish gypsum board in accordance with levels defined in ASTM C840, as follows:
1. Level 4: Walls and ceilings to receive paint finish or wall coverings, unless
2. Level 3: Walls to receive textured wall finish.
3. Level 2: In utility areas, behind cabinetry, and on backing board to receive tile
finish.
4. Level 1: Wall areas above finished ceilings, whether or not accessible in the
completed construction.
C. Tape, fill, and sand exposed joints, edges, and corners to produce smooth surface ready
to receive finishes.
1. Feather coats of joint compound so that camber is maximum 1/32 inch.
2. Taping, filling, and sanding is not required at surfaces behind adhesive applied
ceramic tile and fixed cabinetry.
3.7 TEXTURE FINISH
A. Apply finish texture coating by means of spraying apparatus in accordance with
manufacturer's instructions.
B. Texture Required:
1. Walls abutting existing construction: Match existing texture in area gypsum board
is installed; At locations where existing textures in an area vary, field verify with
Architect prior to installation.
2. New Walls: Match approved sample.
3. Ceilings: Smooth.
14-400-029-03 / 14-400-029-03 NMSU DHW & HHW CD'S
09 2116 - 5
3.8 TOLERANCES
A. Maximum Variation of Finished Gypsum Board Surface from True Flatness: 1/8 inch
in 10 feet in any direction.
END OF SECTION
14-400-029-03 / 14-400-029-03 NMSU DHW & HHW CD'S
09 2116 - 6
SECTION 09 6500
RESILIENT BASE
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
SECTION INCLUDES
A.
Resilient base.
C.
Installation accessories.
REFERENCE STANDARDS
A.
Armstrong Guaranteed Installation Systems, Armstrong World Industries;
2009/2010.
B.
ASTM F 1861 - Standard Specification for Resilient Wall Base; 2008.
c.
SCS (CPD) - SCS Certified Products; Scientific Certification Systems; current
listings at www.scscertified.com.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Refer to Section 01 3000 for submittal procedures.
B.
Product Data: Provide data on specified products, describing physical and
performance characteristics; including sizes, patterns and colors available; and
installation instructions.
C.
Selection Samples: Submit manufacturer's complete set of color samples for
Architect's initial selection.
D.
Maintenance Data: Include maintenance procedures, recommended maintenance
materials, and suggested schedule for cleaning, stripping, and re-waxing.
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
1.5
Protect roll materials from damage by storing on end.
FIELD CONDITIONS
A.
Maintain temperature in storage area between 65 degrees F and 100 degrees F.
B.
Store materials for not less than 48 hours prior to installation in area of
installation at a temperature of 70 degrees F to achieve temperature stability.
Thereafter, maintain conditions above 65 degrees F.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1
MATERIALS - RESILIENT BASE
A.
Resilient Base: ASTM F 1861, Type TS rubber, vulcanized thermoset; top set
Style B, Cove, and as follows:
1.
Critical Radiant Flux (CRF): Minimum 0.45 watt per square centimeter,
when tested in accordance with ASTM E 648 or NFPA 253.
2.
Height: 4 inch.
14-400-029-03 / 14-400-029-03 NMSU DHW & HHW CD'S
RESILIENT BASE
09 6500 - 1
3.
4.
5.
2.3
Thickness: 0.125 inch.
Finish: Matte.
Product and Manufacturer: Traditional Wall Base, Johnsonite:
www.johnsonite.com or approved equal.
ACCESSORIES
A.
Resilient Base Primers and Adhesives: Moisture and alkali resistant; types
recommended by base manufacturer.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1
3.2
EXAMINATION
A.
Verify that wall surfaces are smooth and flat within the tolerances specified for
that type of work, are dust-free, and are ready to receive resilient base.
B.
Verify substrate surfaces are dust-free, and free of substances which would impair
bonding of adhesive materials.
PREPARATION
A.
3.3
3.4
3.5
Prepare substrate surfaces as recommended by flooring and adhesive
manufacturers.
INSTALLATION
A.
Starting installation constitutes acceptance of substrate conditions.
B.
Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
C.
Scribe flooring to walls, columns, cabinets, floor outlets, and other appurtenances
to produce tight joints.
RESILIENT BASE
A.
Install resilient base in accordance with Armstrong Guaranteed Installation
Systems or flooring manufacturer's published requirements for installation,
whichever is more stringent.
B.
Fit joints tightly and make vertical. Maintain minimum dimension of 18 inches
between joints.
C.
Miter internal corners. At external corners, 'V' cut back of base strip to 2/3 of its
thickness and fold.
D.
Install base on solid backing. Bond tightly to wall and floor surfaces.
E.
Scribe and fit to door frames and other interruptions.
CLEANING
A.
Remove excess adhesive from floor, base, and wall surfaces without damage.
B.
Clean in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
C.
Clean resilient products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, as
14-400-029-03 / 14-400-029-03 NMSU DHW & HHW CD'S
RESILIENT BASE
09 6500 - 2
required for application of floor sealer and polish.
3.6
PROTECTION
A.
Clean and reseal flooring products where sealer has been marred or damaged prior
to acceptance by Owner.
END OF SECTION
14-400-029-03 / 14-400-029-03 NMSU DHW & HHW CD'S
RESILIENT BASE
09 6500 - 3
SECTION 09 9000
PAINTS AND COATINGS
PART 1 GENERAL
A. Surface preparation.
B. Field application of paints.
C. Scope: Finish all interior and exterior surfaces exposed to view, unless fully factoryfinished and unless otherwise indicated, including the following:
D. See Schedule - Surfaces to be Finished, at end of Section.
1.2 DEFINITIONS
A. Conform to ASTM D16 for interpretation of terms used in this section.
A. ASTM D16 - Standard Terminology for Paint, Related Coatings, Materials, and
Applications; 2012.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Refer to Section 01 3000 for submittal procedures.
B. Product Data: Provide data on all finishing products.
1. Paint System Identification: Identify each product as a component of the
appropriate paint numbering system in Part 2 of this Section (i.e., ME-OP-3E-4).
Unidentified products will result in rejection of the entire submittal.
C. Paint Samples: Submit two paper chip samples, 3 x 3 inches in size illustrating range of
colors and textures available for each surface finishing product scheduled.
D. Manufacturer's Instructions: Indicate special surface preparation procedures and
substrate conditions requiring special attention.
E. Maintenance Data: Submit data on cleaning, touch-up, and repair of painted and coated
surfaces.
A. Applicator Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the type of work
specified with minimum five years documented experience.
1.6 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A. Conform to applicable code for flame and smoke rating and VOC requirements for
products and finishes.
B. Lead, Heavy Metals, Cadmium, and Chromates: Lead, Heavy Metals, Cadmium, and
Chromate content of painting materials shall not exceed amount permitted by federal,
state, and local authorities.
14-400-029-03 / 14-400-029-03 NMSU DHW & HHW CD'S
PAINTS AND COATINGS
09 9000 - 1
C. Comply with governing code requirements for air quality and material disposal
regulations.
A. Deliver products to site in sealed and labeled containers; inspect to verify acceptability.
B. Container Label: Include manufacturer's name, type of paint, brand name, lot number,
brand code, coverage, surface preparation, drying time, cleanup requirements, color
designation, and instructions for mixing and reducing.
C. Paint Materials: Store at minimum ambient temperature of 45 degrees F and a
maximum of 90 degrees F, in ventilated area, and as required by manufacturer's
instructions.
D. Provide fire extinguishers and post caution signs warning against smoking and open
flame when working with flammable materials.
E. Protect work of other trades, whether being painted or not, against damage by painting.
Correct damage by cleaning, repairing or replacing, and repainting, as approved by
Engineer. Provide "Wet Paint" signs to protect newly painted finishes. Remove
temporary protective wrappings provided by others to protect their work after
completing painting operations.
A. Do not apply materials when surface and ambient temperatures are outside the
temperature ranges required by the paint product manufacturer.
B. Follow manufacturer's recommended procedures for producing best results, including
testing of substrates, moisture in substrates, and humidity and temperature limitations.
C. Do not apply exterior coatings during rain or snow, or when relative humidity is outside
the humidity ranges required by the paint product manufacturer.
D. Minimum Application Temperatures for Latex Paints: 45 degrees F for interiors; 50
degrees F for exterior; unless required otherwise by manufacturer's instructions.
E. Provide lighting level of 80 ft candles measured mid-height at substrate surface.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Provide all paint and coating products from the same manufacturer to the greatest
extent possible.
1. In the event that a single manufacturer cannot provide all specified products, minor
exceptions will be permitted provided approval by Engineer is obtained using the
specified procedures for submittals.
B. Manufacturers - Provide paint and coating products by one of the following:
1. Benjamin Moore & Co. (Moore): www.benjaminmoore.com.
2. Diamond Vogel Paints: www.diamondvogel.com.
3. Glidden Professional: www.gliddenprofessional.com.
4. International Protective Coatings (IPC): www.international-pc.com
14-400-029-03 / 14-400-029-03 NMSU DHW & HHW CD'S
PAINTS AND COATINGS
09 9000 - 2
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
Benjamin Moore & Co. (Moore): www.benjaminmoore.com.
PPG Engineerural Finishes, Inc: www.ppgaf.com.
Kwal Paint, a Comex Group company: www.kwalpaint.com.
Sherwin-Williams Company (SW): www.sherwinwilliams.com.
Dunn-Edwards Company: www.dunnedwards.com.
Tnemec Company Inc (Tnemec): www.tnemec.com
XIM Products, Inc (XIM): www.ximbonder.com.
2.2 PAINTS AND COATINGS - GENERAL
A. Paint exposed surfaces, except where the Paint Schedule indicates that a surface or
material is not to be painted or is to remain natural. If the Paint Schedules does not
specifically mention an item or a surface, paint the item or surface the same as similar
adjacent materials or surfaces whether or not the Schedules indicates color(s). If the
Schedule does not indicate color(s) or finishes, the Engineer will select from standard
colors and finishes available.
B. Surface preparation, priming, and finish coats specified in this Section are in addition to
shop priming and surface treatment specified in other Sections.
C. Paints and Coatings: Ready mixed, unless intended to be a field-catalyzed coating.
1. Provide paints and coatings of a soft paste consistency, capable of being readily
and uniformly dispersed to a homogeneous coating, with good flow and brushing
properties, and capable of drying or curing free of streaks or sags.
2. Provide materials that are compatible with one another and the substrates indicated
under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by manufacturer
based on testing and field experience.
3. Supply each coating material in quantity required to complete entire project's work
from a single production run.
4. Do not reduce, thin, or dilute coatings or add materials to coatings unless such
procedure is specifically described in manufacturer's product instructions.
D. Primers: Where the manufacturer offers options on primers for a particular substrate,
use primer categorized as "best" by the manufacturer.
E. Colors: As indicated in Color Schedule.
F. Material Compatibility: Provide block fillers, primers, undercoats, and finish-coat
materials that are compatible with one another and the substrates indicated under
conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by manufacturer based on testing
and field experience
1. Review other Sections of these Specifications in which prime paints are to be
provided to ensure compatibility of the total coatings system for the various
substrates. Contractor shall be responsible for the compatibility of all shop primed
and field painted items.
2. Furnish information on the characteristics of the finish materials proposed to use,
to ensure that compatible prime coats are used. Provide Tie coats over
incompatible primers or remove and reprime as required. Notify Engineer, in
writing, of anticipated problems using the coating systems as specified with
substrates primed by others.
14-400-029-03 / 14-400-029-03 NMSU DHW & HHW CD'S
PAINTS AND COATINGS
09 9000 - 3
G. At completion of construction activities of other trades, touch up and restore damaged
or defaced painted surfaces.
2.3 PAINT SYSTEMS - EXTERIOR
A. Paint System CE-OP-3LA - Masonry/Concrete, Opaque, Latex, 3 Coat:
1. One coat of block filler: Moore; Moorcraft Super Hide 285 or equal; 6 - 8 dry mils.
2. Semi-Gloss Finish: Moore; Aura 632 or equal; 2 coats, 1.5-2 dry mils per coat.
B. Paint System GI-OP-3LA - Gypsum Board/Plaster, Latex-Acrylic, 3 Coats:
1. One coat of primer-sealer: Moore; Moorcraft Super Hide Interior Latex
Primer/Undercoater 284 or equal; One coat, 0.8 - 1.0 dry mils
a. Primer sealer is required over new gypsum board finishes and unpainted
surfaces. Unless required by manufacturer to seal stains, prevent bleed
through, or to comply with other requirements, primer sealer is not required
over previously painted surfaces.
2. Semi-gloss: Two coats of latex enamel; Moore; Regal Aquaglo #333 or equal; 1.3
dry mils per coat.
C. Paint System ME-OP-3E-4 - Ferrous and Galvanized Metals, Primed or Unprimed,
Opaque, 3 Coats:
1. Touch-up: Moore; Alkyd Metal Primer M06 or equal.
2. Primer: Moore; Alkyd Metal Primer M06 or equal; One coat, 1.3-1.5 dry mils.
3. Gloss Finish: Moore; Urethane Alkyd Gloss Enamel M22 or equal; Two coats,
2.0-2.2 dry mils.
2.4 ACCESSORY MATERIALS
A. Accessory Materials: Provide all primers, sealers, cleaning agents, cleaning cloths,
sanding materials, and clean-up materials required to achieve the finishes specified
whether specifically indicated or not; commercial quality.
B. Patching Material: Polyurethane or acrylic filler.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Do not begin application of coatings until substrates have been properly prepared.
B. Verify that surfaces are ready to receive work as instructed by the product
manufacturer.
C. Examine surfaces scheduled to be finished prior to commencement of work. Report any
condition that may potentially affect proper application.
D. Test shop-applied primer for compatibility with subsequent cover materials.
E. Test previously painted surfaces for compatibility with subsequent cover materials.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Clean surfaces thoroughly and correct defects prior to coating application.
B. Prepare surfaces using the methods recommended by the manufacturer for achieving
the best result for the substrate under the project conditions.
14-400-029-03 / 14-400-029-03 NMSU DHW & HHW CD'S
PAINTS AND COATINGS
09 9000 - 4
C. Perform all preparation and cleaning procedures as specified herein and in strict
accordance with the paint manufacturer's instructions for each particular substrate and
atmospheric condition.
D. Clean surfaces to be painted before applying paint or surface treatments. Remove oil
and grease with clean cloths and cleaning solvents prior to mechanical cleaning.
Program the cleaning and painting so that dust and other contaminants from the
cleaning process will not fall in wet, newly painted surfaces.
E. Remove or mask surface appurtenances, including electrical plates, hardware, light
fixture trim, escutcheons, and fittings, prior to preparing surfaces or finishing.
F. Surfaces: Correct defects and clean surfaces which affect work of this section.
G. Marks: Seal marks which may bleed through surface finishes with tie coat compatible
with paint.
H. Impervious Surfaces: Remove mildew in accordance with paint manufacturer's
recommendations.
I. Remove mildew from impervious surfaces by scrubbing with solution of tetra-sodium
phosphate and bleach. Rinse with clean water and allow surface to dry.
J. Concrete and Unit Masonry Surfaces to be Painted: Allow new concrete and masonry
to cure 28 days. Remove stains, oil, grease, dirt, loose mortar, scale, salt or alkali
powder, and other foreign matter in accordance with paint manufacturer's
recommendations. Do not use wire brushes for preparation or cleaning.
1. Do not paint over surfaces where the moisture content exceeds 8 percent, unless
otherwise permitted in the manufacturer's printed instructions.
K. Gypsum Board Surfaces to be Painted: Fill minor defects with filler compound. Spot
prime defects after repair.
L. Galvanized Surfaces to be Painted: Remove surface contamination and oils and wash
with solvent.
M. Corroded Steel and Iron Surfaces to be Painted: Prepare using at least SSPC-PC 2
(hand tool cleaning) or SSPC-SP 3 (power tool cleaning) followed by SSPC-SP 1
(solvent cleaning).
N. Uncorroded Uncoated Steel and Iron Surfaces to be Painted: Remove grease, mill scale,
weld splatter, dirt, and rust. Where heavy coatings of scale are evident, remove by hand
wire brushing or sandblasting; clean by washing with solvent. Apply a treatment of
phosphoric acid solution, ensuring weld joints, bolts, and nuts are similarly cleaned.
Prime paint entire surface; spot prime after repairs.
O. Shop-Primed and Non-Shop-Primed Ferrous Surfaces to be Finish Painted: Clean and
prepare in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. Feather edges to make
touch-up patches inconspicuous. Prime bare steel surfaces.
P. Shop-Primed Steel Surfaces to be Finish Painted: Sand and scrape to remove loose
primer and rust. Feather edges to make touch-up patches inconspicuous. Clean surfaces
with solvent. Prime bare steel surfaces.
Q. Existing painted surfaces: Prepare in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, using
products containing no volatile organic compounds.
14-400-029-03 / 14-400-029-03 NMSU DHW & HHW CD'S
PAINTS AND COATINGS
09 9000 - 5
3.3 APPLICATION
A. Apply products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
1. Any spot measurement found below the required minimum dry film thickness shall
be repainted by the Contractor in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions,
at no additional cost to the Owner.
B. Where adjacent sealant is to be painted, do not apply finish coats until sealant is
applied.
C. Do not apply finishes to surfaces that are not dry. Allow applied coats to dry before
next coat is applied.
D. Apply each coat to uniform appearance.
E. Vacuum clean surfaces of loose particles. Use tack cloth to remove dust and particles
just prior to applying next coat.
F. Reinstall electrical cover plates, hardware, light fixture trim, escutcheons, and fittings
removed prior to finishing.
A. The Engineer reserves the right to test surfaces, film thickness, and paint products at
any time and as often as the Engineer deems necessary during the period when paint is
being applied.
1. Any spot measurement found below the required minimum dry film thickness shall
be repainted by the Contractor in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions,
at no additional cost to the Owner.
2. Do not paint unsatisfactory surfaces until they have been corrected and are in
accordance with paint manufacturer's recommendations.
3.5 CLEANING
A. Collect waste material that could constitute a fire hazard, place in closed metal
containers, and remove daily from site.
3.6 PROTECTION
A. Protect finished coatings until completion of project.
B. Touch-up damaged coatings after Substantial Completion.
3.7 SCHEDULE - SURFACES TO BE FINISHED
A. Do Not Paint or Finish the Following Items:
1. Items fully factory-finished unless specified herein or specifically noted.
2. Fire rating labels, equipment serial number and capacity labels.
3. Stainless steel, or chromium plated items.
4. Bronze and brass items.
5. Anodized aluminum items.
a. Paint concealed aluminum surfaces in contact with concrete, masonry, and
dissimilar materials as described below under Schedule - Paint Systems.
B. Paint the surfaces described below under Schedule - Paint Systems.
14-400-029-03 / 14-400-029-03 NMSU DHW & HHW CD'S
PAINTS AND COATINGS
09 9000 - 6
3.8 SCHEDULE - PAINT SYSTEMS
A. Galvanized and Ferrous Metals, Primed and Unprimed, for Which No Other Paint
System is Indicated: ME-OP-3E-4.
B. New and previously painted Concrete Masonry: Finish all surfaces exposed to view.
1. Interior: CE-OP-3LA.
C. Gypsum Board: Finish all surfaces exposed to view.
1. Interior Walls and Ceilings: GI-OP-3LA-4.
3.9 SCHEDULE - COLORS
A. Colors: Except as noted below provide colors as selected by Engineer from full range
of manufacturer's standards.
1. Interior and Exterior Metal Doors and Frames: Match existing.
2. Interior walls and ceilings: Match existing.
END OF SECTION
14-400-029-03 / 14-400-029-03 NMSU DHW & HHW CD'S
PAINTS AND COATINGS
09 9000 - 7
SECTION 22 0010
PLUMBING GENERAL PROVISIONS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 PROVISIONS:
A. The Plumbing Specifications are subject to all the requirements of the General
Conditions of the Contract and Specifications and shall be used in conjunction
therewith. The Plumbing Contractor shall refer to other divisions of the Drawings and
Specifications for work which must be carried on in conjunction with the Plumbing
work so that the construction operations can proceed without harm to the Owner for
interference, delay or absence of coordination.
1.2 DRAWINGS AND SPECIFICATION COORDINATION:
A. Drawings and specification indicate the extent and general arrangement of the
Equipment and systems, and intend to provide the Owner with complete, functioning
systems under this Contract.
B. Should conditions necessitate a rearrangement of piping, ductwork, equipment, etc.,
such departures and the reasons, therefore shall be submitted to the Architect by the
Contractor for approval, in the form of detailed drawings showing the proposed
changes. No such changes shall be made without the prior written approval of the
Engineer. Equipment and piping arrangements shall provide adequate and acceptable
clearance for entry, servicing and maintenance.
C. Drawings and Specifications shall be considered as cooperative, and work or materials
called for by one and not mentioned in the other shall be done and furnished as though
treated by both.
D. In the case of insufficient information and discrepancies in figures, dimensions, details,
Drawings, Specifications, or construction notes, the Architect shall be notified
immediately and his decision shall determine the necessary adjustment. Without such
decision, said discrepancies shall not be adjusted by the Contractor. In case of any
settlement or any complication arising from such adjustment to the Contractor, he shall
bear all extra expense involved. There shall be no additional expense to the Owner,
Architect or Engineer.
E. Should it appear that the work intended to be done, or any of the matters relative
thereto, are not sufficiently detailed or explained on the drawings or specifications, the
Contractor shall apply to the Architect for such further drawings or explanations as may
be necessary, allowing a reasonable time for the Architect to supply same, and the
Contractor shall conform to same as part of the Contract.
F. Should any doubt or question arise in respect to the true meaning of the Drawings or
Specifications, reference shall be made to the Architect whose decision shall be final
and conclusive.
14-400-029-03 / 14-400-029-03 NMSU DHW & HHW CD'S
22 0010 - 1
G. All piping and all ducts in the finished areas of the building shall be run concealed in
chases, furrings, suspended ceilings, etc., unless noted or directed otherwise. Should
any condition arise which would cause any piping or duct to be exposed in finished
areas, it shall immediately be called to the Architect's attention and this Contractor shall
bear any and all expense in connection with rearranging his work as directed to
facilitate its concealment. In unfinished spaces such as ceiling spaces and equipment
rooms, all pipe lines shall be run to a continuous grade and square to the building.
H. Plumbing Contractor shall thoroughly acquaint himself with the details of the Drawings
and Specifications before submitting his bid as no allowance will be made because of
unfamiliarity with these details. Place all inserts required for concrete construction in
place in the forms before concrete is poured and in masonry walls while they are under
construction. All concealed piping and ducts shall be installed prior to the time the
chases and furrings are fabricated.
I.
The Drawings do not give exact details as to elevations of piping, exact locations, etc.,
and do not show all offsets, control lines, pilot lines and their installation details. The
Contractor shall carefully lay out his work at the site to conform to the structural
conditions, provide proper grading of lines, to avoid all obstructions, to conform to
details of installation supplied by the manufacturers of the equipment to be installed,
and thereby to provide an integrated, satisfactory operation installation.
J.
Should the particular equipment which any Contractor proposes to install, require other
space conditions than those indicated on the drawings, the Contractor shall arrange for
such space with the Architect before submitting his bid. Should changes become
necessary on account of failure to comply with these details, the Contractor shall make
such necessary changes at his (the Contractor's) own expense.
K. Plumbing Contractor shall submit working scale drawings of all his apparatus and
equipment which in any way varies from these specifications and plans which shall be
checked by the Architect and approved before the work is started. Interference with the
structural conditions shall be corrected before work proceeds.
L. All equipment shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer's
recommendations. Provide all accessories and components for optimum operation as
recommended by the manufacturer.
1.3 FIELD MEASUREMENTS:
A. Prior to the start of fabrication and/or installation the Contractor shall verify all
dimensions, clearances and field conditions governing the plumbing work.
B. No extra compensation shall be claimed or allowed on account of difference between
actual dimensions and those indicated on the drawings.
C. The Contractor shall examine adjoining work on which plumbing, heating ventilating
and air conditioning is dependent for perfect efficiency and shall report any work that
must be corrected.
D. No waiver of responsibility for defective work shall be claimed or allowed due to
failure to report unfavorable conditions affecting the plumbing work.
14-400-029-03 / 14-400-029-03 NMSU DHW & HHW CD'S
22 0010 - 2
1.4 SHOP DRAWINGS:
A. Shop drawings shall be submitted indicating complete equipment and material data.
B. Shop drawings or fully descriptive catalog data shall be submitted by the Contractor for
all items of material and equipment furnished and installed under this Contract. The
Contractor shall submit to the Architect a sufficient number of copies of all such shop
drawings or catalog data to provide him with as many review copies as he may need;
plus three (3) copies for retention by the Architect. No materials or equipment shall be
installed until officially approved by the Architect. The Contractor shall submit to the
engineer, data on equipment substitutions a minimum of 10 days prior to the bid date
for approval by the Engineer.
C. The review of Shop Drawings or catalog data by the Architect shall not relieve the
Plumbing Contractor from responsibility for deviations from the Drawings and
Specifications unless he has, in writing, specifically called attention to such deviations
at the time of submission and has obtained the permission of the Architect thereon; nor
shall it relieve him from the responsibility for error of any kind in shop drawings.
When the Contractor does call such deviations to the attention of the Architect, he shall
state in his letter whether or not such deviations involve any extra cost. If this is not
mentioned, it will be assumed that no extra cost is involved for making the change.
D. Shop drawings will be returned unchecked unless the following information is included:
reference to all pertinent data in the Specifications or on the drawings, symbol
designation of equipment as indicated on drawing, size and characteristics of the
equipment, name of the project and a space large enough to accept an approval stamp.
The data submitted shall reflect the actual equipment performance under the specified
conditions and shall not be a copy of the scheduled data on the drawings.
E. Additional fees will be charged for reviewing second submittal and shop drawings on
equipment, fixtures and system, etc. that had been approved on the first submittal
review. Additional fees will be also charged for reviewing submittals and shop
drawings on equipment, fixtures and system, etc. that had been reviewed and the
contractor/supplier failed to incorporate all of the engineers requirements and requests.
The fees will be on a time-and-material basis at current hourly rates. The additional
fees will be at the Plumbing Contractor expense with no expense to the owner.
F. After receiving approval on the make and type of materials, the contractor shall order
such materials in sufficient time so that no delay or changes will be caused. This is
done to facilitate progress on the job and failure on the part of the contractor shall
render him liable to stand the expense of any and all delays occasioned by failure on his
part to provide necessary details. All shop drawings shall be delivered to the Architect's
office within (30) days from the date of the contract.
1.5 CODES AND STANDARDS:
A. All work shall be performed in strict accordance with the applicable provisions of the
Uniform Plumbing Code and Gas Ordinance of the State of New Mexico, the Uniform
Mechanical Code, the International Building Code, the Life Safety Code, and any other
applicable codes and ordinances.
14-400-029-03 / 14-400-029-03 NMSU DHW & HHW CD'S
22 0010 - 3
B. Where the Contract Documents indicate materials or construction in excess of Code
requirements, the Drawings of Specifications shall govern.
C. The Owner and the Architect shall be held free and harmless from liability of any kind
or nature arising from his failure to comply with codes and ordinances.
D. The Plumbing Contractor shall include in his bid to apply for and pay for all permits
and certificates of inspection including connections, meter setup fees or
extension/expansion of all utility lines.
E. Appropriate standards, such as ASA or ASTM or other established standards, shall
become part of the Contract Documents to the extent they are referred to herein.
1.6 ELECTRICAL SERVICES:
A. Motor starters, control equipment and wirings indicated on the electrical drawings,
except items otherwise specifically noted, will be furnished and installed by the
Electrical Contractor.
B. All equipment and controls shall be coordinated with Division 16, Electrical, to insure
that all required components are furnished and properly installed. No additional
expense will be allowed due to lack of coordination.
C. The Plumbing Contractor must refer to the electrical control equipment and wiring
shown on the Electrical Drawings. Any changes or additions required by specified
equipment furnished shall be the complete responsibility of the Plumbing Contractor
furnishing the equipment.
D. All electrical equipment characteristics (voltage, etc.) must be verified by the Architect
prior to ordering.
E. All motors shall be built in accordance with the current applicable IEEE, ASA, and
NEMA standards. All general purpose motors shall be open drip-proof machines for
installation indoors and/or in protected locations. Totally enclosed fan cooled (TEFC)
motors shall be used in all areas of exposure to weather or other environmental
contamination. Motors shall be rated explosion proof when location is in hazardous
atmospheres. Type II weather protected motors may be used in lieu of TEFC motors on
cooling towers, roof fan units, and similar equipment. Motors mounted in direct sun
shall be provided with a shield to prevent direct radiation from the sun when the sun is
45 degrees or greater above the horizon. All motors shall have copper windings. All
motors to have minimum power factor of 85% or have switched correction to 90%.
Starters shall meet all requirements furnished by the Plumbing Contractor.
F. Unless indicated otherwise, motors shall be NEMA Design B with a service factor of
1.15 with 40 degrees centigrade rise and total temperature rise of 65 degrees centigrade
ambient and when powered from the system voltage feeding the motor. TEFC motors
shall have a service factor of 1.00 with total temperature rise of 65 degrees centigrade in
the above conditions. Motors located in areas exceeding 40 degrees centigrade ambient
shall be factory-r
1. ated for the ambient temperature of the motor environment. Single phase motors
shall generally be NEMA Type N split phase induction motors with built-in
14-400-029-03 / 14-400-029-03 NMSU DHW & HHW CD'S
22 0010 - 4
thermal protectors. Single phase motors connected on loads requiring high starting
torque shall be capacitor-start induction motors. Single phase motors of 1/10 HP
or less may be shaded pole induction motors.
G. If the contractor proposes to furnish motors varying in horsepower and/or
characteristics from those specified, he shall first inform the Architect of the change and
shall then coordinate the change with the Electrical Contractor and shall pay all
additional charges in connection with the change.
1.7 ALTITUDE RATINGS:
A. Unless otherwise noted, all specified equipment capacities, air quantities, etc., are for
site elevation above sea level, and adjustments to the manufacturer's ratings must be
made accordingly.
1.8 FLUSHING AND DRAINING:
A. Properly drain and flush all ducts and pipes before use of acceptance to insure that all
debris is completely removed. Damage caused by such debris remaining in the ducts or
pipes shall be repaired by the Plumbing Contractor at his expense. This Contractor
shall demonstrate to the Architect's representative that all piping is clean.
1.9 CLEANING:
A. Remove from the building construction site all rubbish and dirt as it accumulates. At
completion, all areas shall be broom cleaned and all obstructions, surplus materials,
etc., removed. All disposable filters in air handling units shall be replaced and all
permanent filters shall be cleaned.
1.10 UTILITIES:
A. The location, size, and elevation of existing sewer lines and the location, size and
pressure of existing water and gas lines are shown in accordance with data given this
office by others. As Engineers, we cannot and do not guarantee the accuracy of this
data. Each bidder shall check and verify this data. The points of connection to utility
lines are approximate only and shall be verified by each bidder prior to submitting his
bid.
1.11 SITE VISIT:
A. Visit the site prior to bidding and verify the conditions under which the plumbing
systems are to be installed. No subsequent allowance shall be made in his behalf for
failure to make such a visit.
PART 2 MATERIALS
2.1 QUALITY:
A. The materials and equipment shall be new and shall be the standard products of the
manufacturers regularly engaged in the production of Plumbing, Heating, Cooling,
14-400-029-03 / 14-400-029-03 NMSU DHW & HHW CD'S
22 0010 - 5
Ventilating and Fire Protection Equipment, and shall be the manufacturer's latest
standard design. Where two or more units of the same class of equipment are required,
these units shall be the products of the same manufacturer. However, the component
parts of the systems need not be the products of the same manufacturer. Specific
equipment specified hereinafter is to be considered a standard of quality and operation.
Should this Contractor desire and install equipment and materials other than that
specifically mentioned, he shall submit complete information and engineering data on
same to the Architect. This Contractor shall obtain written approval before purchasing
proposed substitute equipment. In general, all capacities of equipment, and motor and
starter characteristics are shown in schedules on the drawings. Reference shall be made
to the schedules for each information. The capacities shown are minimum capacities.
Variations in the characteristics will be permitted only on written approval of the
Architect. All equipment shall be shipped to the job with not less than a prime coat of
paint or as specified hereinafter. Insofar as it is possible, all items of the same type (i.e.,
pumps, fans, etc.) shall be by the same manufacturer. Where installation instructions
are not included in these specifications or on the plans, the manufacturer's instructions
shall be followed. All equipment affected by altitude shall be rated to operate at the
altitude where it is to be installed.
2.2 PROTECTION OF MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT:
A. Materials and equipment shall be protected at all times.
B. The Plumbing Contractor shall make good all damage caused directly or indirectly by
his workmen.
C. Pipe and duct openings shall be closed with caps or plugs during installation. Prior to
startup, check to see that all temporary covers have been removed.
D. Equipment shall be tightly covered and protected against dirt, water and chemical or
mechanical injury.
E. At the completion of all work, the equipment shall be thoroughly cleaned and delivered
in a condition satisfactory to the Owner.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXCAVATING AND BACKFILLING:
A. All excavating and backfilling shall be done by this Contractor except as noted on
plans. Trenching shall be done as shown on the Drawings and according to the
Plumbing Code.
1. Curb cuts, asphalt, and concrete patching, etc., shall be part of this Contractor's
responsibility. No extra payment will be made for rock excavation. Trenches for
all underground piping shall be excavated to the required depths. The bottoms of
trenches shall be tamped hard and graded to secure maximum fall. Bell holes shall
be excavated to assure the pipe is resting for its entire length on solid ground.
Should rock be encountered, it shall be excavated to a depth of 6" below the
bottom of the pipe, and before laying the pipe, the space between the bottom of the
14-400-029-03 / 14-400-029-03 NMSU DHW & HHW CD'S
22 0010 - 6
pipe, and the rock surface shall be filled with gravel, thoroughly. Pipe laid in
trenches dug in fill, shall be supported down to load bearing undisturbed soil.
After the pipes have been tested and inspected, the trenches shall be filled. No
roots, rocks or foreign materials of any description shall be used in backfilling the
trenches. All surplus materials shall be hauled from the project by the Contractor
at his expense.
B. Backfilling shall be done in 6" layers to 18" above piping, tamping each layer to protect
piping from damage.
C. Backfilling shall be completed to 95% compaction under building and within 5 feet of
the building line and 90% elsewhere.
3.2 STREET CUTS SHALL BE REPLACED IN KIND.
3.3 CUTTING AND REPAIRING:
A. Responsibility of the Contractor whose work is involved is to coordinate with others to
prevent unnecessary cutting and repairing. Lay out and locate equipment, openings, and
chases. Install sleeves, inserts, and supports. Arrange with those whose work is
involved to do cutting and replacing caused by negligence or error with costs
reimbursed by the Contractor at fault. Cutting and replacing of the existing work shall
be the responsibility of the Contractor whose work is being installed. Removal or
terminating connections of existing work which is abandoned or replaced shall also be
done hereunder to provide correct and finished work.
3.4 LUBRICATION:
A. Provide all oil for the operation of all equipment until acceptance and provide a chart
listing the type of oil to be used for each piece of equipment.
B. Properly lubricate all bearings and shafts during the installation. This contractor shall be
held responsible for all damage to bearings while the equipment is being operated by
him up to the date of acceptance of the equipment.
C. All motors and other equipment shall be provided with covers as required for protection
during construction.
3.5 OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS:
A. Operations and Maintenance Manuals shall be submitted as required by Division One
and these Specifications.
B. All Operating Manuals shall be given to the Architect.
3.6 GUARANTEE:
A. All equipment, materials and workmanship to be furnished and performed under this
Contract shall be guaranteed for a period of one (1) year, commencing from the written
notice of substantial completion approved by the Architect.
B. The Contractor shall, upon notification by the Owner, during that period correct any
such defects without cost to the Owner.
14-400-029-03 / 14-400-029-03 NMSU DHW & HHW CD'S
22 0010 - 7
3.7 HVAC TEST AND BALANCE:
A. All air and/or water systems, as appropriate, shall be tested and balanced to achieve
flow at all outlets and inlets within 10% of the value shown on the drawings.
B. Any deviations from such shall be brought to the attention of the Engineer previous to
report submittal.
C. Pulleys, motors, dampers, control devices, etc. shall be adjusted, if necessary, to provide
proper flow.
D. Grilles, registers and diffusers shall be adjusted for proper throw, drop, and spread to
maintain draftless, comfortable conditions.
E. All equipment shall be tested and proved free from defects and in good operating
condition.
F. System shall be tested for every mode of operation, summer through winter cycles.
G. All tools, measuring devices and specialty equipment necessary shall be provided by
Test and Balance Contractor.
H. Two (2) weeks prior to the final inspection, Contractor shall submit to Architect four
typewritten or hand lettered, bound copies of system performance report. Report shall
include: building name; date performed; instruments used in testing; duct and/or pipe
layouts, as appropriate, with all test points identified; air quantities and temperatures
shown; rated and actual motor amperages; and a discussion of any deficiencies or
deviations from the system specified, along with recommendations for correction.
I.
Test and Balance Contractor shall certify all information contained in this report as
complete and correct as of the date of job completion.
3.8 FOUNDATION:
A. All equipment shall be provided with suitable foundations and supports. It shall be the
responsibility of this Contractor to provide for the proper locations of these foundations
and supports. This applies to all rooftop equipment also. All concrete foundations
required by equipment furnished by the Plumbing Contractor shall be constructed by
them (except where otherwise noted) in conformance with the recommendations of the
manufacturer of the respective equipment, and with the approval of the Architect. All
corners of the foundations shall be neatly chamfered. Foundation bolts shall be placed
in the forms when the concrete is poured. Allow 1" below the equipment base for
alignment, leveling and grouting with nonshrinking grout. Grouting shall be done after
the equipment is leveled in place. After the grout has hardened, the foundation bolts
shall be pulled up tight and the equipment shimmed, if necessary. After removal of the
forms, the surface of the foundation shall be rubbed. Unless otherwise noted,
foundations shall be a minimum of 6" high. All concrete work performed by these
contractors shall conform entirely to the requirements of the Concrete Specifications
which describe this class of work.
14-400-029-03 / 14-400-029-03 NMSU DHW & HHW CD'S
22 0010 - 8
3.9 FLASHING:
A. The Contractor shall be responsible for providing and installing all counterflashing. All
openings in the roof shall be flashed and counterflashed. Use 4-pound per square foot
lead flashing materials for all vent lines and welded flashing in steel lines passing
through roof. The Plumbing Contractor shall notify the General Contractor where each
roof penetration is and the size of the opening.
3.10 ACCESS PANELS:
A. Similar to Milcor, size as required for concealed expansion joints, valves, traps,
balancing dampers, equipment, and similar items requiring accessibility. Notify the
General Contractor of each access panel location and the required size. Panels shall be
proper type for ceiling or wall in which they are installed. The panels shall be furnished
under this section of the Specifications, but shall be coordinated to be compatible with
walls and ceilings furnished under other sections.
END OF SECTION
14-400-029-03 / 14-400-029-03 NMSU DHW & HHW CD'S
22 0010 - 9
SECTION 22 0516
EXPANSION FITTINGS AND LOOPS FOR PLUMBING PIPING
PART 1 GENERAL
A. Flexible pipe connectors.
B. Expansion joints and compensators.
C. Pipe loops, offsets, and swing joints.
A. Division 22 & 23 - HVAC and Plumbing Piping
B. Section 22 1005 - Plumbing Piping.
A. ASTM A269 - Standard Specification for Seamless and Welded Austenitic Stainless
Steel Tubing for General Service; 2010.
B. EJMA (STDS) - EJMA Standards; Expansion Joint Manufacturers Association; Ninth
Edition.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. See Section 01300 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
B. Product Data:
1. Flexible Pipe Connectors: Indicate maximum temperature and pressure rating,
face-to-face length, live length, hose wall thickness, hose convolutions per foot
(meter) and per assembly, fundamental frequency of assembly, braid structure, and
total number of wires in braid.
2. Expansion Joints: Indicate maximum temperature and pressure rating, and
maximum expansion compensation.
C. Manufacturer's Instructions: Indicate manufacturer's installation instructions, special
procedures, and external controls.
D. Maintenance Data: Include adjustment instructions.
E. Maintenance Materials: Furnish the following for Owner's use in maintenance of
project.
1. See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements, for additional provisions.
2. Extra Packing for Packed Expansion Joints: One set for each joint.
A. Conform to UL requirements.
14-400-029-03 / 14-400-029-03 NMSU DHW & HHW CD'S
22 0516 - 1
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 FLEXIBLE PIPE CONNECTORS - STEEL PIPING
A. Inner Hose: Carbon Steel.
B. Exterior Sleeve: Single braided, stainless steel.
C. Pressure Rating: 125 psi and 450 degrees F (862 kPa and 232 degrees C).
2.2 FLEXIBLE PIPE CONNECTORS - COPPER PIPING
A. Manufacturer:
1. Mercer Rubber Company; Model ______: www.mercer-rubber.com.
2. Metraflex Company; Model ______: www.metraflex.com.
B. Inner Hose: Bronze.
C. Exterior Sleeve: Braided bronze.
D. Pressure Rating: 125 psi and 450 degrees F (862 kPa and 232 degrees C).
2.3 EXPANSION JOINTS - STAINLESS STEEL BELLOWS TYPE
A. Manufacturers:
B. Pressure Rating: 125 psi and 400 degrees F (862 kPa and 204 degrees C).
C. Maximum Compression: 1-3/4 inches (45 mm).
D. Maximum Extension: 1/4 inch (6 mm).
2.4 EXPANSION JOINTS - SINGLE SPHERE, ELBOW COMPENSATOR
A. Manufacturers:
2.5 EXPANSION JOINTS - LOW PRESSURE COMPENSATOR WITH TWO-PLY
BRONZE BELLOWS
A. Manufacturers:
2.6 ACCESSORIES
A. Stainless Steel Pipe: ASTM A269.
B. Pipe Alignment Guides:
14-400-029-03 / 14-400-029-03 NMSU DHW & HHW CD'S
22 0516 - 2
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B. Install in accordance with EJMA (Expansion Joint Manufacturers Association)
Standards.
C. Install flexible pipe connectors on pipes connected to vibration isolated equipment.
Provide line size flexible connectors.
D. Install flexible connectors at right angles to displacement. Install one end immediately
adjacent to isolated equipment and anchor other end. Install in horizontal plane unless
indicated otherwise.
E. Anchor pipe to building structure where indicated. Provide pipe guides so movement is
directed along axis of pipe only. Erect piping such that strain and weight is not on cast
connections or apparatus.
F. Provide support and equipment required to control expansion and contraction of piping.
Provide loops, pipe offsets, and swing joints, or expansion joints where required.
END OF SECTION
14-400-029-03 / 14-400-029-03 NMSU DHW & HHW CD'S
22 0516 - 3
SECTION 22 0519
METERS AND GAGES FOR PLUMBING PIPING
PART 1 GENERAL
A. Flow meters.
B. Pressure gages and pressure gage taps.
C. Thermometers and thermometer wells.
A. ASME B40.100 - Pressure Gauges and Gauge Attachments; The American Society of
Mechanical Engineers; 2005.
B. ASME MFC-3M - Measurement of Fluid Flow in Pipes Using Orifice, Nozzle and
Venturi; The American Society of Mechanical Engineers; 2007.
C. ASTM E1 - Standard Specification for ASTM Liquid-in-Glass Thermometers; 2007.
D. ASTM E77 - Standard Test Method for Inspection and Verification of Thermometers;
2007.
E. UL 393 - Indicating Pressure Gauges for Fire-Protection Service; Underwriters
Laboratories Inc.; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
B. Product Data: Provide list that indicates use, operating range, total range and location
for manufactured components.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 LIQUID FLOW METERS
A. ASME MFC-3M Calibrated venturi orifice plate and flanges with valved taps, chart for
conversion of differential pressure readings to flow rate, with pressure gage in case.
B. Annular element flow stations with meter set.
1. Measuring Station: Type 316 stainless steel pitot type flow element inserted
through welded threaded couplet, with safety shut-off valves and quick coupling
connections, and permanent metal tag indicating design flow rate, reading for
design flow rate, metered fluid, line size, station or location number.
14-400-029-03 / 14-400-029-03 NMSU DHW & HHW CD'S
22 0519 - 1
2.2 PRESSURE GAGES
A. Pressure Gages: ASME B40.100, UL 393 drawn steel case, phosphor bronze bourdon
tube, rotary brass movement, brass socket, with front recalibration adjustment, black
scale on white background.
1. Case: Steel with brass bourdon tube.
2. Size: 4-1/2 inch (115 mm) diameter.
3. Mid-Scale Accuracy: One percent.
4. Scale: Psi.
2.3 PRESSURE GAGE TAPPINGS
A. Gage Cock: Tee or lever handle, brass for maximum 150 psi (1034 kPa).
2.4 STEM TYPE THERMOMETERS
A. Thermometers - Fixed Mounting: Red- or blue-appearing non-toxic liquid in glass;
ASTM E1; lens front tube, cast aluminum case with enamel finish.
1. Size: 9 inch (225 mm) scale.
2. Window: Clear Lexan.
3. Accuracy: 2 percent, per ASTM E77.
4. Calibration: Degrees F.
B. Thermometers - Adjustable Angle: Red- or blue-appearing non-toxic liquid in glass;
ASTM E1; lens front tube, cast aluminum case with enamel finish, cast aluminum
adjustable joint with positive locking device; adjustable 360 degrees in horizontal
plane, 180 degrees in vertical plane.
2. Window: Clear Lexan.
2.5 DIAL THERMOMETERS
A. Thermometers - Fixed Mounting: Dial type bimetallic actuated; ASTM E1; stainless
steel case, silicone fluid damping, white with black markings and black pointer,
hermetically sealed lens, stainless steel stem.
1. Size: 5 inch (125 mm) diameter dial.
2. Lens: Clear glass.
3. Accuracy: 1 percent.
B. Thermometers - Adjustable Angle: Dial type bimetallic actuated; ASTM E1; stainless
steel case, adjustable angle with front recalibration, silicone fluid damping, white with
black markings and black pointer, hermetically sealed lens, stainless steel stem.
1. Size: 5 inch (125 mm) diameter dial.
14-400-029-03 / 14-400-029-03 NMSU DHW & HHW CD'S
22 0519 - 2
C. Thermometers: Dial type vapor or liquid actuated; ASTM E1; stainless steel case, with
brass or copper bulb, copper or bronze braided capillary, white with black markings and
black pointer, glass lens.
1. Size: 4-1/2 inch (115 mm) diameter dial.
2. Length of Capillary: Minimum 5 feet (1500 mm).
2.6 THERMOMETER SUPPORTS
A. Socket: Brass separable sockets for thermometer stems with or without extensions as
required, and with cap and chain.
2.7 TEST PLUGS
A. Test Plug: 1/4 inch (6 mm) or 1/2 inch (13 mm) brass fitting and cap for receiving 1/8
inch (3 mm) outside diameter pressure or temperature probe with neoprene core for
temperatures up to 200 degrees F (93 degrees C).
B. Test Plug: 1/4 inch (6 mm) or 1/2 inch (13 mm) brass fitting and cap for receiving 1/8
inch (3 mm) outside diameter pressure or temperature probe with Nordel core for
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
B. Provide one pressure gage per pump, installing taps before strainers and on suction and
discharge of pump. Pipe to gage.
C. Install thermometers in piping systems in sockets in short couplings. Enlarge pipes
smaller than 2-1/2 inch (60 mm) for installation of thermometer sockets. Ensure
sockets allow clearance from insulation.
D. Coil and conceal excess capillary on remote element instruments.
E. Provide instruments with scale ranges selected according to service with largest
appropriate scale.
F. Install gages and thermometers in locations where they are easily read from normal
operating level. Install vertical to 45 degrees off vertical.
G. Adjust gages and thermometers to final angle, clean windows and lenses, and calibrate
to zero.
H. Locate test plugs adjacent thermometers and thermometer sockets.
END OF SECTION
14-400-029-03 / 14-400-029-03 NMSU DHW & HHW CD'S
22 0519 - 3
SECTION 22 0548
VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
PART 1 GENERAL
A. Equipment support bases.
B. Vibration isolators.
C. Vibration isolators.
D. Seismic restraints.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. See Section 01 3300 - Submittal Procedures.
B. Product Data:
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Kinetics Noise Control, Inc______: www.kineticsnoise.com.
B. Mason Industries_________________________________: www.mason-ind.com.
C. Vibration Eliminator Company, Inc; Model ______: www.veco-ny.com.
A. General:
1. All vibration isolators, base frames and inertia bases to conform to all uniform
deflection and stability requirements under all operating loads.
2. Steel springs to function without undue stress or overloading.
3. Steel springs to operate in the linear portion of the load versus deflection curve
over deflection range of not less than 50 percent above specified deflection.
4. Lateral to vertical stiffness ratio to not exceed 0.08 with spring deflection at
minimum 75 percent of specified deflection.
5. All equipment mounted on vibration isolated bases to have minimum operating
clearance of 2 inches (50 mm) between the base and floor or support beneath
unless noted otherwise.
14-400-029-03 / 14-400-029-03 NMSU DHW & HHW CD'S
22 0548 - 1
2.3 EQUIPMENT SUPPORT BASES
2.4 VIBRATION ISOLATORS
2.5 SEISMIC RESTRAINTS FOR SUSPENDED COMPONENTS AND EQUIPMENT
A. Comply with:
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION - GENERAL
END OF SECTION
14-400-029-03 / 14-400-029-03 NMSU DHW & HHW CD'S
22 0548 - 2
SECTION 22 0553
IDENTIFICATION FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
PART 1 GENERAL
A. Tags.
B. Stencils.
C. Pipe Markers.
A. ASME A13.1 - Scheme for the Identification of Piping Systems; The American Society
of Mechanical Engineers; 2007.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
B. Product Data: Provide manufacturers catalog literature for each product required.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 IDENTIFICATION APPLICATIONS
A. Piping: Pipe markers.
B. Valves: Tags and ceiling tacks where located above lay-in ceiling.
2.2 TAGS
A. Plastic Tags: Laminated three-layer plastic with engraved black letters on light
contrasting background color. Tag size minimum 1-1/2 inch (40 mm) diameter.
B. Metal Tags: Brass with stamped letters; tag size minimum 1-1/2 inch (40 mm)
diameter with smooth edges.
C. Chart: Typewritten letter size list in anodized aluminum frame.
2.3 STENCILS
2.4 PIPE MARKERS
A. Comply with ASME A13.1.
B. Plastic Pipe Markers: Factory fabricated, flexible, semirigid plastic, preformed to fit
around pipe or pipe covering; minimum information indicating flow direction arrow
and identification of fluid being conveyed.
C. Plastic Tape Pipe Markers: Flexible, vinyl film tape with pressure sensitive adhesive
backing and printed markings.
14-400-029-03 / 14-400-029-03 NMSU DHW & HHW CD'S
22 0553 - 1
D. Underground Plastic Pipe Markers: Bright colored continuously printed plastic ribbon
tape, minimum 6 inches (150 mm) wide by 4 mil (0.10 mm) thick, manufactured for
direct burial service.
2.5 CEILING TACKS
A. Description: Steel with 3/4 inch (20 mm) diameter color coded head.
B. Color code as follows:
1. HVAC Equipment: Yellow.
2. Fire Dampers and Smoke Dampers: Red.
3. Plumbing Valves: Green.
4. Heating/Cooling Valves: Blue.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Degrease and clean surfaces to receive adhesive for identification materials.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install plastic nameplates with corrosive-resistant mechanical fasteners, or adhesive.
Apply with sufficient adhesive to ensure permanent adhesion and seal with clear
lacquer.
B. Install tags with corrosion resistant chain.
C. Install plastic pipe markers in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
D. Install plastic tape pipe markers complete around pipe in accordance with
E. Install underground plastic pipe markers 6 to 8 inches (150 to 200 mm) below finished
grade, directly above buried pipe.
F. Use tags on piping 3/4 inch (20 mm) diameter and smaller.
1. Locate identification not to exceed 20 feet (6 m) on straight runs including risers
and drops, adjacent to each valve and Tee, at each side of penetration of structure
or enclosure, and at each obstruction.
G. Identify air handling units, pumps, heat transfer equipment, tanks, and water treatment
devices with plastic nameplates. Small devices, such as in-line pumps, may be
identified with tags.
H. Identify control panels and major control components outside panels with plastic
nameplates.
I.
Identify valves in main and branch piping with tags.
J.
Tag automatic controls, instruments, and relays. Key to control schematic.
14-400-029-03 / 14-400-029-03 NMSU DHW & HHW CD'S
22 0553 - 2
K. Identify piping, concealed or exposed, with plastic pipe markers. Use tags on piping
3/4 inch (20 mm) diameter and smaller. Identify service, flow direction, and pressure.
Install in clear view and align with axis of piping. Locate identification not to exceed
20 feet (6 m) on straight runs including risers and drops, adjacent to each valve and Tee,
at each side of penetration of structure or enclosure, and at each obstruction.
END OF SECTION
14-400-029-03 / 14-400-029-03 NMSU DHW & HHW CD'S
22 0553 - 3
SECTION 22 0716
PLUMBING EQUIPMENT INSULATION
PART 1 GENERAL
A. Equipment insulation.
A. Section 22 1005 - Plumbing Piping: Placement of hangers and hanger inserts.
A. ASTM B209 - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and
Plate; 2010.
B. ASTM B209M - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and
Plate [Metric]; 2010.
C. ASTM C177 - Standard Test Method for Steady-State Heat Flux Measurements and
Thermal Transmission Properties by Means of the Guarded-Hot-Plate Apparatus; 2010.
D. ASTM C518 - Standard Test Method for Steady-State Thermal Transmission Properties
by Means of the Heat Flow Meter Apparatus; 2010.
E. ASTM C533 - Standard Specification for Calcium Silicate Block and Pipe Thermal
Insulation; 2013.
F. ASTM C553 - Specification for Mineral Fiber Blanket Thermal Insulation for
Commercial and Industrial Applications; 2011.
G. ASTM C592 - Standard Specification for Mineral Fiber Blanket Insulation and
Blanket-Type Pipe Insulation (Metal-Mesh Covered) (Industrial Type); 2012.
H. ASTM C612 - Standard Specification for Mineral Fiber Block and Board Thermal
Insulation; 2010.
I.
ASTM E84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building
Materials; 2012.
J.
ASTM E96/E96M - Standard Test Methods for Water Vapor Transmission of
Materials; 2012.
K. NFPA 255 - Standard Method of Test of Surface Burning Characteristics of Building
Materials; National Fire Protection Association; 2006.
L. UL 723 - Standard for Test for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials;
Underwriters Laboratories Inc.; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
14-400-029-03 / 14-400-029-03 NMSU DHW & HHW CD'S
22 0716 - 1
B. Product Data: Provide product description, thermal characteristics, list of materials and
thickness for equipment scheduled.
A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the products
specified in this section with not less than three years of documented experience.
A. Accept materials on site in original factory packaging, labeled with manufacturer's
identification, including product density and thickness.
B. Protect insulation from weather and construction traffic, dirt, water, chemical, and
mechanical damage, by storing in original wrapping.
A. Maintain ambient temperatures and conditions required by manufacturers of adhesives,
mastics, and insulation cements.
B. Maintain temperature during and after installation for minimum period of 24 hours.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 REQUIREMENTS FOR ALL PRODUCTS OF THIS SECTION
A. Surface Burning Characteristics: Flame spread/Smoke developed index of 25/50,
maximum, when tested in accordance with ASTM E84, NFPA 255, or UL 723.
2.2 GLASS FIBER, FLEXIBLE
A. Insulation: ASTM C553; flexible, noncombustible.
1. 'K' ('Ksi') Value: 0.36 at 75 degrees F (0.052 at 24 degrees C), when tested in
accordance with ASTM C177 or ASTM C518.
2. Maximum Service Temperature: 250 degrees F (121 degrees C).
3. Maximum Water Vapor Sorption: 5.0 percent by weight.
B. Vapor Barrier Jacket: Kraft paper reinforced with glass fiber yarn and bonded to
aluminized film.
1. Moisture Vapor Permeability: 0.02 perm inch, when tested in accordance with
ASTM E96/E96M.
2.3 GLASS FIBER, RIGID
A. Manufacturer:
1. Knauf Insulation; Model ______: www.knaufusa.com.
2. Johns Manville Corporation; Model ______: www.jm.com.
3. Owens Corning Corp; Model ______: www.owenscorning.com.
4. CertainTeed Corporation; ______: www.certainteed.com.
B. Insulation: ASTM C612 or ASTM C592; rigid, noncombustible.
14-400-029-03 / 14-400-029-03 NMSU DHW & HHW CD'S
22 0716 - 2
1.
2.
3.
'K' ('Ksi') Value: 0.25 at 75 degrees F (0.036 at 24 degrees C), when tested in
accordance with ASTM C177 or ASTM C518.
Maximum Service Temperature: 450 degrees F (232 degrees C).
Maximum Water Vapor Sorption: 5.0 percent by weight.
C. Vapor Barrier Jacket:
1. Kraft paper reinforced with glass fiber yarn and bonded to aluminized film.
2. Secure with self-sealing longitudinal laps and butt strips.
3. Secure with outward clinch expanding staples and vapor barrier mastic.
2.4 HYDROUS CALCIUM SILICATE
A. Insulation: ASTM C533; rigid molded, asbestos free, gold color.
1. 'K' ('Ksi') Value: 0.40 at 300 degrees F (0.057 at 148 degrees C), when tested in
accordance with ASTM C177 or C518.
3. Density: 15 lb/cu ft (249 kg/cu m).
2.5 JACKETS
A. PVC Plastic:
1. Jacket: Sheet material, off-white color.
a. Minimum Service Temperature: -40 degrees F (-40 degrees C).
b. Maximum Service Temperature: 150 degrees F (66 degrees C).
c. Thickness: 10 mil (0.25 mm).
d. Connections: Brush on welding adhesive.
B. Aluminum Jacket: ASTM B209 (ASTM B209M) formed aluminum sheet.
1. Thickness: 0.025 inch (0.64 mm) sheet.
2. Finish: Embossed.
3. Joining: Longitudinal slip joints and 2 inch (50 mm) laps.
4. Metal Jacket Bands: 3/8 inch (10 mm) wide; 0.015 inch (0.38 mm) thick
aluminum.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that equipment has been tested before applying insulation materials.
B. Verify that surfaces are clean and dry, with foreign material removed.
3.2 INSTALLATION
B. Factory Insulated Equipment: Do not insulate.
C. Exposed Equipment: Locate insulation and cover seams in least visible locations.
14-400-029-03 / 14-400-029-03 NMSU DHW & HHW CD'S
22 0716 - 3
D. Apply insulation close to equipment by grooving, scoring, and beveling insulation.
Fasten insulation to equipment with studs, pins, clips, adhesive, wires, or bands.
E. Fill joints, cracks, seams, and depressions with bedding compound to form smooth
surface. On cold equipment, use vapor retarder cement.
F. Insulated equipment containing fluids below ambient temperature: Insulate entire
system including mixing tank.
G. Fiber glass insulated equipment containing fluids below ambient temperature: Provide
vapor barrier jackets, factory-applied or field-applied. Finish with glass cloth and vapor
barrier adhesive.
H. For hot equipment containing fluids 140 degrees F (60 degrees C) or less, do not
insulate flanges and unions, but bevel and seal ends of insulation.
I.
For hot equipment containing fluids over 140 degrees F (60 degrees C), insulate flanges
and unions with removable sections and jackets.
J.
Fiber glass insulated equipment containing fluids above ambient temperature: Provide
standard jackets, with or without vapor barrier, factory-applied or field-applied. Finish
with glass cloth and adhesive.
K. Inserts and Shields:
1. Application: Equipment 1-1/2 inches (40 mm) diameter or larger.
2. Shields: Galvanized steel between hangers and inserts.
3. Insert location: Between support shield and equipment and under the finish jacket.
4. Insert configuration: Minimum 6 inches (150 mm) long, of same thickness and
contour as adjoining insulation; may be factory fabricated.
5. Insert material: Hydrous calcium silicate insulation or other heavy density
insulating material suitable for the planned temperature range.
L. Finish insulation at supports, protrusions, and interruptions.
M. Equipment in Mechanical Equipment Rooms or Finished Spaces: Finish with canvas
jacket sized for finish painting.
N. Exterior Applications: Provide vapor barrier jacket or finish with glass mesh reinforced
vapor barrier cement. Cover with aluminum jacket with seams located on bottom side
of horizontal equipment.
O. Nameplates and ASME Stamps: Bevel and seal insulation around; do not insulate over.
P. Equipment Requiring Access for Maintenance, Repair, or Cleaning: Install insulation
so it can be easily removed and replaced without damage.
END OF SECTION
14-400-029-03 / 14-400-029-03 NMSU DHW & HHW CD'S
22 0716 - 4
SECTION 22 0719
PLUMBING PIPING INSULATION
PART 1 GENERAL
A. Piping insulation.
B. Jackets and accessories.
A. Section 22 1005 - Plumbing Piping: Placement of hangers and hanger inserts.
B. Section 23 2113 - Hydronic Piping: Placement of hangers and hanger inserts.
A. ASTM C177 - Standard Test Method for Steady-State Heat Flux Measurements and
Thermal Transmission Properties by Means of the Guarded Hot Plate Apparatus; 2010.
B. ASTM C195 - Standard Specification for Mineral Fiber Thermal Insulating Cement;
2007.
C. ASTM C449 - Standard Specification for Mineral Fiber Hydraulic-Setting Thermal
Insulating and Finishing Cement; 2007 (Reapproved 2013).
D. ASTM C518 - Standard Test Method for Steady-State Thermal Transmission Properties
E. ASTM C533 - Standard Specification for Calcium Silicate Block and Pipe Thermal
Insulation; 2011.
F. ASTM C547 - Standard Specification for Mineral Fiber Pipe Insulation; 2012.
G. ASTM C552 - Standard Specification for Cellular Glass Thermal Insulation; 2012.
H. ASTM C578 - Standard Specification for Rigid, Cellular Polystyrene Thermal
Insulation; 2012.
I.
ASTM C585 - Standard Practice for Inner and Outer Diameters of Rigid Thermal
Insulation for Nominal Sizes of Pipe and Tubing (NPS System); 2010.
J.
ASTM C591 - Standard Specification for Unfaced Preformed Rigid Cellular
Polyisocyanurate Thermal Insulation; 2012a.
K. ASTM C795 - Standard Specification for Thermal Insulation for Use in Contact with
Austenitic Stainless Steel; 2008.
L. ASTM D1056 - Standard Specification for Flexible Cellular Materials--Sponge or
Expanded Rubber; 2007.
M. ASTM D2842 - Standard Test Method for Water Absorption of Rigid Cellular Plastics;
2012.
14-400-029-03 / 14-400-029-03 NMSU DHW & HHW CD'S
22 0719 - 1
N. ASTM E84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building
Materials; 2012.
O. ASTM E96/E96M - Standard Test Methods for Water Vapor Transmission of
Materials; 2012.
P. NFPA 255 - Standard Method of Test of Surface Burning Characteristics of Building
Q. UL 723 - Standard for Test for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials;
1.4 SUBMITTALS
thickness for each service, and locations.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.2 GLASS FIBER
A. Manufacturers:
B. Insulation: ASTM C547 ; rigid molded, noncombustible.
1. 'K' ('Ksi') value: ASTM C177, 0.24 at 75 degrees F (0.035 at 24 degrees C).
2. Maximum service temperature: 850 degrees F (454 degrees C).
3. Maximum moisture absorption: 0.2 percent by volume.
C. Vapor Barrier Jacket: White Kraft paper with glass fiber yarn, bonded to aluminized
film; moisture vapor transmission when tested in accordance with ASTM E96/E96M of
0.02 perm-inches (0.029 ng/Pa s m).
D. Insulating Cement/Mastic:
1. ASTM C195; hydraulic setting on mineral wool.
E. Fibrous Glass Fabric:
1. Cloth: Untreated; 9 oz/sq yd (305 g/sq m) weight.
2. Blanket: 1.0 lb/cu ft (16 kg/cu m) density.
3. Weave: 5x5.
F. Indoor Vapor Barrier Finish:
1. Cloth: Untreated; 9 oz/sq yd (305 g/sq m) weight.
2. Vinyl emulsion type acrylic, compatible with insulation, black color.
G. Outdoor Vapor Barrier Mastic:
1. Vinyl emulsion type acrylic or mastic, compatible with insulation, black color.
14-400-029-03 / 14-400-029-03 NMSU DHW & HHW CD'S
22 0719 - 2
H. Outdoor Breather Mastic:
1. Vinyl emulsion type acrylic or mastic, compatible with insulation, black color.
I.
Insulating Cement:
1. ASTM C449/C449M.
2.3 CELLULAR GLASS
A. Insulation: ASTM C552, Grade 1.
1. 'K' ('Ksi') value: 0.37 at 100 degrees F (0.053 at 38 degrees C).
2. Service Temperature: Up to 900 degrees F (482 degrees C).
3. Water Vapor Permeability: 0.005 perm inch.
4. Water Absorption: 0.2 percent by volume, maximum.
2.4 EXPANDED POLYSTYRENE
A. Insulation: ASTM C578; rigid closed cell.
3. Maximum water vapor permeance: 5.0 perms
2.5 HYDROUS CALCIUM SILICATE
A. Insulation: ASTM C533 and ASTM C795; rigid molded, asbestos free, gold color.
1. 'K' ('Ksi') value: ASTM C177 and C518; 0.40 at 300 degrees F (0.057 at 149
degrees C), when tested in accordance with ASTM C177 or ASTM C518.
B. Tie Wire: 0.048 inch (1.22 mm) stainless steel with twisted ends on maximum 12 inch
(300 mm) centers.
C. Insulating Cement:
1. ASTM C449/C449M.
2.6 POLYISOCYANURATE CELLULAR PLASTIC
A. Insulation Material: ASTM C591, rigid molded modified polyisocyanurate cellular
plastic.
1. Dimension: Comply with requirements of ASTM C585.
2. 'K' ('Ksi') value: 0.18 at 75 degrees F (0.026 at 24 degrees C), when tested in
accordance with ASTM C518.
3. Minimum Service Temperature: -70 degrees F (-51 degrees C).
5. Water Absorption: 0.5 percent by volume, maximum, when tested in accordance
with ASTM D2842..
6. Moisture Vapor Transmission: 4.0 perm in (5.8 ng/(Pa s m)).
7. Connection: Waterproof vapor barrier adhesive.
14-400-029-03 / 14-400-029-03 NMSU DHW & HHW CD'S
22 0719 - 3
2.7 POLYETHYLENE
A. Insulation: Flexible closed-cell polyethylene tubing, slit lengthwise for installation,
complying with applicable requirements of ASTM D1056.
1. 'K' ('Ksi') value: ASTM C177; 0.25 at 75 degrees F (0.036 at 24 degrees C).
4. Maximum Moisture Absorption: 1.0 percent by volume.
5. Moisture Vapor Permeability: 0.05 perm inch (0.073 ng/Pa s m), when tested in
accordance with ASTM E96/E96M.
6. Connection: Contact adhesive.
2.8 JACKETS
A. PVC Plastic.
1. Jacket: One piece molded type fitting covers and sheet material, off-white color.
a. Minimum Service Temperature: 0 degrees F (-18 degrees C).
b. Maximum Service Temperature: 150 degrees F (66 degrees C).
c. Moisture Vapor Permeability: 0.002 perm inch (0.0029 ng/Pa s m),
maximum, when tested in accordance with ASTM E96/E96M.
d. Thickness: 10 mil (0.25 mm).
e. Connections: Brush on welding adhesive.
B. Canvas Jacket: UL listed 6 oz/sq yd (220 g/sq m) plain weave cotton fabric treated with
dilute fire retardant lagging adhesive.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that piping has been tested before applying insulation materials.
3.2 INSTALLATION
B. Install in accordance with NAIMA National Insulation Standards.
C. Exposed Piping: Locate insulation and cover seams in least visible locations.
D. Insulated pipes conveying fluids below ambient temperature: Insulate entire system
including fittings, valves, unions, flanges, strainers, flexible connections, pump bodies,
and expansion joints.
E. Glass fiber insulated pipes conveying fluids below ambient temperature:
1. Provide vapor barrier jackets, factory-applied or field-applied. Secure with
self-sealing longitudinal laps and butt strips with pressure sensitive adhesive.
Secure with outward clinch expanding staples and vapor barrier mastic.
14-400-029-03 / 14-400-029-03 NMSU DHW & HHW CD'S
22 0719 - 4
2.
Insulate fittings, joints, and valves with molded insulation of like material and
thickness as adjacent pipe. Finish with glass cloth and vapor barrier adhesive or
PVC fitting covers.
F. For hot piping conveying fluids 140 degrees F (60 degrees C) or less, do not insulate
flanges and unions at equipment, but bevel and seal ends of insulation.
G. For hot piping conveying fluids over 140 degrees F (60 degrees C), insulate flanges and
unions at equipment.
H. Glass fiber insulated pipes conveying fluids above ambient temperature:
1. Provide standard jackets, with or without vapor barrier, factory-applied or
field-applied. Secure with self-sealing longitudinal laps and butt strips with
pressure sensitive adhesive. Secure with outward clinch expanding staples.
2. Insulate fittings, joints, and valves with insulation of like material and thickness as
adjoining pipe. Finish with glass cloth and adhesive or PVC fitting covers.
I.
Inserts and Shields:
1. Application: Piping 1-1/2 inches (40 mm) diameter or larger.
2. Shields: Galvanized steel between pipe hangers or pipe hanger rolls and inserts.
3. Insert location: Between support shield and piping and under the finish jacket.
J.
Continue insulation through walls, sleeves, pipe hangers, and other pipe penetrations.
Finish at supports, protrusions, and interruptions. At fire separations, refer to Section
07 8400, Penetration Firestopping.
K. Pipe Exposed in Mechanical Equipment Rooms or Finished Spaces (less than 25 feet
above finished floor): Finish with canvas jacket sized for finish painting.
L. Buried Piping: Provide factory fabricated assembly with inner all-purpose service
jacket with self-sealing lap, and asphalt impregnated open mesh glass fabric, with one
mil (0.025 mm) thick aluminum foil sandwiched between three layers of bituminous
compound; outer surface faced with a polyester film.
END OF SECTION
14-400-029-03 / 14-400-029-03 NMSU DHW & HHW CD'S
22 0719 - 5
SECTION 22 1005
PLUMBING PIPING
PART 1 GENERAL
A. Pipe, pipe fittings, valves, and connections for piping systems.
1. Sanitary sewer.
2. Domestic water.
3. Gas.
A. Section 07 8400 - Penetration Firestopping.
B. Section 08 3113 - Access Doors and Frames.
C. Section 22 0548 - Vibration and Seismic Controls for Plumbing Piping and Equipment.
D. Section 22 0553 - Identification for Plumbing Piping and Equipment.
E. Section 22 0719 - Plumbing Piping Insulation.
F. Section 22 0516 - Expansion Fittings and Loops for Plumbing Piping.
A. ASME B16.3 - Malleable Iron Threaded Fittings: Classes 150 and 300; The American
Society of Mechanical Engineers; 2011.
B. ASME B16.18 - Cast Copper Alloy Solder Joint Pressure Fittings; The American
Society of Mechanical Engineers; 2012 (ANSI B16.18).
C. ASME B16.22 - Wrought Copper and Copper Alloy Solder Joint Pressure Fittings; The
American Society of Mechanical Engineers; 2001 (R2010).
D. ASME B16.26 - Cast Copper Alloy Fittings for Flared Copper Tubes; The American
Society of Mechanical Engineers; 2011.
E. ASME B31.1 - Power Piping; The American Society of Mechanical Engineers; 2012
(ANSI/ASME B31.1).
F. ASME B31.9 - Building Services Piping; The American Society of Mechanical
Engineers; 2011 (ANSI/ASME B31.9).
G. ASTM A53/A53M - Standard Specification for Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped,
Zinc-Coated, Welded and Seamless; 2012.
H. ASTM A74 - Standard Specification for Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings; 2009.
I.
ASTM A234/A234M - Standard Specification for Piping Fittings of Wrought Carbon
Steel and Alloy Steel for Moderate and High Temperature Service; 2011a.
J.
ASTM B32 - Standard Specification for Solder Metal; 2008.
K. ASTM B42 - Standard Specification for Seamless Copper Pipe, Standard Sizes; 2010.
14-400-029-03 / 14-400-029-03 NMSU DHW & HHW CD'S
PLUMBING PIPING
22 1005 - 1
L. ASTM B88 - Standard Specification for Seamless Copper Water Tube; 2009.
M. ASTM B88M - Standard Specification for Seamless Copper Water Tube (Metric); 2005
(Reapproved 2011).
N. ASTM B813 - Standard Specification for Liquid and Paste Fluxes for Soldering of
Copper and Copper Alloy Tube; 2010.
O. ASTM B828 - Standard Practice for Making Capillary Joints by Soldering of Copper
and Copper Alloy Tube and Fittings; 2002 (Reapproved 2010).
P. ASTM C564 - Standard Specification for Rubber Gaskets for Cast Iron Soil Pipe and
Fittings; 2012.
Q. AWS A5.8/A5.8M - Specification for Filler Metals for Brazing and Braze Welding;
American Welding Society; 2011 and errata.
R. AWWA C651 - Disinfecting Water Mains; American Water Works Association; 2005
(ANSI/AWWA C651).
S. CISPI 301 - Standard Specification for Hubless Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings for
Sanitary and Storm Drain, Waste and Vent Piping Applications; Cast Iron Soil Pipe
Institute; 2009.
T. CISPI 310 - Specification for Coupling for Use in Connection with Hubless Cast Iron
Soil Pipe and Fittings for Sanitary and Storm Drain, Waste, and Vent Piping
Applications; Cast Iron Soil Pipe Institute; 2011
U. MSS SP-58 - Pipe Hangers and Supports - Materials, Design, Manufacture, Selection,
Application, and Installation; Manufacturers Standardization Society of the Valve and
Fittings Industry, Inc.; 2009.
V. MSS SP-80 - Bronze Gate, Globe, Angle and Check Valves; Manufacturers
Standardization Society of the Valve and Fittings Industry, Inc.; 2008.
W. MSS SP-85 - Cast Iron Globe & Angle Valves, Flanged and Threaded Ends;
Manufacturers Standardization Society of the Valve and Fittings Industry, Inc.; 2011.
X. NFPA 54 - National Fuel Gas Code; National Fire Protection Association; 2012.
Y. NSF 372 - Drinking Water System Components - Lead Content; 2011.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
B. Product Data: Provide data on pipe materials, pipe fittings, valves, and accessories.
Provide manufacturers catalog information. Indicate valve data and ratings.
A. Accept valves on site in shipping containers with labeling in place. Inspect for damage.
B. Provide temporary end caps and closures on piping and fittings. Maintain in place until
installation.
C. Protect piping systems from entry of foreign materials by temporary covers, completing
sections of the work, and isolating parts of completed system.
14-400-029-03 / 14-400-029-03 NMSU DHW & HHW CD'S
PLUMBING PIPING
22 1005 - 2
A. Do not install underground piping when bedding is wet or frozen.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Potable Water Supply Systems: Provide piping, pipe fittings, and solder and flux (if
used), that comply with NSF 61 and NSF 372 for maximum lead content; label pipe and
fittings.
2.2 SANITARY SEWER PIPING, BURIED BEYOND 5 FEET (1500 MM) OF BUILDING
2.3 SANITARY SEWER PIPING, BURIED WITHIN 5 FEET (1500 MM) OF BUILDING
A. Cast Iron Pipe: ASTM A74 service weight.
1. Fittings: Cast iron.
2. Joints: Hub-and-spigot, CISPI HSN compression type with ASTM C564 neoprene
gaskets or lead and oakum.
2.4 SANITARY SEWER PIPING, ABOVE GRADE
A. Cast Iron Pipe: ASTM A74, service weight.
2. Joint Seals: ASTM C564 neoprene gaskets, or lead and oakum.
B. Cast Iron Pipe: CISPI 301, hubless, service weight.
2. Joints: CISPI 310, neoprene gaskets and stainless steel clamp-and-shield
assemblies.
2.5 WATER PIPING, BURIED WITHIN 5 FEET (1500 MM) OF BUILDING
A. Copper Pipe: ASTM B42, hard drawn.
1. Fittings: ASME B16.18, cast copper alloy or ASME B16.22 wrought copper and
bronze.
2. Joints: ASTM B32, alloy Sn95 solder.
3. Joints: AWS A5.8/A5.8M, BCuP copper/silver braze.
B. Copper Pipe: ASTM B42, annealed.
1. Fittings: ASME B16.26, cast bronze.
2. Joints: Flared.
2.6 WATER PIPING, ABOVE GRADE
A. Copper Tube: ASTM B88 (ASTM B88M), Type L (B), Drawn (H).
1. Fittings: ASME B16.18, cast copper alloy or ASME B16.22, wrought copper and
bronze.
2. Fittings: Cast iron, coated.
14-400-029-03 / 14-400-029-03 NMSU DHW & HHW CD'S
PLUMBING PIPING
22 1005 - 3
3.
4.
Joints: ASTM B32, alloy Sn95 solder.
Joints: Grooved mechanical couplings.
2.7 NATURAL GAS PIPING, ABOVE GRADE
A. Steel Pipe: ASTM A53/A53M Schedule 40 black.
1. Fittings: ASME B16.3, malleable iron, or ASTM A234/A234M, wrought steel
welding type.
2. Joints: NFPA 54, threaded or welded to ASME B31.1.
2.8 PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
A. Provide hangers and supports that comply with MSS SP-58.
1. If type of hanger or support for a particular situation is not indicated, select
appropriate type using MSS SP-58 recommendations.
2. Overhead Supports: Individual steel rod hangers attached to structure or to trapeze
hangers.
3. Trapeze Hangers: Welded steel channel frames attached to structure.
4. Vertical Pipe Support: Steel riser clamp.
B. Plumbing Piping - Drain, Waste, and Vent:
1. Conform to ASME B31.9.
C. Plumbing Piping - Water:
1. Conform to ASME B31.9.
2. Multiple or Trapeze Hangers: Steel channels with welded supports or spacers and
hanger rods.
2.9 BALL VALVES
A. Construction, 4 Inches (100 mm) and Smaller: MSS SP-110, Class 150, 400 psi (2760
kPa) CWP, bronze, two piece body, chrome plated brass ball, regular port, teflon seats
and stuffing box ring, blow-out proof stem, lever handle with balancing stops, solder
ends with union.
2.10 SPRING LOADED CHECK VALVES
A. Class 125, iron body, bronze trim, stainless steel springs, bronze disc, Buna N seals,
wafer style ends.
2.11 WATER PRESSURE REDUCING VALVES
A. Up to 2 Inches (50 mm):
1. MSS SP-80, bronze body, stainless steel and thermoplastic internal parts, fabric
reinforced diaphragm, strainer, threaded single union ends.
B. Over 2 Inches (50 mm):
1. MSS SP-85, cast iron body, bronze fitted, elastomeric diaphragm and seat disc,
flanged.
14-400-029-03 / 14-400-029-03 NMSU DHW & HHW CD'S
PLUMBING PIPING
22 1005 - 4
2.12 STRAINERS
A. Size 2 inch (50 mm) and Under:
1. Threaded brass body for 175 psi (1200 kPa) CWP, Y pattern with 1/32 inch (0.8
mm) stainless steel perforated screen.
2. Class 150, threaded bronze body 300 psi (2070 kPa) CWP, Y pattern with 1/32
inch (0.8 mm) stainless steel perforated screen.
B. Size 1-1/2 inch (40 mm) to 4 inch (100 mm):
1. Class 125, flanged iron body, Y pattern with 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) stainless steel
perforated screen.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that excavations are to required grade, dry, and not over-excavated.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Ream pipe and tube ends. Remove burrs. Bevel plain end ferrous pipe.
B. Remove scale and dirt, on inside and outside, before assembly.
C. Prepare piping connections to equipment with flanges or unions.
3.3 INSTALLATION
B. Provide non-conducting dielectric connections wherever jointing dissimilar metals.
C. Route piping in orderly manner and maintain gradient.
D. Install piping to maintain headroom, conserve space, and not interfere with use of
space.
E. Group piping whenever practical at common elevations.
F. Install piping to allow for expansion and contraction without stressing pipe, joints, or
connected equipment. Refer to Section 22 0516.
G. Provide clearance in hangers and from structure and other equipment for installation of
insulation and access to valves and fittings. Refer to Section 22 0719.,Plumbing Piping
Insulation.
H. Provide access where valves and fittings are not exposed.
I.
Where pipe support members are welded to structural building framing, scrape, brush
clean, and apply one coat of zinc rich primer to welding.
J.
Provide support for utility meters in accordance with requirements of utility companies.
K. Install bell and spigot pipe with bell end upstream.
L. Install valves with stems upright or horizontal, not inverted.
14-400-029-03 / 14-400-029-03 NMSU DHW & HHW CD'S
PLUMBING PIPING
22 1005 - 5
M. Pipe vents from gas pressure reducing valves to outdoors and terminate in weather
proof hood.
N. Install water piping to ASME B31.9.
O. Install fuel oil piping to ASME B31.9.
P. Copper Pipe and Tube: Make soldered joints in accordance with ASTM B828, using
specified solder, and flux meeting ASTM B813; in potable water systems use flux also
complying with NSF 61 and NSF 372.
Q. Sleeve pipes passing through partitions, walls and floors.
R. Inserts:
1. Provide inserts for placement in concrete formwork.
2. Provide inserts for suspending hangers from reinforced concrete slabs and sides of
reinforced concrete beams.
3. Provide hooked rod to concrete reinforcement section for inserts carrying pipe over
4 inches (100 mm).
4. Where concrete slabs form finished ceiling, locate inserts flush with slab surface.
5. Where inserts are omitted, drill through concrete slab from below and provide
through-bolt with recessed square steel plate and nut above slab.
S. Pipe Hangers and Supports:
1. Install in accordance with ASME B31.9.
2. Support horizontal piping as scheduled.
3. Install hangers to provide minimum 1/2 inch (15 mm) space between finished
covering and adjacent work.
4. Place hangers within 12 inches (300 mm) of each horizontal elbow.
5. Use hangers with 1-1/2 inch (40 mm) minimum vertical adjustment. Design
hangers for pipe movement without disengagement of supported pipe.
6. Support vertical piping at every other floor. Support riser piping independently of
connected horizontal piping.
7. Where several pipes can be installed in parallel and at same elevation, provide
multiple or trapeze hangers.
8. Provide copper plated hangers and supports for copper piping.
9. Prime coat exposed steel hangers and supports. Hangers and supports located in
crawl spaces, pipe shafts, and suspended ceiling spaces are not considered
exposed.
10. Provide hangers adjacent to motor driven equipment with vibration isolation; refer
to Section 22 0548.
3.4 APPLICATION
A. Install gate valves for shut-off and to isolate equipment, part of systems, or vertical
risers.
B. Install ball valves for throttling, bypass, or manual flow control services.
C. Provide plug valves in natural gas systems for shut-off service.
14-400-029-03 / 14-400-029-03 NMSU DHW & HHW CD'S
PLUMBING PIPING
22 1005 - 6
3.5 TOLERANCES
A. Water Piping: Slope at minimum of 1/32 inch per foot (1:400) and arrange to drain at
low points.
3.6 DISINFECTION OF DOMESTIC WATER PIPING SYSTEM
A. Prior to starting work, verify system is complete, flushed and clean.
B. Ensure Ph of water to be treated is between 7.4 and 7.6 by adding alkali (caustic soda or
soda ash) or acid (hydrochloric).
C. Inject disinfectant, free chlorine in liquid, powder, tablet or gas form, throughout
system to obtain 50 to 80 mg/L residual.
D. Bleed water from outlets to ensure distribution and test for disinfectant residual at
minimum 15 percent of outlets.
E. Maintain disinfectant in system for 24 hours.
F. If final disinfectant residual tests less than 25 mg/L, repeat treatment.
G. Flush disinfectant from system until residual equal to that of incoming water or 1.0
mg/L.
H. Take samples no sooner than 24 hours after flushing, from 10 percent of outlets and
from water entry, and analyze in accordance with AWWA C651.
3.7 SERVICE CONNECTIONS
A. Provide new sanitary sewer services. Before commencing work check invert elevations
required for sewer connections, confirm inverts and ensure that these can be properly
connected with slope for drainage and cover to avoid freezing.
B. Provide new water service complete with approved reduced pressure backflow
preventer and water meter with by-pass valves, pressure reducing valve, and sand
strainer.
1. Provide sleeve in wall for service main and support at wall with reinforced
concrete bridge. Calk enlarged sleeve and make watertight with pliable material.
Anchor service main inside to concrete wall.
2. Provide 18 gage (1.20 mm) galvanized sheet metal sleeve around service main to 6
inch (150 mm) above floor and 6 feet (1800 mm) minimum below grade. Size for
minimum of 2 inches (50 mm) of loose batt insulation stuffing.
C. Provide new gas service complete with gas meter and regulators. Gas service
distribution piping to have initial minimum pressure of 7 inch wg (1.75 kPa). Provide
regulators on each line serving gravity type appliances, sized in accordance with
equipment.
14-400-029-03 / 14-400-029-03 NMSU DHW & HHW CD'S
PLUMBING PIPING
22 1005 - 7
SECTION 22 1006
PLUMBING PIPING SPECIALTIES
PART 1 GENERAL
A. Roof and floor drains.
B. Cleanouts.
C. Hose bibbs.
D. Backflow preventers.
E. Water hammer arrestors.
F. Sumps & Interceptors.
G. Thermostatic mixing valves.
A. Section 22 1005 - Plumbing Piping.
B. Section 22 3000 - Plumbing Equipment.
C. Section 22 4000 - Plumbing Fixtures.
A. ASME A112.6.3 - Floor and Trench Drains; The American Society of Mechanical
Engineers; 2001 (R2007).
B. PDI-WH 201 - Water Hammer Arresters; Plumbing and Drainage Institute; 2010.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
B. Product Data: Provide component sizes, rough-in requirements, service sizes, and
finishes.
C. Shop Drawings: Indicate dimensions, weights, and placement of openings and holes.
A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the Products
specified in this section with not less than three years documented experience.
A. Accept specialties on site in original factory packaging. Inspect for damage.
14-400-029-03 / 14-400-029-03 NMSU DHW & HHW CD'S
22 1006 - 1
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 DRAINS
A. Floor Drain (FD):
1. ASME A112.6.3; lacquered cast iron two piece body with double drainage flange,
weep holes, reversible clamping collar, and round, adjustable nickel-bronze
strainer.
a. All floor drains shall be provided with trap guards.
2.2 CLEANOUTS
A. Cleanouts at Exterior Surfaced Areas:
1. Round cast nickel bronze access frame and non-skid cover.
B. Cleanouts at Exterior Unsurfaced Areas:
1. Line type with lacquered cast iron body and round epoxy coated gasketed cover.
C. Cleanouts at Interior Finished Floor Areas:
1. Lacquered cast iron body with anchor flange, reversible clamping collar, threaded
top assembly, and round gasketed scored cover in service areas and round gasketed
depressed cover to accept floor finish in finished floor areas.
D. Cleanouts at Interior Finished Walls:
1. Line type with lacquered cast iron body and round epoxy coated gasketed cover,
and round stainless steel access cover secured with machine screw.
2.3 BACKFLOW PREVENTERS
A. Reduced Pressure Backflow Preventers:
1. ASSE 1013; bronze body with bronze internal parts and stainless steel springs; two
independently operating, spring loaded check valves; diaphragm type differential
pressure relief valve located between check valves; third check valve that opens
under back pressure in case of diaphragm failure; non-threaded vent outlet;
assembled with two gate valves, strainer, and four test cocks.
2.4 WATER HAMMER ARRESTORS
A. Water Hammer Arrestors:
1. Stainless steel construction, bellows type sized in accordance with PDI-WH 201,
precharged suitable for operation in temperature range -100 to 300 degrees F (-73
to 149 degrees C) and maximum 250 psi (1700 kPa) working pressure.
2.5 MIXING VALVES
A. Thermostatic Mixing Valves:
1. Valve: Chrome plated cast brass body, stainless steel or copper alloy bellows,
integral temperature adjustment.
2. Accessories:
14-400-029-03 / 14-400-029-03 NMSU DHW & HHW CD'S
22 1006 - 2
a.
Stem thermometer on outlet.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
B. Extend cleanouts to finished floor or wall surface. Lubricate threaded cleanout plugs
with mixture of graphite and linseed oil. Ensure clearance at cleanout for rodding of
drainage system.
C. Encase exterior cleanouts in concrete flush with grade.
D. Install floor cleanouts at elevation to accommodate finished floor.
E. Install approved portable water protection devices on plumbing lines where
contamination of domestic water may occur; on boiler feed water lines, janitor rooms,
fire sprinkler systems, premise isolation, irrigation systems, flush valves, interior and
exterior hose bibbs.
F. Pipe relief from backflow preventer to nearest drain on 3/4" lines, to exterior on all
others.
G. Install water hammer arrestors complete with accessible isolation valve on hot and cold
water supply piping to sinks washing machine outlets and water closets.
END OF SECTION
14-400-029-03 / 14-400-029-03 NMSU DHW & HHW CD'S
22 1006 - 3
SECTION 22 3000
PLUMBING EQUIPMENT
PART 1 GENERAL
A. Water heaters.
B. Packaged water heating systems.
C. Water storage tanks.
D. Pumps.
1. Circulators.
A. ANSI Z21.10.1 - Gas Water Heaters - Volume I - Storage Water Heaters with Input
Ratings of 75,000 Btu per Hour or Less; 2011.
B. ANSI Z21.10.3 - Gas Water Heaters - Volume III - Storage Water Heaters with Input
Ratings Above 75,000 Btu per Hour, Circulating and Instantaneous Water Heaters;
2011.
C. ASME (BPV VIII, 1) - Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Section VIII, Division 1 Rules for Construction of Pressure Vessels; The American Society of Mechanical
Engineers; 2010.
D. UL 1453 - Standard for Electric Booster and Commercial Storage Tank Water Heaters;
1.3 SUBMITTALS
B. Product Data:
1. Provide dimension drawings of water heaters indicating components and
connections to other equipment and piping.
2. Indicate pump type, capacity, power requirements.
3. Provide certified pump curves showing pump performance characteristics with
pump and system operating point plotted. Include NPSH curve when applicable.
4. Provide electrical characteristics and connection requirements.
C. Warranty: Submit manufacturer warranty and ensure forms have been completed in
Owner's name and registered with manufacturer.
A. Identification: Provide pumps with manufacturer's name, model number, and
rating/capacity identified by permanently attached label.
14-400-029-03 / 14-400-029-03 NMSU DHW & HHW CD'S
PLUMBING EQUIPMENT
22 3000 - 1
B. Performance: Ensure pumps operate at specified system fluid temperatures without
vapor binding and cavitation, are non-overloading in parallel or individual operation,
operate within 25 percent of midpoint of published maximum efficiency curve.
1.5 CERTIFICATIONS
A. Water Heaters: NSF approved.
B. Gas Water Heaters: Certified by CSA International to ANSI Z21.10.1 or ANSI
Z21.10.3, as applicable, in addition to requirements specified elsewhere.
C. Electric Water Heaters: UL listed and labeled to UL 174 or UL 1453.
D. Water Tanks: ASME labeled, to ASME (BPV VIII, 1).
E. Products Requiring Electrical Connection: Listed and classified by Underwriters
Laboratories Inc., as suitable for the purpose specified and indicated.
A. Provide temporary inlet and outlet caps. Maintain caps in place until installation.
1.7 WARRANTY
A. See Section 01 7800 - Closeout Submittals, for additional warranty requirements.
B. Provide five year manufacturer warranty for domestic water heaters.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 COMMERCIAL GAS FIRED WATER HEATERS
A. Type: Automatic, natural gas-fired, vertical storage.
B. Tank: Glass lined welded steel ASME labeled; multiple flue passages, 4 inch (100 mm)
diameter inspection port, thermally insulated with minimum 2 inches (50 mm) glass
fiber, encased in corrosion-resistant steel jacket; baked-on enamel finish; floor shield
and legs.
C. Accessories: Provide:
1. Water Connections: Brass.
2. Dip tube: Brass.
3. Drain Valve.
4. Anode: Magnesium.
5. Temperature and Pressure Relief Valve: ASME labelled.
D. Certification: As automatic storage water heater and automatic circulating tank water
heater for operation at 180 degrees F (82 degrees C) for operation on combustible floors
for high altitude installation.
E. Controls: Automatic water thermostat with temperature range adjustable from 120 to
180 degrees F (49 to 82 degrees C), automatic reset high temperature limiting
thermostat factory set at 195 degrees F (90 degrees C), gas pressure regulator,
14-400-029-03 / 14-400-029-03 NMSU DHW & HHW CD'S
PLUMBING EQUIPMENT
22 3000 - 2
multi-ribbon or tubular burner, 100 percent safety shut-off pilot and thermocouple, flue
baffle and draft hood.
F. Controls: Automatic direct immersion thermostat with temperature range adjustable
minimum 175 degrees F (97 degrees C) differential, automatic reset high temperature
limiting thermostat factory set at 195 degrees F (90 degrees C), gas pressure regulator,
multi-ribbon or tubular burner, 100 percent safety shut-off pilot and thermocouple,
intermittent electronic ignition monitoring pilot and main flame, trial for re-ignition for
momentary loss of flame, shut down of pilot and main burner in 2-4 seconds after loss
of flame, and automatic flue damper.
2.2 PACKAGED WATER HEATING SYSTEMS
A. System: Gas-fired direct heating boiler, circulating pump, controls, piping and valving
as indicated, storage tank, all mounted on structural steel skid.
B. Boiler:
1. Type: Gas-fired water tube boiler, with copper finned tube heat exchanger, steel
jacket with glass fiber insulation.
2. Boiler Trim: Gas burner, thermometer and pressure gauge, immersion thermostats
for operating and high limit protection, 100 percent safety shut-off electric gas
valve with transformer, electronic safety pilot and pilot burner, gas pressure
regulator, manual gas shut-off, low water cut off, ASME rated temperature and
pressure relief valve, coil relief valve, automatic boiler fill and expansion tank,
draft inverter.
3. Performance:
C. Vertical storage tank:
1. Working pressure: 150 psi (1000 kPa) ASME labelled.
2. Lining: 15 mils (0.38 mm) thick epoxy lining extended through flanges and
couplings.
3. Support: Two welded tank saddles not less than 4 inches (100 mm) wide by 1/4
inch (6 mm) thick, mounted on 2 inch (50 mm) pipe stand with minimum four
cross braced legs; sheet teflon isolation strip between tank and saddle; dielectric
unions between tank and piping system.
4. Insulation: 3 inch (75 mm) glass fiber insulation with steel jacket.
D. Pump:
1. Type: All bronze, in-line circulation pump mounted on boiler, controlled by tank
mounted immersion thermostat.
E. Thermostatic Valve: Three-way, self-contained, full line size, bronze body 1/2 to 2
inches (13 to 50 mm) size, iron body 2-1/2 inches (60 mm) and over, set at 140 degrees
F (60 degrees C).
2.3 IN-LINE CIRCULATOR PUMPS
A. Casing: Bronze, rated for 125 psig (860 kPa) working pressure, with stainless steel
rotor assembly.
B. Impeller: Bronze.
14-400-029-03 / 14-400-029-03 NMSU DHW & HHW CD'S
PLUMBING EQUIPMENT
22 3000 - 3
C. Shaft: Alloy steel with integral thrust collar and two oil lubricated bronze sleeve
bearings.
D. Seal: Carbon rotating against a stationary ceramic seat.
E. Drive: Flexible coupling.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install plumbing equipment in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, as required
by code, and complying with conditions of certification, if any.
B. Coordinate with plumbing piping and related electrical work to achieve operating
system.
C. Pumps:
1. Provide air cock and drain connection on horizontal pump casings.
2. Provide line sized isolating valve and strainer on suction and line sized soft seated
check valve and balancing valve on discharge.
3. Support piping adjacent to pump such that no weight is carried on pump casings.
Provide supports under elbows on pump suction and discharge line sizes 4 inches
(100 mm) and over.
4. Ensure pumps operate at specified system fluid temperatures without vapor
binding and cavitation, are non-overloading in parallel or individual operation, and
5. Align and verify alignment of base mounted pumps prior to start-up.
END OF SECTION
14-400-029-03 / 14-400-029-03 NMSU DHW & HHW CD'S
PLUMBING EQUIPMENT
22 3000 - 4
SECTION 23 0010
MECHANICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 PROVISIONS:
A. The Mechanical Specifications are subject to all the requirements of the General
Conditions of the Contract and Specifications and shall be used in conjunction
therewith. The Contractor shall refer to other divisions of the Drawings and
Specifications for work which must be carried on in conjunction with the Mechanical
work so that the construction operations can proceed without harm to the Owner for
interference, delay or absence of coordination.
1.2 DRAWINGS AND SPECIFICATION COORDINATION:
A. Drawings and specification indicate the extent and general arrangement of the
Equipment and systems, and intend to provide the Owner with complete, functioning
systems under this Contract.
B. Should conditions necessitate a rearrangement of piping, ductwork, equipment, etc.,
such departures and the reasons, therefore shall be submitted to the Architect by the
Contractor for approval, in the form of detailed drawings showing the proposed
changes. No such changes shall be made without the prior written approval of the
Engineer. Equipment and piping arrangements shall provide adequate and acceptable
clearance for entry, servicing and maintenance.
C. Drawings and Specifications shall be considered as cooperative, and work or materials
called for by one and not mentioned in the other shall be done and furnished as though
treated by both.
D. In the case of insufficient information and discrepancies in figures, dimensions, details,
Drawings, Specifications, or construction notes, the Architect shall be notified
immediately and his decision shall determine the necessary adjustment. Without such
decision, said discrepancies shall not be adjusted by the Contractor. In case of any
settlement or any complication arising from such adjustment to the Contractor, he shall
bear all extra expense involved. There shall be no additional expense to the Owner,
Architect or Engineer.
E. Should it appear that the work intended to be done, or any of the matters relative
thereto, are not sufficiently detailed or explained on the drawings or specifications, the
Contractor shall apply to the Architect for such further drawings or explanations as may
be necessary, allowing a reasonable time for the Architect to supply same, and the
Contractor shall conform to same as part of the Contract.
F. Should any doubt or question arise in respect to the true meaning of the Drawings or
Specifications, reference shall be made to the Architect whose decision shall be final
and conclusive.
14-400-029-03 / 14-400-029-03 NMSU DHW & HHW CD'S
23 0010 - 1
G. All piping and all ducts in the finished areas of the building shall be run concealed in
chases, furrings, suspended ceilings, etc., unless noted or directed otherwise. Should
any condition arise which would cause any piping or duct to be exposed in finished
areas, it shall immediately be called to the Architect's attention and this Contractor shall
bear any and all expense in connection with rearranging his work as directed to
facilitate its concealment. In unfinished spaces such as ceiling spaces and equipment
rooms, all pipe lines shall be run to a continuous grade and square to the building.
H. Contractor shall thoroughly acquaint himself with the details of the Drawings and
Specifications before submitting his bid as no allowance will be made because of
unfamiliarity with these details. Place all inserts required for concrete construction in
place in the forms before concrete is poured and in masonry walls while they are under
construction. All concealed piping and ducts shall be installed prior to the time the
chases and furrings are fabricated.
I.
The Drawings do not give exact details as to elevations of piping, exact locations, etc.,
and do not show all offsets, control lines, pilot lines and their installation details. The
Contractor shall carefully lay out his work at the site to conform to the structural
conditions, provide proper grading of lines, to avoid all obstructions, to conform to
details of installation supplied by the manufacturers of the equipment to be installed,
and thereby to provide an integrated, satisfactory operation installation.
J.
Should the particular equipment which any Contractor proposes to install, require other
space conditions than those indicated on the drawings, the Contractor shall arrange for
such space with the Architect before submitting his bid. Should changes become
necessary on account of failure to comply with these details, the Contractor shall make
such necessary changes at his (the Contractor's) own expense.
K. Contractor shall submit working scale drawings of all his apparatus and equipment
which in any way varies from these specifications and plans which shall be checked by
the Architect and approved before the work is started. Interference with the structural
conditions shall be corrected before work proceeds.
L. All equipment shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer's
recommendations. Provide all accessories and components for optimum operation as
recommended by the manufacturer.
1.3 FIELD MEASUREMENTS:
A. Prior to the start of fabrication and/or installation the Contractor shall verify all
dimensions, clearances and field conditions governing the mechanical work.
B. No extra compensation shall be claimed or allowed on account of difference between
actual dimensions and those indicated on the drawings.
C. The Contractor shall examine adjoining work on which plumbing, heating ventilating
and air conditioning is dependent for perfect efficiency and shall report any work that
must be corrected.
D. No waiver of responsibility for defective work shall be claimed or allowed due to
failure to report unfavorable conditions affecting the mechanical work.
14-400-029-03 / 14-400-029-03 NMSU DHW & HHW CD'S
23 0010 - 2
1.4 SHOP DRAWINGS:
A. The review of Shop Drawings or catalog data by the Architect shall not relieve the
Contractor from responsibility for deviations from the Drawings and Specifications
unless he has, in writing, specifically called attention to such deviations at the time of
submission and has obtained the permission of the Architect thereon; nor shall it relieve
him from the responsibility for error of any kind in shop drawings.
B. Shop drawings will be returned unchecked unless the following information is included:
reference to all pertinent data in the Specifications or on the drawings, symbol
designation of equipment as indicated on drawing, size and characteristics of the
equipment, name of the project and a space large enough to accept an approval stamp.
The data submitted shall reflect the actual equipment performance under the specified
conditions and shall not be a copy of the scheduled data on the drawings.
C. Additional fees will be charged for reviewing second submittal and shop drawings on
equipment, fixtures and system, etc. that had been approved on the first submittal
review. The fees will be on a time-and-material basis at current hourly rates. The
additional fees will be at the Contractor expense with no expense to the owner.
1.5 CODES AND STANDARDS:
A. All work shall be performed in strict accordance with the applicable provisions of the
Uniform Plumbing Code and Gas Ordinance of the State of New Mexico, the Uniform
Mechanical Code, the International Building Code, the Life Safety Code, the
Albuquerque Energy Conservation Code, the New Mexico Administrative Code and
any other applicable codes and ordinances.
B. Where the Contract Documents indicate materials or construction in excess of Code
requirements, the Contract Documents shall govern.
C. The Owner and the Architect shall be held free and harmless from liability of any kind
or nature arising from his failure to comply with codes and ordinances.
D. The Contractor shall include in his bid to apply for and pay for all permits and
certificates of inspection including connections, meter setup fees or
extension/expansion of all utility lines.
E. Appropriate standards, such as ASA or ASTM or other established standards, shall
become part of the Contract Documents to the extent they are referred to herein.
1.6 ELECTRICAL SERVICES:
A. Motor starters, control equipment and wirings indicated on the electrical drawings,
except items otherwise specifically noted, will be furnished and installed by the
Contractor.
B. All equipment and controls shall be coordinated with Division 26, Electrical, to insure
that all required components are furnished and properly installed. No additional
expense will be allowed due to lack of coordination.
C. The Contractor must refer to the electrical control equipment and wiring shown on the
Electrical Drawings. Any changes or additions required by specified equipment
14-400-029-03 / 14-400-029-03 NMSU DHW & HHW CD'S
23 0010 - 3
furnished shall be the complete responsibility of the Contractor furnishing the
equipment.
D. All electrical equipment characteristics (voltage, etc.) must be verified by the Architect
prior to ordering.
E. All motors shall be built in accordance with the current applicable IEEE, ASA, and
NEMA standards. All general purpose motors shall be open drip-proof machines for
installation indoors and/or in protected locations. Totally enclosed fan cooled (TEFC)
motors shall be used in all areas of exposure to weather or other environmental
contamination. Motors shall be rated explosion proof when location is in hazardous
atmospheres. Type II weather protected motors may be used in lieu of TEFC motors on
cooling towers, roof fan units, and similar equipment. Motors mounted in direct sun
shall be provided with a shield to prevent direct radiation from the sun when the sun is
45 degrees or greater above the horizon. All motors shall have copper windings. All
motors to have minimum power factor of 85% or have switched correction to 90%.
Starters shall meet all requirements furnished by the Contractor.
F. Unless indicated otherwise, motors shall be NEMA Design B with a service factor of
1.15 with 40 degrees centigrade rise and total temperature rise of 65 degrees centigrade
ambient and when powered from the system voltage feeding the motor. TEFC motors
shall have a service factor of 1.00 with total temperature rise of 65 degrees centigrade in
the above conditions. Motors located in areas exceeding 40 degrees centigrade ambient
shall be factory-rated for the ambient temperature of the motor environment. Single
phase motors shall generally be NEMA Type N split phase induction motors with
built-in thermal protectors. Single phase motors connected on loads requiring high
starting torque shall be capacitor-start induction motors. Single phase motors of 1/10
HP or less may be shaded pole induction motors.
G. If the contractor proposes to furnish motors varying in horsepower and/or
characteristics from those specified, he shall first inform the Architect of the change and
shall then coordinate the change with the Contractor and shall pay all additional charges
in connection with the change.
1.7 ALTITUDE RATINGS:
A. Unless otherwise noted, all specified equipment capacities, air quantities, etc., are for
site elevation above sea level, and adjustments to the manufacturer's ratings must be
made accordingly to achieve the design capacities.
1.8 FLUSHING AND DRAINING:
A. Properly drain and flush all ducts and pipes before use of acceptance to insure that all
debris is completely removed. Damage caused by such debris remaining in the ducts or
pipes shall be repaired by the contractor at his expense. This contractor shall
demonstrate to the archi-tect's representative that all piping is clean.
1.9 CLEANING:
A. Remove from the building construction site all rubbish and dirt as it accumulates. At
completion, all areas shall be broom cleaned and all obstructions, surplus materials,
14-400-029-03 / 14-400-029-03 NMSU DHW & HHW CD'S
23 0010 - 4
etc., removed. All disposable filters in air handling units shall be replaced and all
permanent filters shall be cleaned.
1.10 UTILITIES:
A. The location, size, and elevation of existing sewer lines and the location, size and
pressure of existing water and gas lines are shown in accordance with data given this
office by others. As engineers, we cannot and do not guarantee the accuracy of this
data. Each bidder shall check and verify this data. The points of connection to utility
lines are approximate only and shall be verified by each bidder prior to submitting his
bid.
1.11 SITE VISIT:
A. Visit the site prior to bidding and verify the conditions under which the mechanical
systems are to be installed. No subsequent allowance shall be made in his behalf for
failure to make such a visit.
PART 2 MATERIALS
2.1 QUALITY:
A. The materials and equipment shall be new and shall be the standard products of the
manufacturers regularly engaged in the production of Plumbing, Heating, Cooling,
Ventilating and Fire Protection Equipment, and shall be the manufacturer's latest
standard design. Where two or more units of the same class of equipment are required,
these units shall be the products of the same manufacturer. However, the component
parts of the systems need not be the products of the same manufacturer. Specific
equipment specified hereinafter is to be considered a standard of quality and operation.
Should this Contractor desire and install equipment and materials other than that
specifically mentioned, he shall submit complete information and engineering data on
same to the Architect. This Contractor shall obtain written approval before purchasing
proposed substitute equipment. In general, all capacities of equipment, and motor and
starter characteristics are shown in schedules on the drawings. Reference shall be made
to the schedules for each information. The capacities shown are minimum capacities.
Variations in the characteristics will be permitted only on written approval of the
Architect. All equipment shall be shipped to the job with not less than a prime coat of
paint or as specified hereinafter. Insofar as it is possible, all items of the same type (i.e.,
pumps, fans, etc.) shall be by the same manufacturer. Where installation instructions
are not included in these specifications or on the plans, the manufacturer's instructions
shall be followed. All equipment affected by altitude shall be rated to operate at the
altitude where it is to be installed.
2.2 PROTECTION OF MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT:
A. Materials and equipment shall be protected at all times.
14-400-029-03 / 14-400-029-03 NMSU DHW & HHW CD'S
23 0010 - 5
B. The Contractor shall make good all damage caused directly or indirectly by his
workmen.
C. Pipe and duct openings shall be closed with caps or plugs during installation. Prior to
startup, check to see that all temporary covers have been removed.
D. Equipment shall be tightly covered and protected against dirt, water and chemical or
mechanical injury.
E. At the completion of all work, the equipment shall be thoroughly cleaned and delivered
in a condition satisfactory to the Owner.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXCAVATING AND BACKFILLING:
A. All excavating and backfilling shall be done by this Contractor except as noted on
plans. Trenching shall be done as shown on the Drawings and according to the
Plumbing Code.
1. Curb cuts, asphalt, and concrete patching, etc., shall be part of this Contractor's
responsibility. No extra payment will be made for rock excavation. Trenches for
all underground piping shall be excavated to the required depths. The bottoms of
trenches shall be tamped hard and graded to secure maximum fall. Bell holes shall
be excavated to assure the pipe is resting for its entire length on solid ground.
Should rock be encountered, it shall be excavated to a depth of 6" below the
bottom of the pipe, and before laying the pipe, the space between the bottom of the
pipe, and the rock surface shall be filled with gravel, thoroughly. Pipe laid in
trenches dug in fill, shall be supported down to load bearing undisturbed soil.
After the pipes have been tested and inspected, the trenches shall be filled. No
roots, rocks or foreign materials of any description shall be used in backfilling the
trenches. All surplus materials shall be hauled from the project by the Contractor
at his expense.
B. Backfilling shall be done in 6" layers to 18" above piping, tamping each layer to protect
piping from damage.
C. Backfilling shall be completed to 95% compaction under building and within 5 feet of
the building line and 90% elsewhere.
3.2 STREET CUTS SHALL BE REPLACED IN KIND.
3.3 CUTTING AND REPAIRING:
A. Responsibility of the Contractor whose work is involved is to coordinate with others to
prevent unnecessary cutting and repairing. Lay out and locate equipment, openings, and
chases. Install sleeves, inserts, and supports. Arrange with those whose work is
involved to do cutting and replacing caused by negligence or error with costs
reimbursed by the Contractor at fault. Cutting and replacing of the existing work shall
be the responsibility of the Contractor whose work is being installed. Removal or
14-400-029-03 / 14-400-029-03 NMSU DHW & HHW CD'S
23 0010 - 6
terminating connections of existing work which is abandoned or replaced shall also be
done hereunder to provide correct and finished work.
3.4 LUBRICATION:
A. Provide all oil for the operation of all equipment until acceptance and provide a chart
listing the type of oil to be used for each piece of equipment.
B. Properly lubricate all bearings and shafts during the installation. This contractor shall be
held responsible for all damage to bearings while the equipment is being operated by
him up to the date of acceptance of the equipment.
C. All motors and other equipment shall be provided with covers as required for protection
3.5 OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS:
A. Operations and Maintenance Manuals shall be submitted as required by Division One
and these Specifications.
B. All Operating Manuals shall be given to the Architect.
3.6 GUARANTEE:
A. All equipment, materials and workmanship to be furnished and performed under this
Contract shall be guaranteed for a period of one (1) year, commencing from the written
notice of substantial completion approved by the Architect.
B. All equipment and material warranties shall be honored in accordance with the
manufacturer's guarantee and warranties required and set forth in the construction
documents.
C. The Contractor shall, upon notification by the Owner, during that period correct any
such defects without cost to the Owner.
3.7 HVAC TEST AND BALANCE:
A. All air and/or water systems, as appropriate, shall be tested and balanced to achieve
flow at all outlets and inlets within 10% of the value shown on the drawings.
B. Any deviations from such shall be brought to the attention of the Engineer previous to
report submittal.
C. Pulleys, motors, dampers, control devices, etc. shall be adjusted, if necessary, to provide
proper flow.
D. Grilles, registers and diffusers shall be adjusted for proper throw, drop, and spread to
maintain draftless, comfortable conditions.
E. All equipment shall be tested and proved free from defects and in good operating
condition.
F. System shall be tested for every mode of operation, summer through winter cycles.
G. All tools, measuring devices and specialty equipment necessary shall be provided by
Contractor.
14-400-029-03 / 14-400-029-03 NMSU DHW & HHW CD'S
23 0010 - 7
H. Two (2) weeks prior to the final inspection, Contractor shall submit to Architect four
typewritten or hand lettered, bound copies of system performance report. Report shall
include: building name; date performed; instruments used in testing; duct and/or pipe
layouts, as appropriate, with all test points identified; air quantities and temperatures
shown; rated and actual motor amperages; and a discussion of any deficiencies or
deviations from the system specified, along with recommendations for correction.
I.
Contractor shall certify all information contained in this report as complete and correct
as of the date of job completion.
3.8 FOUNDATION:
A. All equipment shall be provided with suitable foundations and supports. It shall be the
responsibility of this Contractor to provide for the proper locations of these foundations
and supports. This applies to all rooftop equipment also. All concrete foundations
required by equipment furnished by the Contractor shall be constructed by them (except
where otherwise noted) in conformance with the recommendations of the manufacturer
of the respective equipment, and with the approval of the Architect. All corners of the
foundations shall be neatly chamfered. Foundation bolts shall be placed in the forms
when the concrete is poured. Allow 1" below the equipment base for alignment,
leveling and grouting with nonshrinking grout. Grouting shall be done after the
equipment is leveled in place. After the grout has hardened, the foundation bolts shall
be pulled up tight and the equipment shimmed, if necessary. After removal of the
forms, the surface of the foundation shall be rubbed. Unless otherwise noted,
foundations shall be a minimum of 6" high. All concrete work performed by these
contractors shall conform entirely to the requirements of the Concrete Specifications
which describe this class of work.
3.9 FLASHING:
A. The Contractor shall be responsible for providing and installing all counterflashing. All
openings in the roof shall be flashed and counterflashed. Use 4-pound per square foot
lead flashing materials for all vent lines and welded flashing in steel lines passing
through roof.
3.10 ACCESS PANELS:
A. Similar to Milcor, size as required for concealed expansion joints, valves, traps,
balancing dampers, equipment, and similar items requiring accessibility. Notify the
General Contractor of each access panel location and the required size. Panels shall be
proper type for ceiling or wall in which they are installed. The panels shall be furnished
under this section of the Specifications, but shall be coordinated to be compatible with
walls and ceilings furnished under other sections.
END OF SECTION
14-400-029-03 / 14-400-029-03 NMSU DHW & HHW CD'S
23 0010 - 8
SECTION 23 0516
EXPANSION FITTINGS AND LOOPS FOR HVAC PIPING
PART 1 GENERAL
A. Flexible pipe connectors.
B. Expansion joints and compensators.
C. Pipe loops and offsets.
A. Section 23 2300 - Refrigerant Piping.
A. ASTM A269 - Standard Specification for Seamless and Welded Austenitic Stainless
Steel Tubing for General Service; 2010.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
B. Product Data:
1. Flexible Pipe Connectors: Indicate maximum temperature and pressure rating,
face-to-face length, live length, hose wall thickness, hose convolutions per foot
(meter) and per assembly, fundamental frequency of assembly, braid structure, and
total number of wires in braid.
2. Expansion Joints: Indicate maximum temperature and pressure rating, and
maximum expansion compensation.
A. Conform to UL requirements.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 FLEXIBLE PIPE CONNECTORS - COPPER PIPING
A. Inner Hose: Bronze.
B. Exterior Sleeve: Braided bronze.
C. Pressure Rating: 200 psi and 250 degrees F (1380 kPa and 121 degrees C).
D. Joint: Threaded with Union.
E. Size: Use pipe sized units.
F. Maximum offset: 3/4 inch (20 mm) on each side of installed center line.
14-400-029-03 / 14-400-029-03 NMSU DHW & HHW CD'S
23 0516 - 1
G. Application: Copper piping.
2.2 EXPANSION JOINTS - STAINLESS STEEL BELLOWS TYPE
A. Pressure Rating: 125 psi and 400 degrees F (862 kPa and 204 degrees C).
B. Maximum Compression: 1-3/4 inches (45 mm).
C. Maximum Extension: 1/4 inch (6 mm).
D. Joint: As specified for pipe joints.
E. Size: Use pipe sized units.
F. Application: Steel piping 3 inches (75 mm) and under.
2.3 EXPANSION JOINTS - TWO-PLY BRONZE BELLOWS TYPE
A. Construction: Bronze with anti-torque device, limit stops, internal guides.
B. Pressure Rating: 125 psi and 400 degrees F (862 kPa and 204 degrees C).
C. Maximum Compression: 1-3/4 inches (45 mm).
D. Maximum Extension: 1/4 inch (6 mm).
E. Joint: Soldered.
F. Size: Use pipe sized units.
G. Application: Copper piping.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
B. Install flexible pipe connectors on pipes connected to vibration isolated equipment.
Provide line size flexible connectors.
C. Anchor pipe to building structure where indicated. Provide pipe guides so movement is
directed along axis of pipe only. Erect piping such that strain and weight is not on cast
connections or apparatus.
D. Provide support and equipment required to control expansion and contraction of piping.
Provide loops, pipe offsets, and swing joints, or expansion joints where required.
END OF SECTION
14-400-029-03 / 14-400-029-03 NMSU DHW & HHW CD'S
23 0516 - 2
SECTION 23 0519
METERS AND GAGES FOR HVAC PIPING
PART 1 GENERAL
A. Flow meters.
B. Pressure gages and pressure gage taps.
C. Thermometers and thermometer wells.
A. Section 23 2113 - Hydronic Piping.
A. ASME B40.100 - Pressure Gauges and Gauge Attachments; The American Society of
Mechanical Engineers; 2005.
B. ASTM E1 - Standard Specification for ASTM Thermometers; 2007.
C. ASTM E77 - Standard Test Method for Inspection and Verification of Thermometers;
2007.
D. UL 393 - Indicating Pressure Gauges for Fire-Protection Service; Underwriters
E. UL 404 - Gages, Indicating Pressure, for Compressed Gas Service; Underwriters
1.4 SUBMITTALS
B. Product Data: Provide list that indicates use, operating range, total range and location
for manufactured components.
A. Do not install instrumentation when areas are under construction, except for required
rough-in, taps, supports and test plugs.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 PRESSURE GAGES
A. Pressure Gages: ASME B40.100, UL 393 drawn steel case, phosphor bronze bourdon
tube, rotary brass movement, brass socket, with front recalibration adjustment, black
scale on white background.
1. Case: Steel with brass bourdon tube.
14-400-029-03 / 14-400-029-03 NMSU DHW & HHW CD'S
23 0519 - 1
2.
3.
4.
Size: 4-1/2 inch (115 mm) diameter.
Mid-Scale Accuracy: One percent.
Scale: Psi.
2.2 PRESSURE GAGE TAPPINGS
A. Gage Cock: Tee or lever handle, brass for maximum 150 psi (1034 kPa).
2.3 STEM TYPE THERMOMETERS
A. Thermometers - Adjustable Angle: Red- or blue-appearing non-toxic liquid in glass;
ASTM E1; lens front tube, cast aluminum case with enamel finish, cast aluminum
adjustable joint with positive locking device; adjustable 360 degrees in horizontal
plane, 180 degrees in vertical plane.
2. Window: Clear glass.
3. Stem: 3/4 inch (20 mm) NPT brass.
2.4 THERMOMETER SUPPORTS
A. Socket: Brass separable sockets for thermometer stems with or without extensions as
required, and with cap and chain.
B. Flange: 3 inch (75 mm) outside diameter reversible flange, designed to fasten to sheet
metal air ducts, with brass perforated stem.
2.5 TEST PLUGS
A. Test Plug: 1/4 inch (6 mm) or 1/2 inch (13 mm) brass fitting and cap for receiving 1/8
inch (3 mm) outside diameter pressure or temperature probe with neoprene core for
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
B. Provide one pressure gage per pump, installing taps before strainers and on suction and
discharge of pump. Pipe to gage.
C. Install thermometers in piping systems in sockets in short couplings. Enlarge pipes
smaller than 2-1/2 inch (60 mm) for installation of thermometer sockets. Ensure
sockets allow clearance from insulation.
D. Provide instruments with scale ranges selected according to service with largest
appropriate scale.
E. Install gages and thermometers in locations where they are easily read from normal
operating level. Install vertical to 45 degrees off vertical.
14-400-029-03 / 14-400-029-03 NMSU DHW & HHW CD'S
23 0519 - 2
F. Adjust gages and thermometers to final angle, clean windows and lenses, and calibrate
to zero.
G. Locate test plugs adjacent thermometers and thermometer sockets.
END OF SECTION
14-400-029-03 / 14-400-029-03 NMSU DHW & HHW CD'S
23 0519 - 3
SECTION 23 0548
VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
PART 1 GENERAL
A. Equipment support bases.
B. Vibration isolators.
C. Vibration isolators.
D. Seismic restraints.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
B. Product Data: Provide schedule of vibration isolator type with location and load on
each.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
A. General:
1. All vibration isolators, base frames and inertia bases to conform to all uniform
deflection and stability requirements under all operating loads.
2. Steel springs to function without undue stress or overloading.
2.2 EQUIPMENT SUPPORT BASES
2.3 VIBRATION ISOLATORS
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION - GENERAL
B. Prior to making piping connections to equipment with operating weights substantially
different from installed weights, block up equipment with temporary shims to final
height. When full load is applied, adjust isolators to load to allow shim removal.
14-400-029-03 / 14-400-029-03 NMSU DHW & HHW CD'S
23 0548 - 1
C. Provide seismic snubbers for all equipment, piping, and ductwork mounted on isolators.
Each inertia base shall have minimum of four seismic snubbers located close to
isolators. Snub equipment designated for post-disaster use to 0.05 inch (1.5 mm)
maximum clearance. Other snubbers shall have clearance between 0.15 inch (4 mm)
and 0.25 inch (7 mm).
END OF SECTION
14-400-029-03 / 14-400-029-03 NMSU DHW & HHW CD'S
23 0548 - 2
SECTION 23 0553
IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
PART 1 GENERAL
A. Nameplates.
B. Tags.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
B. List: Submit list of wording, symbols, letter size, and color coding for mechanical
identification.
C. Product Data: Provide manufacturers catalog literature for each product required.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 IDENTIFICATION APPLICATIONS
A. Automatic Controls: Tags. Key to control schematic.
B. Control Panels: Nameplates.
C. Instrumentation: Tags.
D. Major Control Components: Nameplates.
E. Piping: Tags.
F. Pumps: Nameplates.
G. Tanks: Nameplates.
H. Thermostats: Nameplates.
I.
Valves: Tags and ceiling tacks where located above lay-in ceiling.
2.2 NAMEPLATES
A. Description: Laminated three-layer plastic with engraved letters.
1. Letter Color: White.
2. Letter Height: 1/4 inch (6 mm).
3. Background Color: Black.
2.3 TAGS
A. Plastic Tags: Laminated three-layer plastic with engraved black letters on light
contrasting background color. Tag size minimum 1-1/2 inch (40 mm) diameter.
14-400-029-03 / 14-400-029-03 NMSU DHW & HHW CD'S
23 0553 - 1
2.4 CEILING TACKS
A. Description: Steel with 3/4 inch (20 mm) diameter color coded head.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Degrease and clean surfaces to receive adhesive for identification materials.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install nameplates with corrosive-resistant mechanical fasteners, or adhesive. Apply
with sufficient adhesive to ensure permanent adhesion and seal with clear lacquer.
B. Install tags with corrosion resistant chain.
C. Install plastic pipe markers in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
D. Install plastic tape pipe markers complete around pipe in accordance with
E. Identify air handling units, pumps, heat transfer equipment, tanks, and water treatment
devices with plastic nameplates. Small devices, such as in-line pumps, may be
identified with tags.
F. Identify control panels and major control components outside panels with plastic
nameplates.
G. Identify thermostats relating to terminal boxes or valves with nameplates.
H. Identify valves in main and branch piping with tags.
I.
Identify air terminal units and radiator valves with numbered tags.
J.
Tag automatic controls, instruments, and relays. Key to control schematic.
K. Identify piping, concealed or exposed, with plastic tape pipe markers. Use tags on
piping 3/4 inch (20 mm) diameter and smaller. Identify service, flow direction, and
pressure. Install in clear view and align with axis of piping. Locate identification not to
exceed 20 feet (6 m) on straight runs including risers and drops, adjacent to each valve
and Tee, at each side of penetration of structure or enclosure, and at each obstruction.
L. Install ductwork with plastic nameplates. Identify with air handling unit identification
number and area served. Locate identification at air handling unit, at each side of
penetration of structure or enclosure, and at each obstruction.
M. On all equipment requiring routine operations, identify simple operation procedures
with plastic nameplates.
N. Locate ceiling tacks to locate valves or dampers above lay-in panel ceilings. Locate in
corner of panel closest to equipment.
END OF SECTION
14-400-029-03 / 14-400-029-03 NMSU DHW & HHW CD'S
23 0553 - 2
SECTION 23 0593
HVAC TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING
PART 1 GENERAL
A. Testing, adjustment, and balancing of air systems.
B. Testing, adjustment, and balancing of refrigerating systems.
C. Measurement of final operating condition of HVAC systems.
A. AABC MN-1 - AABC National Standards for Total System Balance; Associated Air
Balance Council; 2002.
B. ASHRAE Std 111 - Practices for Measurement, Testing, Adjusting and Balancing of
Building Heating, Ventilation, Air-Conditioning, and Refrigeration Systems; American
Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air-Conditioning Engineers, Inc.; 1988, with
1997 Errata.
C. NEBB (TAB) - Procedural Standards for Testing Adjusting Balancing of
Environmental Systems; National Environmental Balancing Bureau; 2005, Seventh
Edition.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
B. Qualifications: Submit name of adjusting and balancing agency and TAB supervisor
for approval within 30 days after award of Contract.
C. TAB Plan: Submit a written plan indicating the testing, adjusting, and balancing
standard to be followed and the specific approach for each system and component.
1. Submit to Architect.
2. Include at least the following in the plan:
a. Preface: An explanation of the intended use of the control system.
b. Copy of field checkout sheets and logs to be used, listing each piece of
equipment to be tested, adjusted and balanced with the data cells to be
gathered for each.
c. Identification and types of measurement instruments to be used and their most
recent calibration date.
d. Discussion of what notations and markings will be made on the duct and
piping drawings during the process.
e. Final test report forms to be used.
f. Detailed step-by-step procedures for TAB work for each system and issue,
including:
1) Branch/submain proportioning.
14-400-029-03 / 14-400-029-03 NMSU DHW & HHW CD'S
23 0593 - 1
g.
2) Total flow calculations.
3) Rechecking.
4) Diversity issues.
Procedures for formal deficiency reports, including scope, frequency and
distribution.
D. Control System Coordination Reports: Communicate in writing to the controls installer
all setpoint and parameter changes made or problems and discrepancies identified
during TAB that affect, or could affect, the control system setup and operation.
E. Progress Reports.
F. Final Report: Indicate deficiencies in systems that would prevent proper testing,
adjusting, and balancing of systems and equipment to achieve specified performance.
1. Submit to the Commissioning Authority within two weeks after completion of
testing, adjusting, and balancing.
2. Revise TAB plan to reflect actual procedures and submit as part of final report.
3. Submit draft copies of report for review prior to final acceptance of Project.
Provide final copies for Architect and for inclusion in operating and maintenance
manuals.
4. Include actual instrument list, with manufacturer name, serial number, and date of
calibration.
5. Form of Test Reports: Where the TAB standard being followed recommends a
report format use that; otherwise, follow ASHRAE Std 111.
6. Units of Measure: Report data in both I-P (inch-pound) and SI (metric) units.
7. Test Reports: Indicate data on AABC MN-1 forms, forms prepared following
ASHRAE Std 111, TABB, or NEBB forms.
8. Include the following on the title page of each report:
a. Name of Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing Agency.
b. Address of Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing Agency.
c. Telephone number of Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing Agency.
d. Project name.
e. Project location.
f. Project Architect.
g. Project Engineer.
h. Project Contractor.
i. Project altitude.
j. Report date.
A. Perform total system balance in accordance with AABC MN-1, ASHRAE Std 111,
TABB or NEBB Procedural Standards for Testing, Balancing and Adjusting of
Environmental Systems.
B. TAB Agency Qualifications: Company specializing in the testing, adjusting, and
balancing of systems specified in this Section with minimum three years documented
experience certifed by the TABB.
14-400-029-03 / 14-400-029-03 NMSU DHW & HHW CD'S
23 0593 - 2
C. Perform Work under supervision of TABB Certified Test and Balance Engineer
experienced in performance of this Work and licensed at the Rio Rancho, New Mexico.
1.5 PRE-BALANCING MEETING
A. Convene a meeting one week prior to commencing work of this Section.
1.6 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING
A. Sequence work to commence after completion of systems and schedule completion of
work before Substantial Completion of Project.
PART 2 EXECUTION
2.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Perform total system balance in accordance with one of the following:
1. AABC MN-1, AABC National Standards for Total System Balance.
2. NEBB Procedural Standards for Testing Adjusting Balancing of Environmental
Systems.
3. SMACNA HVAC Systems Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing.
4. Maintain at least one copy of the standard to be used at project site at all times.
B. Begin work after completion of systems to be tested, adjusted, or balanced and
complete work prior to Substantial Completion of the project.
C. Where HVAC systems and/or components interface with life safety systems, including
fire and smoke detection, alarm, and control, coordinate scheduling and testing and
inspection procedures with the authorities having jurisdiction.
D. TAB Agency Qualifications:
1. Company specializing in the testing, adjusting, and balancing of systems specified
in this section.
2. Having minimum of three years documented experience.
3. Certified by one of the following:
a. AABC, Associated Air Balance Council: www.aabchq.com; upon completion
submit AABC National Performance Guaranty.
b. NEBB, National Environmental Balancing Bureau: www.nebb.org.
c. TABB, The Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing Bureau of National Energy
Management Institute: www.tabbcertified.org.
E. TAB Supervisor and Technician Qualifications: Certified by same organization as
TAB agency.
2.2 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that systems are complete and operable before commencing work. Ensure the
following conditions:
1. Systems are started and operating in a safe and normal condition.
2. Temperature control systems are installed complete and operable.
14-400-029-03 / 14-400-029-03 NMSU DHW & HHW CD'S
23 0593 - 3
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
Proper thermal overload protection is in place for electrical equipment.
Fans are rotating correctly.
Fire and volume dampers are in place and open.
Access doors are closed and duct end caps are in place.
Air outlets are installed and connected.
Duct system leakage is minimized.
Hydronic systems are flushed, filled, and vented.
Pumps are rotating correctly.
Proper strainer baskets are clean and in place.
Service and balance valves are open.
B. Submit field reports. Report defects and deficiencies that will or could prevent proper
system balance.
C. Beginning of work means acceptance of existing conditions.
2.3 PREPARATION
A. Provide instruments required for testing, adjusting, and balancing operations. Make
instruments available to Architect to facilitate spot checks during testing.
B. Provide additional balancing devices as required.
2.4 ADJUSTMENT TOLERANCES
A. Air Handling Systems: Adjust to within plus or minus 5 percent of design for supply
systems and plus or minus 10 percent of design for return and exhaust systems.
B. Air Outlets and Inlets: Adjust total to within plus 10 percent and minus 5 percent of
design to space. Adjust outlets and inlets in space to within plus or minus 10 percent of
design.
C. Hydronic Systems: Adjust to within plus or minus 10 percent of design.
2.5 RECORDING AND ADJUSTING
A. Ensure recorded data represents actual measured or observed conditions.
B. Permanently mark settings of valves, dampers, and other adjustment devices allowing
settings to be restored. Set and lock memory stops.
C. After adjustment, take measurements to verify balance has not been disrupted or that
such disruption has been rectified.
D. Leave systems in proper working order, replacing belt guards, closing access doors,
closing doors to electrical switch boxes, and restoring thermostats to specified settings.
2.6 AIR SYSTEM PROCEDURE
A. Adjust air handling and distribution systems to provide required or design supply,
return, and exhaust air quantities at site altitude.
B. Measure air quantities at air inlets and outlets.
C. Adjust distribution system to obtain uniform space temperatures free from
objectionable drafts and noise.
14-400-029-03 / 14-400-029-03 NMSU DHW & HHW CD'S
23 0593 - 4
D. Use volume control devices to regulate air quantities only to extend that adjustments do
not create objectionable air motion or sound levels. Effect volume control by duct
internal devices such as dampers and splitters.
E. Vary total system air quantities by adjustment of fan speeds. Provide drive changes
required. Vary branch air quantities by damper regulation.
F. Measure static air pressure conditions on air supply units, including filter and coil
pressure drops, and total pressure across the fan. Make allowances for 50 percent
loading of filters.
G. Adjust outside air automatic dampers, outside air, return air, and exhaust dampers for
design conditions.
H. Measure temperature conditions across outside air, return air, and exhaust dampers to
check leakage.
2.7 WATER SYSTEM PROCEDURE
A. Adjust water systems to provide required or design quantities.
B. Use calibrated Venturi tubes, orifices, or other metered fittings and pressure gauges to
determine flow rates for system balance. Where flow metering devices are not
installed, base flow balance on temperature difference across various heat transfer
elements in the system.
C. Adjust systems to provide specified pressure drops and flows through heat transfer
elements prior to thermal testing. Perform balancing by measurement of temperature
differential in conjunction with air balancing.
D. Effect system balance with automatic control valves fully open to heat transfer
elements.
E. Effect adjustment of water distribution systems by means of balancing cocks, valves,
and fittings. Do not use service or shut-off valves for balancing unless indexed for
balance point.
F. Where available pump capacity is less than total flow requirements or individual system
parts, full flow in one part may be simulated by temporary restriction of flow to other
parts.
2.8 SCOPE
A. Test, adjust, and balance the following:
1. Boiler Pumps
2. Boilers
3. Unit Heaters
2.9 MINIMUM DATA TO BE REPORTED
A. Electric Motors:
1. Manufacturer
2. Model/Frame
3. HP/BHP
14-400-029-03 / 14-400-029-03 NMSU DHW & HHW CD'S
23 0593 - 5
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
Phase, voltage, amperage; nameplate, actual, no load
RPM
Service factor
Starter size, rating, heater elements
Sheave Make/Size/Bore
B. V-Belt Drives:
1. Identification/location
2. Required driven RPM
3. Driven sheave, diameter and RPM
C. Pumps:
1. Identification/number
2. Manufacturer
3. Size/model
4. Impeller
5. Design flow rate, pressure drop, BHP
6. Actual flow rate, pressure drop, BHP
7. Discharge pressure
8. Suction pressure
9. Total operating head pressure
10. Shut off, discharge and suction pressures
11. Shut off, total head pressure
D. Combustion Equipment:
1. Boiler manufacturer
2. Model number
3. Serial number
4. Firing rate
5. Overfire draft
6. Gas meter timing dial size
7. Gas meter time per revolution
8. Gas pressure at meter outlet
9. Gas flow rate
10. Heat input
11. Ambient temperature
12. Heat output
E. Heating Coils:
1. Identification/number
2. Location
3. Service
4. Manufacturer
5. Air flow, design and actual
F. Exhaust Fans:
1. Location
14-400-029-03 / 14-400-029-03 NMSU DHW & HHW CD'S
23 0593 - 6
2.
3.
4.
5.
Manufacturer
Model number
Air flow, specified and actual
Total static pressure (total external), specified and actual
END OF SECTION
14-400-029-03 / 14-400-029-03 NMSU DHW & HHW CD'S
23 0593 - 7
SECTION 23 0713
DUCT INSULATION
PART 1 GENERAL
A. Duct insulation.
B. Insulation jackets.
A. Section 22 0553 - Identification for Plumbing Piping and Equipment.
B. Section 23 0553 - Identification for HVAC Piping and Equipment.
C. Section 23 3100 - HVAC Ducts and Casings: Glass fiber ducts.
Plate; 2010.
C. ASTM C518 - Standard Test Method for Steady-State Thermal Transmission Properties
D. ASTM C553 - Specification for Mineral Fiber Blanket Thermal Insulation for
Commercial and Industrial Applications; 2011.
E. ASTM C612 - Standard Specification for Mineral Fiber Block and Board Thermal
Insulation; 2010.
F. ASTM E84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building
Materials; 2012.
G. NFPA 255 - Standard Method of Test of Surface Burning Characteristics of Building
H. SMACNA (DCS) - HVAC Duct Construction Standards; Sheet Metal and Air
Conditioning Contractors' National Association; 2005.
I.
UL 723 - Standard for Test for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials;
1.4 SUBMITTALS
14-400-029-03 / 14-400-029-03 NMSU DHW & HHW CD'S
DUCT INSULATION
23 0713 - 1
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.2 GLASS FIBER, FLEXIBLE
A. Insulation: ASTM C553; flexible, noncombustible blanket.
2. Maximum Water Vapor Sorption: 5.0 percent by weight.
B. Vapor Barrier Jacket:
1. Kraft paper with glass fiber yarn and bonded to aluminized film.
2. Secure with pressure sensitive tape.
C. Vapor Barrier Tape:
1. Kraft paper reinforced with glass fiber yarn and bonded to aluminized film, with
pressure sensitive rubber based adhesive.
2.3 GLASS FIBER, RIGID
A. Insulation: ASTM C612; rigid, noncombustible blanket.
3. Maximum Water Vapor Sorption: 5.0 percent.
B. Vapor Barrier Jacket:
1. Kraft paper with glass fiber yarn and bonded to aluminized film.
2. Secure with pressure sensitive tape.
C. Vapor Barrier Tape:
1. Kraft paper reinforced with glass fiber yarn and bonded to aluminized film, with
pressure sensitive rubber based adhesive.
2.4 JACKETS
A. Aluminum Jacket: ASTM B209 (ASTM B209M).
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that ducts have been tested before applying insulation materials.
B. Verify that surfaces are clean, foreign material removed, and dry.
14-400-029-03 / 14-400-029-03 NMSU DHW & HHW CD'S
DUCT INSULATION
23 0713 - 2
3.2 INSTALLATION
C. Insulated ducts conveying air below ambient temperature:
1. Provide insulation with vapor barrier jackets.
2. Finish with tape and vapor barrier jacket.
3. Continue insulation through walls, sleeves, hangers, and other duct penetrations.
D. Insulated ducts conveying air above ambient temperature:
1. Provide with or without standard vapor barrier jacket.
2. Insulate fittings and joints. Where service access is required, bevel and seal ends
of insulation.
E. Exterior Applications: Provide insulation with vapor barrier jacket. Cover with with
calked aluminum jacket with seams located on bottom side of horizontal duct section.
F. External Duct Insulation Application:
1. Install without sag on underside of duct. Use adhesive or mechanical fasteners
where necessary to prevent sagging. Lift duct off trapeze hangers and insert
spacers.
G. Duct and Plenum Liner Application:
1. Adhere insulation with adhesive for 90 percent coverage.
2. Secure insulation with mechanical liner fasteners. Refer to SMACNA HVAC
Duct Construction Standards for spacing.
3. Seal and smooth joints. Seal and coat transverse joints.
4. Duct dimensions indicated are net inside dimensions required for air flow.
Increase duct size to allow for insulation thickness.
END OF SECTION
14-400-029-03 / 14-400-029-03 NMSU DHW & HHW CD'S
DUCT INSULATION
23 0713 - 3
SECTION 23 0719
HVAC PIPING INSULATION
PART 1 GENERAL
A. Piping insulation.
B. Jackets and accessories.
A. Section 23 2300 - Refrigerant Piping: Placement of inserts.
Plate; 2010.
C. ASTM C177 - Standard Test Method for Steady-State Heat Flux Measurements and
Thermal Transmission Properties by Means of the Guarded Hot Plate Apparatus; 2010.
D. ASTM C547 - Standard Specification for Mineral Fiber Pipe Insulation; 2012.
E. ASTM C578 - Standard Specification for Rigid, Cellular Polystyrene Thermal
Insulation; 2012.
F. ASTM C795 - Standard Specification for Thermal Insulation for Use in Contact with
Austenitic Stainless Steel; 2008.
G. ASTM D1056 - Standard Specification for Flexible Cellular Materials--Sponge or
Expanded Rubber; 2007.
H. ASTM E84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building
Materials; 2012.
I.
ASTM E96/E96M - Standard Test Methods for Water Vapor Transmission of
Materials; 2012.
J.
NFPA 255 - Standard Method of Test of Surface Burning Characteristics of Building
K. UL 723 - Standard for Test for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials;
1.4 SUBMITTALS
14-400-029-03 / 14-400-029-03 NMSU DHW & HHW CD'S
23 0719 - 1
A. Accept materials on site, labeled with manufacturer's identification, product density,
and thickness.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.2 GLASS FIBER
A. Insulation: ASTM C547 and ASTM C795; rigid molded, noncombustible.
1. 'K' ('Ksi') value: ASTM C177, 0.24 at 75 degrees F (0.035 at 24 degrees C).
3. Maximum moisture absorption: 0.2 percent by volume.
B. Vapor Barrier Jacket: White kraft paper with glass fiber yarn, bonded to aluminized
film; moisture vapor transmission when tested in accordance with ASTM E96/E96M of
0.02 perm-inches (0.029 ng/Pa s m).
C. Tie Wire: 0.048 inch (1.22 mm) stainless steel with twisted ends on maximum 12 inch
(300 mm) centers.
2.3 EXPANDED POLYSTYRENE
A. Insulation: ASTM C578; rigid closed cell.
3. Maximum water vapor permeance: 5.0 perms (287 ng/Pa s sq m)
2.4 POLYETHYLENE
A. Insulation: Flexible closed-cell polyethylene tubing, slit lengthwise for installation,
complying with applicable requirements of ASTM D1056.
1. 'K' ('Ksi') value: ASTM C177; 0.25 at 75 degrees F (0.036 at 24 degrees C).
4. Maximum Moisture Absorption: 1.0 percent by volume.
5. Moisture Vapor Permeability: 0.05 perm inch (0.073 ng/Pa s m), when tested in
accordance with ASTM E96/E96M.
6. Connection: Contact adhesive.
2.5 JACKETS
A. PVC Plastic.
1. Jacket: One piece molded type fitting covers and sheet material, off-white color.
14-400-029-03 / 14-400-029-03 NMSU DHW & HHW CD'S
23 0719 - 2
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
Minimum Service Temperature: 0 degrees F (-18 degrees C).
Maximum Service Temperature: 150 degrees F (66 degrees C).
Moisture Vapor Permeability: 0.002 perm inch (0.0029 ng/Pa s m),
maximum, when tested in accordance with ASTM E96/E96M.
Thickness: 10 mil (0.25 mm).
Connections: Brush on welding adhesive.
B. Canvas Jacket: UL listed 6 oz/sq yd (220 g/sq m) plain weave cotton fabric treated with
dilute fire retardant lagging adhesive.
C. Aluminum Jacket: ASTM B209 (ASTM B209M) formed aluminum sheet.
1. Thickness: 0.016 inch (0.40 mm) sheet.
2. Finish: Smooth.
3. Joining: Longitudinal slip joints and 2 inch (50 mm) laps.
4. Fittings: 0.016 inch (0.4 mm) thick die shaped fitting covers with factory attached
protective liner.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that piping has been tested before applying insulation materials.
3.2 INSTALLATION
C. Exposed Piping: Locate insulation and cover seams in least visible locations.
D. Insulated pipes conveying fluids below ambient temperature: Insulate entire system
including fittings, valves, unions, flanges, strainers, flexible connections, pump bodies,
and expansion joints.
E. Glass fiber insulated pipes conveying fluids below ambient temperature:
1. Provide vapor barrier jackets, factory-applied or field-applied. Secure with
self-sealing longitudinal laps and butt strips with pressure sensitive adhesive.
Secure with outward clinch expanding staples and vapor barrier mastic.
2. Insulate fittings, joints, and valves with molded insulation of like material and
thickness as adjacent pipe. Finish with glass cloth and vapor barrier adhesive or
PVC fitting covers.
F. For hot piping conveying fluids 140 degrees F (60 degrees C) or less, do not insulate
flanges and unions at equipment, but bevel and seal ends of insulation.
G. For hot piping conveying fluids over 140 degrees F (60 degrees C), insulate flanges and
unions at equipment.
H. Glass fiber insulated pipes conveying fluids above ambient temperature:
14-400-029-03 / 14-400-029-03 NMSU DHW & HHW CD'S
23 0719 - 3
1.
2.
Provide standard jackets, with or without vapor barrier, factory-applied or
field-applied. Secure with self-sealing longitudinal laps and butt strips with
pressure sensitive adhesive. Secure with outward clinch expanding staples.
Insulate fittings, joints, and valves with insulation of like material and thickness as
adjoining pipe. Finish with glass cloth and adhesive or PVC fitting covers.
I.
Inserts and Shields:
1. Application: Piping 1-1/2 inches (40 mm) diameter or larger.
2. Shields: Galvanized steel between pipe hangers or pipe hanger rolls and inserts.
3. Insert location: Between support shield and piping and under the finish jacket.
J.
All Pipe Exposed in Mechanical Equipment Rooms or Finished Spaces []: Finish with
PVC jacket and fitting covers.
K. Exterior Applications: Provide vapor barrier jacket. Insulate fittings, joints, and valves
with insulation of like material and thickness as adjoining pipe, and finish with glass
mesh reinforced vapor barrier cement. Cover with aluminum jacket with seams located
on bottom side of horizontal piping. Provide two coats of UV resistant finish for
flexible elastomeric cellular insulation without jacketing.
END OF SECTION
14-400-029-03 / 14-400-029-03 NMSU DHW & HHW CD'S
23 0719 - 4
SECTION 23 0913
INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL DEVICES FOR HVAC
PART 1 GENERAL
A. Control valves.
B. Damper operators.
C. Miscellaneous accessories.
A. Section 22 0548 - Vibration and Seismic Controls for Plumbing Piping and Equipment.
B. Section 22 0519 - Meters and Gages for Plumbing Piping: Thermometer sockets, gage
taps.
C. Section 23 0548 - Vibration and Seismic Controls for HVAC Piping and Equipment.
D. Section 23 0519 - Meters and Gages for HVAC Piping: Thermometer sockets, gage
taps.
E. Section 23 2113 - Hydronic Piping: Installation of control valves, flow switches,
temperature sensor sockets, gage taps.
F. Section 23 3300 - Air Duct Accessories: Installation of automatic dampers.
A. AMCA 500-D - Laboratory Methods for Testing Dampers for Rating; Air Movement
and Control Association International, Inc.; 2012.
B. ASME B16.22 - Wrought Copper and Copper Alloy Solder Joint Pressure Fittings; The
American Society of Mechanical Engineers; 2012.
C. ASTM B88 - Standard Specification for Seamless Copper Water Tube; 2009.
D. NEMA 250 - Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 Volts Maximum); National
Electrical Manufacturers Association; 2008.
E. NFPA 90A - Standard for the Installation of Air-Conditioning and Ventilation Systems;
National Fire Protection Association; 2012.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
B. Product Data: Provide description and engineering data for each control system
component. Include sizing as requested. Provide data for each system component and
software module.
C. Shop Drawings: Indicate complete operating data, system drawings, wiring diagrams,
and written detailed operational description of sequences. Submit schedule of valves
14-400-029-03 / 14-400-029-03 NMSU DHW & HHW CD'S
23 0913 - 1
indicating size, flow, and pressure drop for each valve. For automatic dampers indicate
arrangement, velocities, and static pressure drops for each system.
A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the Products
1.6 WARRANTY
1.7 MAINTENANCE SERVICE
A. Provide service and maintenance of control system for one year from Date of
Substantial Completion.
B. Provide complete service of controls systems, including call backs. Make minimum of
2 complete normal inspections of approximately 4 hours duration in addition to normal
service calls to inspect, calibrate, and adjust controls, and submit written reports.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Honeywell: www.honeywell.com.
2.2 EQUIPMENT - GENERAL
A. Products Requiring Electrical Connection: Listed and classified by Underwriters
2.3 CONTROL PANELS
A. Unitized cabinet type for each system under automatic control with relays and controls
mounted in cabinet and temperature indicators, pressure gages, pilot lights, push
buttons and switches flush on cabinet panel face.
B. NEMA 250, general purpose utility enclosures with enamelled finished face panel.
C. Provide common keying for all panels.
2.4 CONTROL VALVES
A. Globe Pattern:
1. Up to 2 inches (50 mm): Bronze body, bronze trim, rising stem, renewable
composition disc, screwed ends with backseating capacity repackable under
pressure.
2. Over 2 inches (50 mm): Iron body, bronze trim, rising stem, plug-type disc,
flanged ends, renewable seat and disc.
3. Hydronic Systems:
14-400-029-03 / 14-400-029-03 NMSU DHW & HHW CD'S
23 0913 - 2
a.
b.
c.
d.
Rate for service pressure of 125 psig at 250 degrees F (860 kPa at 121 degrees
C).
Replaceable plugs and seats of stainless steel.
Size for 3 psig (20 kPa) maximum pressure drop at design flow rate.
Two way valves shall have equal percentage characteristics, three way valves
linear characteristics. Size two way valve operators to close valves against
pump shut off head.
B. Butterfly Pattern:
1. Iron body, bronze disc, resilient replaceable seat for service to 180 degrees F (82
degrees C) wafer or lug ends, extended neck.
2. Hydronic Systems:
a. Rate for service pressure of 125 psig at 250 degrees F (860 kPa at 121 degrees
C).
b. Size for 1 psig (7 kPa) maximum pressure drop at design flow rate.
C. Electronic Operators:
1. Valves shall spring return to normal position as indicated on freeze, fire, or
temperature protection. See plans for details.
2.5 DAMPERS
A. Performance: Test in accordance with AMCA 500-D.
B. Frames: Galvanized steel, welded or riveted with corner reinforcement, minimum 12
gage (2.7 mm).
C. Blades: Galvanized steel, maximum blade size 8 inches (200 mm) wide, 48 inches
(1200 mm) long, minimum 22 gage (0.85 mm), attached to minimum 1/2 inch (13 mm)
shafts with set screws.
D. Blade Seals: Synthetic elastomeric inflatable mechanically attached, field replaceable.
E. Jamb Seals: Spring stainless steel.
F. Shaft Bearings: Oil impregnated sintered bronze.
G. Linkage Bearings: Oil impregnated sintered bronze.
H. Leakage: Less than one percent based on approach velocity of 2000 ft/min (10 m/sec)
and 4 inches wg (1.0 kPa).
I.
Maximum Pressure Differential: 6 inches wg (1.5 kPa).
J.
Temperature Limits: -40 to 200 degrees F (-40 to 93 degrees C).
2.6 DAMPER OPERATORS
A. General: Provide smooth proportional control with sufficient power for air velocities
20 percent greater than maximum design velocity and to provide tight seal against
maximum system pressures. Provide spring return for two position control and for fail
safe operation.
1. Provide sufficient number of operators to achieve unrestricted movement
throughout damper range.
2. Provide one operator for maximum 36 sq ft (3.24 sq m) damper section.
14-400-029-03 / 14-400-029-03 NMSU DHW & HHW CD'S
23 0913 - 3
B. Electric Operators:
1. Spring return, adjustable stroke motor having oil immersed gear train, with
auxiliary end switch. See plans for additional requirements.
2.7 INPUT/OUTPUT SENSORS
A. Temperature Sensors:
1. Resistance temperature detectors with resistance tolerance of plus or minus 0.1
percent at 70 degrees F (21 degrees C), interchangeability less than plus or minus
0.2 percent, time constant of 13 seconds maximum for fluids and 200 seconds
maximum for air.
2. Room sensors: Locking cover .
B. Pressure Controllers:
1. 1.See plans for requirements. Controller and all points shall be tied into existing
Building Management System.
C. Pressure Sensors:
1. Unidirectional with ranges not exceeding 150 percent of maximum expected input.
2. Temperature compensate with typical thermal error or 0.06 percent of full scale in
temperature range of 40 to 100 degrees F (5 to 40 degrees C).
3. Accuracy: One percent of full scale with repeatability 0.3 percent.
4. Output: 0 - 5 vdc with power at 12 to 28 vdc.
D. Equipment Operation Sensors:
1. Status Inputs for Fans: Differential pressure switch with adjustable range of 0 to 5
inches wg (0 to 1250 Pa).
2. Status Inputs for Pumps: Differential pressure switch piped across pump with
adjustable pressure differential range of 8 to 60 psi (50 to 400 kPa).
3. Status Inputs for Electric Motors: Current sensing relay with current transformers,
adjustable and set to 175 percent of rated motor current.
E. Damper Position Indication: Potentiometer mounted in enclosure with adjustable crank
arm assembly connected to damper to transmit 0 - 100 percent damper travel.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
B. Verify that systems are ready to receive work.
C. Beginning of installation means installer accepts existing conditions.
D. Sequence work to ensure installation of components is complementary to installation of
similar components in other systems.
E. Coordinate installation of system components with installation of mechanical systems
equipment such as air handling units and air terminal units.
14-400-029-03 / 14-400-029-03 NMSU DHW & HHW CD'S
23 0913 - 4
F. Ensure installation of components is complementary to installation of similar
components.
G. Coordinate installation of system components with installation of mechanical systems
equipment such as air handling units and air terminal units.
3.2 INSTALLATION
B. Check and verify location of thermostats and exposed control sensors with plans and
room details before installation. Locate 48 inches (1200 mm) above floor. Align with
lighting switches . Refer to Section 26 2726.
C. Mount freeze protection thermostats using flanges and element holders.
D. Mount outdoor reset thermostats and outdoor sensors indoors, with sensing elements
outdoors with sun shield.
E. Provide thermostats in aspirating boxes in front entrances.
F. Provide guards on thermostats in entrances.
G. Provide valves with position indicators and with pilot positioners where sequenced with
other controls.
H. Mount control panels adjacent to associated equipment on vibration free walls or free
standing angle iron supports. One cabinet may accommodate more than one system in
same equipment room. Provide engraved plastic nameplates for instruments and
controls inside cabinet and engraved plastic nameplates on cabinet face.
I.
Install "hand/off/auto" selector switches to override automatic interlock controls when
switch is in "hand" position.
J.
Provide conduit and electrical wiring in accordance with Division 26. Electrical
material and installation shall be in accordance with appropriate requirements of
Division 26.
3.3 MAINTENANCE
A. Provide service and maintenance of control system for one year from Date of
Substantial Completion.
B. Provide complete service of controls systems, including call backs, and submit written
report of each service call.
END OF SECTION
14-400-029-03 / 14-400-029-03 NMSU DHW & HHW CD'S
23 0913 - 5
SECTION 23 0923
DDC BUILDING CONTROL SYSTEM - OVERALL
PART 1 GENERAL
A. System Description
B. Operator Interface
C. Controllers
D. Power Supplies and Line Filtering
E. Control equipment.
A. Section 28 3100 - Fire Detection and Alarm.
B. Section 23 0913 - Instrumentation and Control Devices for HVAC.
C. Section 23 0921 - DDC Building Control System - BACnet
D. Section 26 2717 - Equipment Wiring: Electrical characteristics and wiring connections.
A. ASHRAE Std 135 - BACnet - A Data Communication Protocol for Building
Automation and Control Networks; 2012.
B. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code; National Fire Protection Association; Most
Recent Edition Adopted by Authority Having Jurisdiction, Including All Applicable
Amendments and Supplements.
A. Preinstallation Meeting: Conduct a preinstallation meeting one week prior to the start
of the work of this section; require attendance by all affected installers.
1.5 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. Automatic temperature control field monitoring and control system using field
programmable micro-processor based units with communications with the Eunice
Public School District Building Management System.
B. Base system on distributed system of fully intelligent, stand-alone controllers, operating
in a multi-tasking, multi-user environment on token passing network, with central and
remote hardware, software, and interconnecting wire and conduit.
C. Include computer software and hardware, operator input/output devices, control units,
local area networks (LAN), sensors, control devices, actuators.
14-400-029-03 / 14-400-029-03 NMSU DHW & HHW CD'S
23 0923 - 1
D. Controls for variable air volume terminals, radiation, reheat coils, unit heaters, fan coils,
split systems and the like when directly connected to the control units. Individual
terminal unit control is specified in Section 23 0913.
E. Provide control systems consisting of thermostats, control valves, dampers and
operators, indicating devices, interface equipment and other apparatus and accessories
required to operate mechanical systems, and to perform functions specified.
F. Include installation and calibration, supervision, adjustments, and fine tuning necessary
for complete and fully operational system.
G. Provide points, graphics and all necessary means to achieve the design intent for all
installed equipment. Coordinate with facility manager prior to submittals to verify
controls scope of work and required points of control.
H. All control systems shall be on emergency power and shall be integrated with the
campus-wide energy management system.
I.
All graphics shall be linked to allow easy mobility from page to page.
J.
Each DDC building system controller will be completely stand-alone and all settings
and trend data contained within a building computer with complete access by Eunice
Public School District maintenance personnel. The system shall not rely on a computer
outside the building envelope to contain a database for its operation.
K. All PTAC, RTUs and stand-alone HVAC equipment shall be compatible with and
integrated with the DDC systems. With the exception of refrigeration and gas safeties,
all control and monitoring points shall be controlled by the DDC system.
L. Six copies of all equipment manuals for controllers, end devices, sensors, and sequence
of operation diagrams shall be provided to Eunice Public School District at the end of
each system installation, after the commissioning completion and acceptance by Eunice
Public School District. Each manual shall be in a standard size three ring binder labeled
on the front cover and edge. Electronic file versions (CD) shall also accompany each
copy submitted.
M. All files and data created in the DDC installation shall be the property of Eunice Public
School District.
N. All variable frequency drives shall be manufactured by Allen Bradley. No exceptions.
1.6 SUBMITTALS
B. Product Data: Provide data for each system component and software module.
C. Shop Drawings:
1. Indicate trunk cable schematic showing programmable control unit locations, and
trunk data conductors.
2. List connected data points, including connected control unit and input device.
3. Indicate system graphics indicating monitored systems, data (connected and
calculated) point addresses, and operator notations.
14-400-029-03 / 14-400-029-03 NMSU DHW & HHW CD'S
23 0923 - 2
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
Show system configuration with peripheral devices, batteries, power supplies,
diagrams, modems, and interconnections.
Indicate description and sequence of operation of operating, user, and application
software.
All sequence of operation submittals shall be in the logic and verbal format with a
(1) = on, start, alarm, etc. All digital signals drawn with a solid line, all analog
signals with a dotted line. All submittals sizes shall not exceed 11 x 17 and shall
become the property of Eunice Public School District.
All points of entry shall be defined on a system architecture logic diagram.
If system uses function blocks, documentation of function block operation shall be
provided.
D. Operation and Maintenance Data:
1. Include interconnection wiring diagrams complete field installed systems with
identified and numbered, system components and devices.
2. Include keyboard illustrations and step-by-step procedures indexed for each
operator function.
3. Include inspection period, cleaning methods, cleaning materials recommended, and
calibration tolerances.
A. Perform work in accordance with NFPA 70.
B. Design system software under direct supervision of a Professional Engineer
experienced in design of this Work and licensed at the State in which the Project is
located.
C. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the Products
D. Products Requiring Electrical Connection: Listed and classified by Underwriters
1.8 PRE-INSTALLATION MEETING
A. Convene one week before starting work of this Section.
B. Require attendance of parties directly affecting the work of this Section.
1.9 WARRANTY
1.10 MAINTENANCE SERVICE
A. Provide service and maintenance of energy management and control systems for one
year from Date of Substantial Completion.
14-400-029-03 / 14-400-029-03 NMSU DHW & HHW CD'S
23 0923 - 3
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Honeywell: www.honeywell.com.
2.2 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. Automatic temperature control field monitoring and control system using field
programmable micro-processor based units .
B. Base system on distributed system of fully intelligent, stand-alone controllers, operating
in a multi-tasking, multi-user environment on token passing network, with central and
remote hardware, software, and interconnecting wire and conduit.
C. Include computer software and hardware, operator input/output devices, control units,
local area networks (LAN), sensors, control devices, actuators.
D. Controls for variable air volume terminals, radiation, reheat coils, unit heaters, fan coils,
and the like when directly connected to the control units. Individual terminal unit
control is specified in Section 23 0913.
E. Provide control systems consisting of thermostats, control valves, dampers and
operators, indicating devices, interface equipment and other apparatus and accessories
required to operate mechanical systems, and to perform functions specified.
F. Include installation and calibration, supervision, adjustments, and fine tuning necessary
for complete and fully operational system.
2.3 OPERATOR INTERFACE
A. PC Based Work Station:
1. Resides on high speed network with building controllers.
2. Connected to server for full access to all system information.
B. Workstation, controllers, and control backbone to communicate using BACnet protocol
and addressing.
C. BACnet protocol to comply with ASHRAE Std 135.
D. Hardware:
1. Desktop:
a. Computer(s) and display(s) to be provided by DDC controls manufacturer.
b. Quantity: To be determined.
c. Minimum RAM: 2 GB.
d. Minimum Processing Speed: 3 GHz.
e. Minimum Hard Drive Memory: 60 GB.
f. Drives: DVD.
g. Ports: CAT 6.
h. Monitor: .
i. Location(s): As indicated on the Drawings.
14-400-029-03 / 14-400-029-03 NMSU DHW & HHW CD'S
23 0923 - 4
j.
k.
Network Connection:
1) Ethernet interface card.
2) Minimum Speed: 1 GB.
System Printer:
1) Printer(s) to be provided by DDC controls manufacturer.
2.4 CONTROLLERS
A. BUILDING CONTROLLERS
1. General:
a. Manage global strategies by one or more, independent, standalone,
microprocessor based controllers.
b. Provide sufficient memory to support controller's operating system, database,
and programming requirements.
c. Share data between networked controllers.
d. Controller operating system manages input and output communication signals
allowing distributed controllers to share real and virtual object information and
allowing for central monitoring and alarms.
e. Utilize real-time clock for scheduling.
f. Continuously check processor status and memory circuits for abnormal
operation.
g. Controller to assume predetermined failure mode and generate alarm
notification upon detection of abnormal operation.
h. Communication with other network devices to be based on assigned protocol.
2. Communication:
a. Controller to reside on a BACnet network using ISO 8802-3 (ETHERNET)
Data Link/Physical layer protocol.
b. Perform routing when connected to a network of custom application and
application specific controllers.
c. Provide service communication port for connection to a portable operator's
terminal or hand held device with compatible protocol.
3. Anticipated Environmental Ambient Conditions:
a. Outdoors and/or in Wet Ambient Conditions:
1) Mount within waterproof enclosures.
2) Rated for operation at 40 to 150 degrees F (4 to 65 degrees C).
b. Conditioned Space:
1) Mount within dustproof enclosures.
4. Provisions for Serviceability:
a. Diagnostic LEDs for power, communication, and processor.
b. Make all wiring connections to field removable, modular terminal strips, or to
a termination card connected by a ribbon cable.
5. Memory: In the event of a power loss, maintain all BIOS and programming
information for a minimum of 72 hours.
6. Power and Noise Immunity:
14-400-029-03 / 14-400-029-03 NMSU DHW & HHW CD'S
23 0923 - 5
a.
b.
c.
Maintain operation at 90 to 110 percent of nominal voltage rating.
Perform orderly shutdown below 80 percent of nominal voltage.
Operation protected against electrical noise of 5 to 120 Hz and from keyed
radios up to 5 W. at 3 feet (1 m).
B. CUSTOM APPLICATION CONTROLLERS
1. General:
a. Provide sufficient memory to support controller's operating system, database,
and programming requirements.
b. Share data between networked, microprocessor based controllers.
c. Controller operating system manages input and output communication signals
allowing distributed controllers to share real and virtual object information and
allowing for central monitoring and alarms.
d. Utilize real-time clock for scheduling.
e. Continuously check processor status and memory circuits for abnormal
operation.
f. Controller to assume predetermined failure mode and generate alarm
notification upon detection of abnormal operation.
g. Communication with other network devices to be based on assigned protocol.
2. Communication:
a. Controller to reside on a BACnet network using MS/TP Data Link/Physical
layer protocol.
b. Provide service communication port for connection to a portable operator's
3. Anticipated Environmental Ambient Conditions:
4. Provisions for Serviceability:
5. Memory: In the event of a power loss, maintain all BIOS and programming
6. Power and Noise Immunity:
a. Maintain operation at 90 to 110 percent of nominal voltage rating.
b. Perform orderly shutdown below 80 percent of nominal voltage.
c. Operation protected against electrical noise of 5 to 120 Hz and from keyed
C. APPLICATION SPECIFIC CONTROLLERS
1. General:
14-400-029-03 / 14-400-029-03 NMSU DHW & HHW CD'S
23 0923 - 6
a.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Not fully user programmable, microprocessor based controllers dedicated to
control specific equipment.
b. Customized for operation within the confines of equipment served.
c. Communication with other network devices to be based on assigned protocol.
Communication:
a. Controller to reside on a BACnet network using MS/TP Data Link/Physical
layer protocol.
b. Provide service communication port for connection to a portable operator's
Anticipated Environmental Ambient Conditions:
Provisions for Serviceability:
Memory: In the event of a power loss, maintain all BIOS and programming
Power and Noise Immunity:
a. Maintain operation at 90 to 110 percent of nominal voltage rating.
b. Perform orderly shutdown below 80 percent of nominal voltage.
c. Operation protected against electrical noise of 5 to 120 Hz and from keyed
D. INPUT/OUTPUT INTERFACE
1. Hardwired inputs and outputs tie into the DDC system through building, custom
application, or application specific controllers.
2. All Input/Output Points:
a. Protect controller from damage resulting from any point short-circuiting or
grounding and from voltage up to 24 volts of any duration.
b. Provide universal type for building and custom application controllers where
input or output is software designated as either binary or analog type with
appropriate properties.
3. Binary Inputs:
a. Allow monitoring of On/Off signals from remote devices.
b. Provide wetting current of 12 mA minimum, compatible with commonly
available control devices and protected against the effects of contact bounce
and noise.
c. Sense dry contact closure with power provided only by the controller.
4. Pulse Accumulation Input Objects: Conform to all requirements of binary input
objects and accept up to 10 pulses per second.
14-400-029-03 / 14-400-029-03 NMSU DHW & HHW CD'S
23 0923 - 7
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
Analog Inputs:
a. Allow for monitoring of low voltage 0 to 10 VDC, 4 to 20 mA current, or
resistance signals (thermistor, RTD).
b. Compatible with and field configurable to commonly available sensing
devices.
Binary Outputs:
a. Used for On/Off operation or a pulsed low-voltage signal for pulse width
modulation control.
b. Outputs provided with three position (On/Off/Auto) override switches.
c. Status lights for building and custom application controllers to be selectable
for normally open or normally closed operation.
Analog Outputs:
a. Monitoring signal provides a 0 to 10 VDC or a 4 to 20 mA output signal for
end device control.
b. Provide status lights and two position (AUTO/MANUAL) switch for building
and custom application controllers with manually adjustable potentiometer for
manual override on building and custom application controllers.
c. Drift to not exceed 0.4 percent of range per year.
Tri State Outputs:
a. Coordinate two binary outputs to control three point, floating type, electronic
actuators without feedback.
b. Limit the use of three point, floating devices to the following zone and
terminal unit control applications:
c. Control algorithms run the zone actuator to one end of its stroke once every 24
hours for verification of operator tracking.
System Object Capacity:
a. System size to be expandable to twice the number of input output objects
required by providing additional controllers, including associated devices and
wiring.
b. Hardware additions or software revisions for the installed operator interfaces
are not to be required for future, system expansions.
2.5 POWER SUPPLIES AND LINE FILTERING
A. Power Supplies:
1. Provide UL listed control transformers with Class 2 current limiting type or
over-current protection in both primary and secondary circuits for Class 2 service
as required by the NEC.
2. Limit connected loads to 80 percent of rated capacity.
3. Match DC power supply to current output and voltage requirements.
4. Unit to be full wave rectifier type with output ripple of 5.0 mV maximum peak to
peak.
5. Regulation to be 1 percent combined line and load with 100 microsecond response
time for 50 percent load changes.
14-400-029-03 / 14-400-029-03 NMSU DHW & HHW CD'S
23 0923 - 8
6.
Provide over-voltage and over-current protection to withstand a 150 percent
current overload for 3 seconds minimum without trip-out or failure.
7. Operational Ambient Conditions: 32 to 120 degrees F (0 to 50 degrees C).
8. EM/RF meets FCC Class B and VDE 0871 for Class B and MIL-STD 810 for
shock and vibration.
9. Line voltage units UL recognized and CSA approved.
10. 120v terminals shall be shielded if located within equipment cabinets. Otherwise,
a separate transformer of power supply enclosure shall be provided and mounted to
the equipment cabinet or within 4' of the equipment served.
B. Power Line Filtering:
1. Provide external or internal transient voltage and surge suppression component for
all workstations and controllers.
2. Minimum surge protection attributes:
a. Dielectric strength of 1000 volts minimum.
b. Response time of 10 nanoseconds or less.
c. Transverse mode noise attenuation of 65 dB or greater.
d. Common mode noise attenuation of 150 dB or greater at 40 to 100 Hz.
2.6 OPERATOR STATION
A. Work Station Minimum Requirements:
1. Configuration: IBM-compatible Intel based microcomputer system or better.
2. Minimum memory: 2 Gb RAM.
3. Memory clock speed: 3 GHz.
4. Display: 18" LCD, 5ms response time, 1440x900 minimum resolution, 16:10
capable, DVI and VGA inputs.
5. Video Adapter: Integrated, 512 MB Memory, with analog (VGA) and digital (DVI)
output.
6. Keyboard: Low profile, detachable, having Qwerty layout plus a 10 key numeric
keypad, dedicated function keys.
7. Network Controller: Dual port, Gigabit ethernet network interface card.
8. Wireless Interface: Wireless 54MBps, 802.11A LAN PCI plug-in card with
antenna.
9. Hard Drive: SATA 60 GB internal hard drive.
10. Compact Disc Drive: SATA 24x CD R/W and DVD drive.
11. Mouse: Software supported mouse with support software including self building
menus and displays of system operations and functions.
12. Software: Building automation system software by Honeywell.
13. Operating System: Per Owner Requirements.
2.7 CONTROL UNITS
A. Units: Modular in design and consisting of processor board with programmable RAM
memory, local operator access and display panel, and integral interface equipment.
B. Control Units Functions:
1. Monitor or control each input/output point.
14-400-029-03 / 14-400-029-03 NMSU DHW & HHW CD'S
23 0923 - 9
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Completely independent with hardware clock/calendar and software to maintain
control independently.
Acquire, process, and transfer information to operator station or other control units
on network.
Accept, process, and execute commands from other control unit's or devices or
operator stations.
Access both data base and control functions simultaneously.
Record, evaluate, and report changes of state or value that occur among associated
points. Continue to perform associated control functions regardless of status of
network.
Perform in stand-alone mode:
a. Start/stop.
b. Duty cycling.
c. Automatic Temperature Control.
d. Demand control via a sliding window, predictive algorithm.
e. Event initiated control.
f. Calculated point.
g. Scanning and alarm processing.
h. Full direct digital control.
i. Maintenance scheduling.
C. Global Communications:
1. Broadcast point data onto network, making that information available to all other
system control units.
2. Transmit any or all input/output points onto network for use by other control units
and utilize data from other control units.
D. Input/Output Capability:
1. Discrete/digital input (contact status).
2. Discrete/digital output.
3. Analog input.
4. Analog output.
E. Monitor, control, or address data points. Mix shall include analog inputs, analog
outputs, pulse inputs, pulse outputs and discrete inputs/outputs, as required. Install
control unit's with minimum 30 percent spare capacity.
2.8 LOCAL AREA NETWORK (LAN)
A. Provide communication between control units over local area network (LAN).
B. LAN Capacity: Not less than 60 stations or nodes.
C. Break in Communication Path: Alarm and automatically initiate LAN reconfiguration.
D. LAN Data Speed: Minimum 19.2 Kb.
E. Communication Techniques: Allow interface into network by multiple operation
stations and by auto-answer/auto-dial modems. Support communication over telephone
lines utilizing modems.
14-400-029-03 / 14-400-029-03 NMSU DHW & HHW CD'S
23 0923 - 10
F. Transmission Median: Fiber optic or single pair of solid 24 gauge twisted, shielded
copper cable.
G. Network Support: Time for global point to be received by any station, shall be less than
3 seconds. Provide automatic reconfiguration if any station is added or lost. If
transmission cable is cut, reconfigure two sections with no disruption to system's
operation, without operator intervention.
2.9 SYSTEM SOFTWARE
A. Operating System:
1. Concurrent, multi-tasking capability.
a. Common Software Applications Supported: Microsoft Excel.
b. Acceptable Operating Systems: Per Owner Requirements.
2. System Graphics:
a. Allow up to 10 graphic screens, simultaneously displayed for comparison and
monitoring of system status.
b. Animation displayed by shifting image files based on object status.
c. Provide method for operator with password to perform the following:
1) Move between, change size, and change location of graphic displays.
2) Modify on-line.
3) Add, delete, or change dynamic objects consisting of:
(a) Analog and binary values.
(b) Dynamic text.
(c) Static text.
(d) Animation files.
3. Custom Graphics Generation Package:
a. Create, modify, and save graphic files and visio format graphics in PCX
formats.
b. HTML graphics to support web browser compatible formats.
c. Capture or convert graphics from AutoCAD.
4. Standard HVAC Graphics Library:
a. HVAC Equipment:
1) VRV HVAC System Outdoor Units.
2) VRV HVAC System Indoor Units.
3) Air Handlers.
4) Terminal HVAC Units.
5) Fan Coil Units.
6) Unit Ventilators.
7) Split Units.
b. Ancillary Equipment:
1) Fans.
2) Pumps.
3) Coils.
4) Valves.
14-400-029-03 / 14-400-029-03 NMSU DHW & HHW CD'S
23 0923 - 11
5)
6)
7)
Piping.
Dampers.
Ductwork.
B. Workstation System Applications:
1. Automatic System Database Save and Restore Functions:
a. Current database copy of each Building Controller is automatically stored on
hard disk.
b. Automatic update occurs upon change in any system panel.
c. In the event of database loss in any system panel, the first workstation to detect
the loss automatically restores the database for that panel unless disabled by
the operator.
2. Manual System Database Save and Restore Functions by Operator with Password
Clearance:
a. Save database from any system panel.
b. Clear a panel database.
c. Initiate a download of a specified database to any system panel.
3. Software provided allows system configuration and future changes or additions by
operators under proper password protection.
4. On-line Help:
a. Context-sensitive system assists operator in operation and editing.
b. Available for all applications.
c. Relevant screen data provided for particular screen display.
d. Additional help available via hypertext.
5. Security:
a. Operator log-on requires user name and password to view, edit, add, or delete
data.
b. System security selectable for each operator.
c. System supervisor sets passwords and security levels for all other operators.
d. Operator passwords to restrict functions accessible to viewing and/or changing
system applications, editor, and object.
e. Automatic, operator log-off results from keyboard or mouse inactivity during
user-adjustable, time period.
f. All system security data stored in encrypted format.
6. System Diagnostics:
a. Operations Automatically Monitored:
1) Workstations.
2) Printers.
3) Modems.
4) Network connections.
5) Building management panels.
6) Controllers.
b. Device failure is annunciated to the operator.
7. Alarm Processing:
14-400-029-03 / 14-400-029-03 NMSU DHW & HHW CD'S
23 0923 - 12
a.
All system objects are configurable to "alarm in" and "alarm out" of normal
state.
b. Configurable Objects:
1) Alarm limits.
2) Alarm limit differentials.
3) States.
4) Reactions for each object.
8. Alarm Messages:
a. Descriptor: English language.
b. Recognizable Features:
1) Source.
2) Location.
3) Nature.
9. Configurable Alarm Reactions by Workstation and Time of Day:
a. Logging.
b. Printing.
c. Starting programs.
d. Displaying messages.
e. Dialing out to remote locations.
f. Paging.
g. Providing audible annunciation.
h. Displaying specific system graphics.
10. Custom Trend Logs:
a. Definable for any data object in the system including interval, start time, and
stop time.
b. Trend Data:
1) Sampled and stored on the building controller panel.
2) Archivable on hard disk.
3) Retrievable for use in reports, spreadsheets and standard database
programs.
4) Archival on LAN accessible storage media including hard disk, tape, Raid
array drive, and virtual cloud environment.
5) Protected and encrypted format to prevent manipulation, or editing of
historical data and event logs.
11. Alarm and Event Log:
a. View all system alarms and change of states from any system location.
b. Events listed chronologically.
c. Operator with proper security acknowledges and clears alarms.
d. Alarms not cleared by operator are archived to the workstation hard disk.
12. Object, Property Status and Control:
a. Provide a method to view, edit if applicable, the status of any object and
property in the system.
b. Status Available by the Following Methods:
1) Menu.
14-400-029-03 / 14-400-029-03 NMSU DHW & HHW CD'S
23 0923 - 13
2) Graphics.
3) Custom Programs.
13. Reports and Logs:
a. Reporting Package:
1) Allows operator to select, modify, or create reports.
2) Definable as to data content, format, interval, and date.
3) Archivable to hard disk.
b. Real-time logs available by type or status such as alarm, lockout, normal, etc.
c. Stored on hard disk and readily accessible by standard software applications,
including spreadsheets and word processing.
d. Set to be printed on operator command or specific time(s).
14. Reports:
a. Standard:
1) Objects with current values.
2) Current alarms not locked out.
3) Disabled and overridden objects, points and SNVTs.
4) Objects in manual or automatic alarm lockout.
5) Objects in alarm lockout currently in alarm.
6) Logs:
(a) Alarm History.
(b) System messages.
(c) System events.
(d) Trends.
b. Custom:
1) Daily.
2) Weekly.
3) Monthly.
4) Annual.
5) Time and date stamped.
6) Title.
7) Facility name.
c. Tenant Override:
1) Monthly report showing total, requested, after-hours HVAC and lighting
services on a daily basis for each tenant.
2) Annual report showing override usage on a monthly basis.
d. Electrical, Fuel, and Weather:
1) Electrical Meter(s):
(a) Monthly showing daily electrical consumption and peak electrical
demand with time and date stamp for each meter.
(b) Annual summary showing monthly electrical consumption and peak
demand with time and date stamp for each meter.
2) Fuel Meter(s):
(a) Monthly showing daily natural gas consumption for each meter.
(b) Annual summary showing monthly consumption for each meter.
14-400-029-03 / 14-400-029-03 NMSU DHW & HHW CD'S
23 0923 - 14
3)
Weather:
(a) Monthly showing minimum, maximum, average outdoor air
temperature and heating/cooling degree-days for the month.
2.10 CONTROLLER SOFTWARE
A. All applications reside and operate in the system controllers and editing of all
applications occurs at the operator workstation.
B. System Security:
1. User access secured via user passwords and user names.
2. Passwords restrict user to the objects, applications, and system functions as
assigned by the system manager.
3. User Log On/Log Off attempts are recorded.
4. Automatic Log Off occurs following the last keystroke after a user defined delay
time.
C. Object or Object Group Scheduling:
1. Weekly Schedules Based on Separate, Daily Schedules:
a. Include start, stop, optimal stop, and night economizer.
b. 10 events maximum per schedule.
c. Start/stop times adjustable for each group object.
2. Holiday or Special Schedules:
a. Capability to define up to 99 schedules.
b. Repeated annually.
c. Length of each period is operator defined.
D. Provide standard application for equipment coordination and grouping based on
function and location to be used for scheduling and other applications.
E. Alarms:
1. Binary object is set to alarm based on the operator specified state.
2. Analog object to have high/low alarm limits.
3. All alarming is capable of being automatically and manually disabled.
4. Alarm Reporting:
a. Operator determines action to be taken for alarm event.
b. Alarms to be routed to appropriate workstation.
c. Reporting Options:
1) Start Programs.
2) Logged.
3) Custom messaging.
4) Graphical displays.
F. Demand Limiting:
1. Building power consumption monitored from signals generated by a pulse
generator, mounted at the building power meter.
2. Demand limit controlled via load shedding or load restoration in a predetermined
and predictive manner.
3. Demand Reduction Methods:
14-400-029-03 / 14-400-029-03 NMSU DHW & HHW CD'S
23 0923 - 15
4.
5.
6.
a. Supply air temperature reset.
b. Space temperature set-point reset.
c. Equipment off/on prioritization.
Relevant variables that influence demand limiting control are based on the power
company methodology for computing demand charges.
Operator On-Line Changes Allowed:
a. Addition and deletion of loads controlled.
b. Changes in demand intervals.
c. Changes in demand limit for meter(s).
d. Maximum equipment shutoff time.
e. Minimum equipment shutoff time.
f. Select rotational or sequential shedding and restoring.
g. Shed/restore priority.
Information and Reports available Hourly, Daily, and Monthly:
a. Total electric consumption.
b. Peak demand.
c. Date and time of peak demand.
d. Daily peak demand.
G. Maintenance Management: System monitors equipment status and generates
maintenance messages based upon user-designated run-time limits.
H. PID Control Characteristics:
1. Direct or reverse action.
2. Anti-windup.
3. Calculated, time-varying, analog value, positions an output or stages a series of
outputs.
4. User selectable controlled variable, set-point, and PED gains.
I.
Staggered Start Application:
1. Prevents all controlled equipment from simultaneously restarting after power
outage.
2. Order of equipment startup is user selectable.
J.
Energy Calculations:
1. Accumulated instantaneous power or flow rates are converted to energy use data.
2. Algorithm calculates a rolling average and allows window of time to be user
specified in minute intervals.
3. Algorithm calculates a fixed window average with a digital input signal from a
utility meter defining the start of the window period that in turn synchronizes the
fixed-window average with that used by the power company.
K. Anti-Short Cycling:
1. All binary output objects protected from short-cycling.
2. Allows minimum on-time and off-time to be selected.
L. On-Off Control with Differential:
14-400-029-03 / 14-400-029-03 NMSU DHW & HHW CD'S
23 0923 - 16
1.
2.
Algorithm allows binary output to be cycled based on a controlled variable and
set-point.
Algorithm to be direct-acting or reverse-acting incorporating an adjustable
differential.
M. Run-Time Totalization:
1. Totalize run-times for all binary input objects.
2. Provides operator with capability to assign high run-time alarm.
2.11 OPERATING SYSTEM SOFTWARE
A. Input/Output Capability From Operator Station:
1. Request display of current values or status in tabular or graphic format.
2. Command selected equipment to specified state.
3. Initiate logs and reports.
4. Change analog limits.
5. Add, delete, or change points within each control unit or application routine.
6. Change point input/output descriptors, status, alarm descriptors, and engineering
unit descriptors.
7. Add new control units to system.
8. Modify and set up maintenance scheduling parameters.
9. Develop, modify, delete or display full range of color graphic displays.
10. Automatically archive select data even when running third party software.
11. Support two printer operations.
a. Alarm printer: Print alarms, operator acknowledgements, action messages,
system alarms, operator sign-on and sign-off.
b. Data printer: Print reports, page prints, and data base prints.
12. Select daily, weekly or monthly as scheduled frequency to synchronize time and
date in digital control units. Accommodate daylight savings time adjustments.
B. Operator System Access: Via software password with minimum 30 access levels at
work station and minimum 3 access levels at each control unit.
C. Operator Station:
1. Accept data from LAN as needed without scanning entire network for updated
point data.
2. Interrogate LAN for updated point data when requested.
3. Allow operator command of devices.
4. Allow operator to place specific control units in or out of service.
5. Allow parameter editing of control units.
6. Store duplicate data base for every control unit and allow down loading while
system is on line.
7. Control or modify specific programs.
D. Alarm Processing:
1. Off normal condition: Cause alarm and appropriate message, including time,
system, point descriptor, and alarm condition. Select alarm state/value and which
alarms shall cause automatic dial-out.
14-400-029-03 / 14-400-029-03 NMSU DHW & HHW CD'S
23 0923 - 17
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
Critical alarm or change-of-state: Display message, stored on disk for review and
sort, or print.
Print online changeable message, up to 60 characters in length, for each alarm
point specified.
Define time delay for equipment start-up or shutdown.
Allow unique routing of specific alarms.
Operator specifies if alarm requires acknowledgement.
Continue to indicate unacknowledged alarms after return to normal.
Alarm notification:
a. Display indicating alarm condition.
b. Selectable audible alarm indication.
E. Event Processing: Automatically initiate commands, user defined messages, take
specific control actions or change control strategy and application programs resulting
from event condition. Event condition may be value crossing operator defined limit,
change-of-state, specified state, or alarm occurrence or return to normal.
F. Automatic Restart: Automatically restart field equipment on restoration of power.
Provide time delay between individual equipment restart and time of day start/stop.
G. Messages:
1. Automatically display or print user-defined message subsequent to occurrence of
selected events.
2. Compose, change, or delete any message.
3. Display or log any message at any time.
4. Assign any message to any event.
H. Reports:
1. Manually requested with time and date.
2. Long term data archiving to hard disk.
3. Data extraction with mathematical manipulation.
4. Generating reports either normally at operator direction, or automatically under
work station direction.
5. Reports may either manually displayed or printed, or may be printed/displayed
automatically on daily, weekly, monthly, yearly or scheduled basis.
6. Include capability for statistical data manipulation and extraction.
7. Provide capability to generate four types of reports: Statistical detail reports,
summary reports, trend graphic plots, x-y graphic plots.
I.
Parameter Save/Restore: Store most current operating system, parameter changes, and
modifications on external storage device.
J.
Data Collection:
1. Daily electrical energy consumption, peak demand, and time of peak demand for
up to electrical meters over 2 year period.
K. Graphic Display: Support graphic development on work station with software features:
1. Page linking.
2. Generate, store, and retrieve library symbols.
14-400-029-03 / 14-400-029-03 NMSU DHW & HHW CD'S
23 0923 - 18
3.
4.
5.
6.
Single or double height characters.
Pixel level resolution.
Animated graphics for discrete points.
Display real time value of each input or output line diagram fashion.
L. Maintenance Management:
1. Run time monitoring, per point.
2. Maintenance scheduling targets with automatic annunciation, scheduling and
shutdown.
3. Equipment safety targets.
4. Display of maintenance material and estimated labor.
5. Target point reset, per point.
M. Advisories:
1. Summary which contains status of points in locked out condition.
2. Continuous operational or not operational report of interrogation of system
hardware and programmable control units for failure.
3. Report of power failure detection, time and date.
4. Report of communication failure with operator device, field interface unit, point,
programmable control unit.
2.12 LOAD CONTROL PROGRAMS
A. General: Support inch-pounds and SI (metric) units of measurement.
B. Demand Limiting:
1. Monitor total power consumption per power meter and shed associated loads
automatically to reduce power consumption to an operator set maximum demand
level.
2. Input: Pulse count from incoming power meter connected to pulse accumulator in
control unit.
3. Forecast demand (kW): Predicted by sliding window method.
4. Automatically shed loads throughout the demand interval selecting loads with
independently adjustable on and off time of between one and 255 minutes.
5. Demand Target: Minimum of 3 per demand meter; change targets based upon (1)
time, (2) status of pre-selected points, or (3) temperature.
6. Load: Assign load shed priority, minimum "ON" time and maximum "OFF" time.
7. Limits: Include control band (upper and lower limits).
8. Output advisory if loads are not available to satisfy required shed amount, advise
shed requirements and requiring operator acknowledgement.
C. Duty Cycling:
1. Periodically stop and start loads, based on space temperature, and according to
various On/Off patterns.
2. Modify off portion of cycle based on operator specified comfort parameters.
Maintain total cycle time by increasing on portion of cycle by same amount that off
portion is reduced.
3. Set and modify following parameters for each individual load.
14-400-029-03 / 14-400-029-03 NMSU DHW & HHW CD'S
23 0923 - 19
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
Minimum and maximum Off time.
On/Off time in one minute increments.
Manually override the DCC program and place a load in an On or Off state.
Cooling Target Temperature and Differential.
Heating Target Temperature and Differential.
Cycle off adjustment.
D. Automatic Time Scheduling:
1. Self-contained programs for automatic start/stop/scheduling of building loads.
2. Support up to seven (7) normal day schedules, seven (7) "special day" schedules
and two (2) temporary day schedules.
3. Special days schedule shall support up to 30 unique date/duration combinations.
4. Any number of loads assigned to any time program; each load can have individual
time program.
5. Each load assigned at least 16 control actions per day with 1 minute resolution.
6. Time schedule operations may be:
a. Start.
b. Optimized Start.
c. Stop.
d. Optimized Stop.
e. Cycle.
f. Optimized Cycle.
7. Minimum of 30 holiday periods up to 100 days in length may be specified for the
year.
8. Create temporary schedules.
9. Broadcast temporary "special day" date and duration.
E. Start/Stop Time Optimization:
1. Perform optimized start/stop as function of outside conditions, inside conditions,
or both.
2. Adaptive and self-tuning, adjusting to changing conditions unattended.
3. For each point under control, establish and modify:
a. Occupancy period.
b. Desired temperature at beginning of occupancy period.
c. Desired temperature at end of occupancy period.
F. Night Setback/Setup Program: Reduce heating space temperature setpoint or raise
cooling space temperature setpoint during unoccupied hours; in conjunction with
scheduled start/stop and optimum start/stop programs.
G. Calculated Points: Define calculations and totalization computed from monitored
points (analog/digital points), constants, or other calculated points.
1. Employ arithmetic, algebraic, Boolean, and special function operations.
H. Event Initiated Programming: Event may be initiated by any data point, causing series
of controls in a sequence.
14-400-029-03 / 14-400-029-03 NMSU DHW & HHW CD'S
23 0923 - 20
I.
Direct Digital Control: Each control unit shall provide Direct Digital Control software
so that the operator may customize control strategies and sequences of operation by
defining the appropriate control loop algorithms and choosing the optimum loop
parameters.
1. Control loops: Defined using "modules" that are analogous to standard control
devices.
2. Output: Paired or individual digital outputs for pulse-width modulation, and
analog outputs, as required.
3. Direct Digital Control loops: Downloaded upon creation or on operator request.
On sensor failure, program shall execute user defined failsafe output.
4. Display: Value or state of each of the lines which interconnect DDC modules.
J.
Fine Tuning Direct Digital Control PID or floating loops:
1. Display information:
2. Display format: Graphic, with automatic scaling; with input and output variable
superimposed on graph of "time" vs "variable".
K. Trend logging:
1. Each control unit will store samples of control unit's data points.
2. Update file continuously at discretely assignable intervals.
3. Automatically initiate upload request and then store data on hard disk.
4. Time synchronize sampling at operator specified times and intervals with sample
resolution of one minute.
5. Co-ordinate sampling with on/off state of specified point.
6. Display trend samples on work station in graphic format. Automatically scale
trend graph with minimum 60 samples of data in plot of time vs data.
2.13 HVAC CONTROL PROGRAMS
A. General:
1. Support Inch-pounds and SI (metric) units of measurement.
2. Identify each HVAC Control system.
3. P, PI or PID shall be completely selectable for each control loop.
4. Modulating control output shall be available for all VFD control.
B. Graphics:
1. All graphics shall be linked to allow easy mobility from page to page.
2. The minimum graphics requirements shall include:
a. Building summary page
b. Floor plan for each floor with animation for each rooms controls
c. Complete graphics for each terminal unit
d. Complete graphics for each VRV outdoor unit
e. Complete graphics for each VRV indoor unit
f. Complete graphics for each packaged outdoor unit
g. Complete graphics for each ERV unit
h. Complete graphics for each exhaust fan
i. Complete graphics for each unit heater
14-400-029-03 / 14-400-029-03 NMSU DHW & HHW CD'S
23 0923 - 21
3.
j. Complete graphics for each air handler
k. Complete graphics showing fan / pump control systems
Provide logic & troubleshooting graphics (DDC pages)
C. Optimal Run Time:
1. Control start-up and shutdown times of HVAC equipment for both heating and
cooling.
2. Base on occupancy schedules, outside air temperature, seasonal requirements, and
interior room mass temperature.
3. Start-up systems by using outside air temperature, room mass temperatures, and
adaptive model prediction for how long building takes to warm up or cool down
under different conditions.
4. Use outside air temperature to determine early shut down with ventilation override.
5. Analyze multiple building mass sensors to determine seasonal mode and worse
case condition for each day.
6. Operator commands:
a. Define term schedule
b. Add/delete fan status point.
c. Add/delete outside air temperature point.
d. Add/delete mass temperature point.
e. Define heating/cooling parameters.
f. Define mass sensor heating/cooling parameters.
g. Lock/unlock program.
h. Request optimal run time control summary.
i. Request optimal run time mass temperature summary.
j. Request HVAC point summary.
k. Request HVAC saving profile summary.
7. Control Summary:
a. HVAC Control system begin/end status.
b. Optimal run time lock/unlock control status.
c. Heating/cooling mode status.
d. Optimal run time schedule.
e. Start/Stop times.
f. Selected mass temperature point ID.
g. Optimal run time system normal start times.
h. Occupancy and vacancy times.
i. Optimal run time system heating/cooling mode parameters.
8. Mass temperature summary:
a. Mass temperature point type and ID.
b. Desired and current mass temperature values.
c. Calculated warm-up/cool-down time for each mass temperature.
d. Heating/cooling season limits.
e. Break point temperature for cooling mode analysis.
9. HVAC point summary:
a. Control system identifier and status.
14-400-029-03 / 14-400-029-03 NMSU DHW & HHW CD'S
23 0923 - 22
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
Point ID and status.
Outside air temperature point ID and status.
Mass temperature point ID and point.
Calculated optimal start and stop times.
Period start.
D. Supply Air Reset:
1. Monitor heating and cooling loads in building spaces, terminal reheat systems,
both hot deck and cold deck temperatures on dual duct and multizone systems,
single zone unit discharge temperatures.
2. Adjust discharge temperatures to most energy efficient levels satisfying measured
load by:
a. Raising cooling temperatures to highest possible value.
b. Reducing heating temperatures to lowest possible level.
a. Add/delete fan status point.
b. Lock/unlock program.
c. Request HVAC point summary.
d. Add/Delete discharge controller point.
e. Define discharge controller parameters.
f. Add/delete air flow rate.
g. Define space load and load parameters.
h. Request space load summary.
4. Control summary:
a. HVAC control system status (begin/end).
b. Supply air reset system status.
c. Optimal run time system status.
d. Heating and cooling loop.
e. High/low limits.
f. Deadband.
g. Response timer.
h. Reset times.
5. Space load summary:
a. HVAC system status.
b. Optimal run time status.
c. Heating/cooling loop status.
d. Space load point ID.
e. Current space load point value.
f. Control heat/cool limited.
g. Gain factor.
h. Calculated reset values.
i. Fan status point ID and status.
j. Control discharge temperature point ID and status.
k. Space load point ID and status.
14-400-029-03 / 14-400-029-03 NMSU DHW & HHW CD'S
23 0923 - 23
l.
Air flow rate point ID and status.
E. Enthalpy Switchover:
1. Calculate outside and return air enthalpy using measured temperature and relative
humidity; determine energy expended and control outside and return air dampers.
a. Add/delete fan status point.
b. Add/delete outside air temperature point.
c. Add/delete discharge controller point.
d. Define discharge controller parameters.
e. Add/delete return air temperature point.
f. Add/delete outside air dew point/humidity point.
g. Add/delete return air dew point/humidity point.
h. Add/delete damper switch.
i. Add/delete minimum outside air.
j. Add/delete atmospheric pressure.
k. Add/delete heating override switch.
l. Add/delete evaporative cooling switch.
m. Add/delete air flow rate.
n. Define enthalpy deadband.
o. Lock/unlock program.
p. Request control summary.
q. Request HVAC point summary.
3. Control summary:
a. HVAC control system begin/end status.
b. Enthalpy switchover optimal system status.
c. Optimal return time system status.
d. Current outside air enthalpy.
e. Calculated mixed air enthalpy.
f. Calculated cooling cool enthalpy using outside air.
g. Calculated cooling cool enthalpy using mixed air.
h. Calculated enthalpy difference.
i. Enthalpy switchover deadband.
j. Status of damper mode switch.
4. Air Side requirements:
a. Discharge air temperatures reset on space demand.
b. Unoccupied schedules at the zone or terminal unit level.
c. Zone occupied overrides completely adjustable.
d. VAV boxes shall include discharge air temperature sensors and airflow
sensors.
e. Duct Static will be reset based on max VAV box to maintain one box at 90%
open.
5. Heating water requirements:
a. Heating water temperature shall reset upon OA or space demand.
14-400-029-03 / 14-400-029-03 NMSU DHW & HHW CD'S
23 0923 - 24
2.14 DDC HARDWARE
A. All exposed control wiring up to 10 foot above any floor or access platform shall be in
no less than ¾" conduit with compression type connectors. All flexible conduit shall be
of the weatherproof type, no less that ¾" diameter and not longer than 5 feet in length
and fittings of the same manufacture shall be used. All junction boxes within air
handler plenums shall be weatherproof. All electrical local and state codes shall be
enforced. Color of conduit shall be green. Coordinate color with facilities manager
prior to ordering.
B. All CAT-5, 5e or 6 cable runs shall not exceed 300 feet.
C. All transducers or converters, D/A, A/D, electronic to pneumatic shall be mounted in
the DDC control cabinet with the primary controller. When connecting DDC to existing
pneumatic end devices a separate transducer is required for each AO control signal. A
separate panel mounted adjacent to the primary control cabinet if more space is required
is acceptable.
D. All converters, transducers, sensors, wire terminations and end devices shall be labeled
according to Eunice Public School District labeling standards for ease of
troubleshooting. A point list and wiring table shall be installed on the inside door of
each control cabinet
E. All relays used shall have a lighted indicator as to when they are energized.
F. All control cabinets shall be labeled on the outside as to what equipment they control.
G. Under no circumstances shall any control cabinets contain voltages in excess of 50 volts
and all control circuitry shall use voltages under 50 volts. Separate transformer or
power supply enclosures shall be provided as required OR when located inside the
control box the 120v terminals shall be shielded.
H. New installations shall use no more than 80% of a controllers I/O points and at least 2
spare I/O points shall be left for future expansion
I.
All DDC valves and damper motor operators shall be spring loaded and on a loss of
power shall fail to the following positions:
1. Outside air fail closed
2. Return air fail open
3. Relief fail closed
4. Heating water fail open, or to coil on 3-way valves
5. Chilled water fail open, or to coil on 3-way valves
6. Steam preheat fail open
7. All steam converter or generator valves fail closed
J.
110 volt AC outlet shall be installed outside and near each control cabinets and a
service switch shall be mounted inside the cabinet.
K. A desktop or laptop computer point of entry and security key shall be provided for each
new building system installed.
L. Capability of change of program, add sensors, and tune system shall be made available
to Eunice Public School District.
14-400-029-03 / 14-400-029-03 NMSU DHW & HHW CD'S
23 0923 - 25
M. All network system wiring shall have installed manufacturer specified surge protection
located in the network as recommended by the manufacturer.
N. The following standard shall be used for the local area network (LAN):
1. Wire shall be 22 AWG twisted pair black & white, shielded, plenum Rated, 300
vac insulated jacket, purple in color.
2. Wiring product shall conform to standards written by the controls manufacturer
and follow their recommended guidelines and not to exceed maximum lengths.
3. Terminators, repeaters, and grounding shall be installed according to
manufacturers? specifications.
4. All LAN wiring shall not be exposed, but shall be installed in raceway, ceiling
plenum, or conduit (EMT).
5. All LAN wiring shall not be in the same conduit as other power sources and never
near panel breakers, contactors, etc.
O. No more than two wires shall terminate on a single terminal point
P. All control wiring to be copper
2.15 GENERAL COMMUNICATIONS
A. Each DDC building system controller will be completely stand-alone and all settings
and trend data contained within a building computer with complete access by Eunice
Public School District maintenance personnel. The system shall not rely on a computer
outside the building envelope to contain a database for its operation.
B. Two (2) data ports shall be provided for interface between the campus network and the
DDC server. These are to be in the location specified by Eunice Public School District
and will typically be located in a mechanical space or the building maintenance office.
Note that there is a 300. limit on cabling runs from an IT closet to this location.
C. Two (2) Static IP addresses shall be provided for interface between the campus network
and the DDC server.
D. The MAC address and physical location for each IP address shall be provided to Eunice
Public School District facilities maintenance.
2.16 PROGRAMMING APPLICATION FEATURES
A. Alarm Messages:
1. Assign alarm messages to system messages including point's alarm condition,
point's off-normal condition, totalized point's warning limit, hardware elements
advisories.
2. Output assigned alarm with "message requiring acknowledgement".
3. Operator commands include define, modify, or delete; output summary listing
current alarms and assignments; output summary defining assigned points.
4. There shall be a proofing function for all DO points to alarm if action does not take
place where appropriate. Coordinate with facilities manager.
5. All alarm levels shall be coordinated and set by Eunice Public School District.
B. Weekly Scheduling:
14-400-029-03 / 14-400-029-03 NMSU DHW & HHW CD'S
23 0923 - 26
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Automatically initiate equipment or system commands, based on preselected time
schedule for points specified.
Provide program times for each day of week, per point, with one minute resolution.
Automatically generate alarm output for points not responding to command.
Provide for holidays, minimum of 366 consecutive holidays.
Operator commands:
a. System logs and summaries.
b. Start of stop point.
c. Lock or unlock control or alarm input.
d. Add, delete, or modify analog limits and differentials.
e. Adjust point operation position.
f. Change point operational mode.
g. Open or close point.
h. Enable/disable, lock/unlock, or execute interlock sequence or computation
profile.
i. Begin or end point totalization.
j. Modify totalization values and limits.
k. Access or secure point.
l. Begin or end HVAC or load control system.
m. Modify load parameter.
n. Modify demand limiting and duty cycle targets.
Output summary: Listing of programmed function points, associated program
times, and respective day of week programmed points by software groups or time
of day.
C. Interlocking:
1. Permit events to occur, based on changing condition of one or more associated
master points.
2. Binary contact, high/low limit of analog point or computed point shall be capable
of being utilized as master. Same master may monitor or command multiple
slaves.
a. Define single master/multiple master interlock process.
b. Define logic interlock process.
c. Lock/unlock program.
d. Enable/disable interlock process.
e. Execute terminate interlock process.
f. Request interlock type summary.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
14-400-029-03 / 14-400-029-03 NMSU DHW & HHW CD'S
23 0923 - 27
B. Verify that conditioned power supply is available to the control units and to the operator
work station. Verify that field end devices, wiring, and pneumatic tubing is installed
prior to installation proceeding.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install control units and other hardware in position on permanent walls where not
subject to excessive vibration.
B. Install software in control units and in operator work station. Implement all features of
programs to specified requirements and appropriate to sequence of operation. Refer to
Sequence of Operations on plans.
C. Install software in control units and in operator work station. Implement all features of
programs to specified requirements and appropriate to sequence of operation.
D. Provide conduit and electrical wiring in accordance with Section 26 2717. Electrical
material and installation shall be in accordance with appropriate requirements of
Division 26.
3.3 MANUFACTURER'S FIELD SERVICES
A. Start and commission systems. Allow sufficient time for start-up and commissioning
prior to placing control systems in permanent operation.
B. Provide service engineer to instruct Owner's representative in operation of systems
plant and equipment for 2 day period.
C. Provide basic operator training for 2 persons on data display, alarm and status
descriptors, requesting data, execution of commands and request of logs. Include a
minimum of 16 hours dedicated instructor time. Provide training on site.
3.4 DEMONSTRATION AND INSTRUCTIONS
A. Demonstrate complete and operating system to Owner.
END OF SECTION
14-400-029-03 / 14-400-029-03 NMSU DHW & HHW CD'S
23 0923 - 28
SECTION 23 2114
HYDRONIC SPECIALTIES
PART 1 GENERAL
A. Expansion tanks.
B. Air vents.
C. Air separators.
D. Strainers.
E. Suction diffusers.
F. Pressure-temperature test plugs.
G. Balancing valves.
H. Combination flow controls.
I.
Relief valves.
J.
Pressure reducing valves.
A. Section 22 1006 - Plumbing Piping Specialties: Backflow Preventers.
B. Section 23 2113 - Hydronic Piping.
A. ASME BPVC-VIII-1 - Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Section VIII, Division 1 Rules for Construction of Pressure Vessels; 2013.
A. Sequencing: Ensure that utility connections are achieved in an orderly and expeditious
manner.
1.5 SUBMITTALS
B. Product Data: Provide product data for manufactured products and assemblies required
for this project. Include component sizes, rough-in requirements, service sizes, and
finishes. Include product description, model and dimensions.
C. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate hanging and support methods, joining
procedures.
D. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of flow controls.
E. Maintenance Data: Include installation instructions, assembly views, lubrication
instructions, and replacement parts list.
14-400-029-03 / 14-400-029-03 NMSU DHW & HHW CD'S
23 2114 - 1
F. Maintenance Materials: Furnish the following for Owner's use in maintenance of
project.
1. See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements, for additional provisions.
2. Extra Glycol Solution: One container, 1 gallon (4 L) size.
A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the type of
products specified in this section, with minimum three years of documented experience.
A. Accept valves on site in shipping containers with labeling in place. Inspect for damage.
B. Provide temporary protective coating on cast iron and steel valves.
C. Provide temporary end caps and closures on piping and fittings. Maintain in place until
installation.
D. Protect piping systems from entry of foreign materials by temporary covers, completing
sections of the work, and isolating parts of completed system.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 EXPANSION TANKS
A. Construction: Welded steel, tested and stamped in accordance with ASME
BPVC-VIII-1; supplied with National Board Form U-1, rated for working pressure of
125 psi (860 kPa), with flexible EPDM diaphragm or bladder sealed into tank.
B. Accessories: Pressure gage and air-charging fitting, tank drain; precharge to 12 psi (80
kPa).
C. Automatic Cold Water Fill Assembly: Pressure reducing valve, double check back
flow preventer, test cocks, strainer, vacuum breaker, and valved by-pass.
2.2 AIR VENTS
A. Washer Type:
1. Brass with hygroscopic fiber discs, vent ports, adjustable cap for manual shut-off,
and integral spring loaded ball check valve.
2.3 AIR SEPARATORS
A. In-line Air Separators:
1. Cast iron for sizes 1-1/2 inch (40 mm) and smaller, or steel for sizes 2 inch (50
mm) and larger; tested and stamped in accordance with ASME BPVC-VIII-1; for
125 psi (860 kPa) operating pressure.
2.4 STRAINERS
A. Manufacturers:
14-400-029-03 / 14-400-029-03 NMSU DHW & HHW CD'S
23 2114 - 2
B. Size 2 inch (50 mm) and Under:
1. Screwed brass or iron body for 175 psi (1200 kPa) working pressure, Y pattern
with 1/32 inch (0.8 mm) stainless steel perforated screen.
2.5 SUCTION DIFFUSERS
A. Manufacturers:
B. Fitting: Angle pattern, cast-iron body, threaded for 2 inch (50 mm) and smaller, flanged
for 2-1/2 inch (65 mm) and larger, rated for 175 psi (1200 kPa) working pressure, with
inlet vanes, cylinder strainer with 3/16 inch (5 mm) diameter openings, disposable 5/32
inch (4 mm) mesh strainer to fit over cylinder strainer, 20 mesh start up screen, and
permanent magnet located in flow stream and removable for cleaning.
C. Accessories: Adjustable foot support, blowdown tapping in bottom, gage tapping in
side.
2.6 PRESSURE-TEMPERATURE TEST PLUGS
A. Construction: Brass body designed to receive temperature or pressure probe with
removable protective cap, and Neoprene rated for minimum 200 degrees F (93 degrees
C).
B. Application: Use extended length plugs to clear insulated piping.
2.7 BALANCING VALVES
A. Manufacturers:
B. Size 2 inch (50 mm) and Smaller:
1. Provide ball style with flow balancing, flow measurement, and shut-off
capabilities, memory stops, minimum of two metering ports and NPT threaded
connections.
2. Metal construction materials consist of brass.
3. Non-metal construction materials consist of Teflon or engineered resin.
2.8 COMBINATION FLOW CONTROLS
A. Construction: Brass or bronze body with union on inlet and outlet, temperature and
pressure test plug on inlet and outlet with blowdown/backflush drain.
B. Calibration: Control flow within 5 percent of selected rating, over operating pressure
range of 10 times minimum pressure required for control, maximum minimum pressure
3.5 psi (24 kPa).
C. Control Mechanism: Stainless steel or nickel plated brass piston or regulator cup,
operating against stainless steel helical or wave formed spring.
2.9 RELIEF VALVES
A. Bronze body, teflon seat, stainless steel stem and springs, automatic, direct pressure
actuated, capacities ASME certified and labelled.
14-400-029-03 / 14-400-029-03 NMSU DHW & HHW CD'S
23 2114 - 3
2.10 PRESSURE REDUCING VALVES
A. Operation: Automatically feeds make-up water to the hydronic system whenever
pressure in the system drops below the pressure setting of the valve. Refer to Section 23
2113.
B. Materials of Construction:
1. Valve Body: Constructed of bronze or brass.
2. Internal Components: Construct of stainless steel and engineered plastics.
C. Connections:
1. NPT threaded: 0.50 inch (15 mm), or 0.75 inch (20 mm).
2. Soldered: 0.50 inch (15 mm).
D. Provide integral check valve and strainer.
E. Maximum Inlet Pressure: 100 psi (689 kPa).
F. Maximum Fluid Temperature: 180 degrees F (82 degrees C).
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install specialties in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B. For automatic air vents in ceiling spaces or other concealed locations, provide vent
tubing to nearest drain.
C. Provide air separator on suction side of system circulation pump and connect to
expansion tank.
D. Provide valved drain and hose connection on strainer blow down connection.
E. Provide pump suction fitting on suction side of base mounted centrifugal pumps .
Remove temporary strainers after cleaning systems.
F. Support pump fittings with floor mounted pipe and flange supports.
G. Provide relief valves on pressure tanks, low pressure side of reducing valves, heat
exchangers, and expansion tanks.
H. Select system relief valve capacity so that it is greater than make-up pressure reducing
valve capacity. Select equipment relief valve capacity to exceed rating of connected
equipment.
I.
Pipe relief valve outlet to nearest floor drain.
J.
Where one line vents several relief valves, make cross sectional area equal to sum of
individual vent areas.
END OF SECTION
14-400-029-03 / 14-400-029-03 NMSU DHW & HHW CD'S
23 2114 - 4
SECTION 23 2113
HYDRONIC PIPING
PART 1 GENERAL
A. Hydronic system requirements.
B. Equipment drains and overflows.
C. Pipe hangers and supports.
D. Unions, flanges, mechanical couplings, and dielectric connections.
E. Valves:
A. Section 07 8400 - Firestopping.
B. Section 22 0516 - Expansion Fittings and Loops for Plumbing Piping.
C. Section 22 0548 - Vibration and Seismic Controls for Plumbing Piping and Equipment.
D. Section 22 0553 - Identification for Plumbing Piping and Equipment.
E. Section 22 0719 - Plumbing Piping Insulation.
F. Section 23 0516 - Expansion Fittings and Loops for HVAC Piping.
G. Section 23 0548 - Vibration and Seismic Controls for HVAC Piping and Equipment.
H. Section 23 0553 - Identification for HVAC Piping and Equipment.
I.
Section 23 0719 - HVAC Piping Insulation.
J.
Section 23 2114 - Hydronic Specialties.
K. Section 23 2500 - HVAC Water Treatment: Pipe cleaning.
L. Section 26 2717 - Equipment Wiring: Electrical characteristics and wiring connections.
A. ASME (BPV IX) - Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Section IX - Welding and Brazing
Qualifications; The American Society of Mechanical Engineers; 2010.
B. ASME B31.9 - Building Services Piping; 2011 (ANSI/ASME B31.9).
C. ASTM F1476 - Standard Specification for Performance of Gasketed Mechanical
Couplings for Use in Piping Applications; 2007.
D. AWWA C606 - Grooved and Shouldered Joints; 2011 (ANSI/AWWA C606).
E. MSS SP-58 - Pipe Hangers and Supports - Materials, Design and Manufacture,
Selection, Application, and Installation; Manufacturers Standardization Society of the
Valve and Fittings Industry, Inc.; 2009.
14-400-029-03 / 14-400-029-03 NMSU DHW & HHW CD'S
HYDRONIC PIPING
23 2113 - 1
1.4 SUBMITTALS
B. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate hanging and support methods, joining
procedures.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 HYDRONIC SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS
A. Comply with ASME B31.9 and applicable federal, state, and local regulations.
B. Piping: Provide piping, fittings, hangers and supports as required, as indicated, and as
follows:
1. Where more than one piping system material is specified, provide joining fittings
that are compatible with piping materials and ensure that the integrity of the system
is not jeopardized.
2. Use non-conducting dielectric connections whenever jointing dissimilar metals.
3. Grooved mechanical joints may be used in accessible locations only.
a. Accessible locations include those exposed on interior of building, in pipe
chases, and in mechanical rooms, aboveground outdoors, and as approved by
Architect.
b. Use rigid joints unless otherwise indicated.
4. Provide pipe hangers and supports in accordance with ASME B31.9 or MSS SP-58
unless indicated otherwise.
C. Pipe-to-Valve and Pipe-to-Equipment Connections: Use flanges, unions, or grooved
couplings to allow disconnection of components for servicing; do not use direct welded,
soldered, or threaded connections.
D. Valves: Provide valves where indicated:
1. Provide drain valves where indicated, and if not indicated provide at least at main
shut-off, low points of piping, bases of vertical risers, and at equipment. Use 3/4
inch (20 mm) gate valves with cap; pipe to nearest floor drain.
2. For throttling, bypass, or manual flow control services, use globe, ball, or butterfly
valves.
3. In heating water, chilled water, or condenser water systems, butterfly valves may
be used interchangeably with gate and globe valves.
4. For shut-off and to isolate parts of systems or vertical risers, use gate, ball, or
butterfly valves.
5. For throttling service, use plug cocks. Use non-lubricated plug cocks only when
shut-off or isolating valves are also provided.
14-400-029-03 / 14-400-029-03 NMSU DHW & HHW CD'S
HYDRONIC PIPING
23 2113 - 2
2.2 EQUIPMENT DRAINS AND OVERFLOWS
2.3 PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
A. Provide hangers and supports that comply with MSS SP-58.
1. If type of hanger or support for a particular situation is not indicated, select
appropriate type using MSS SP-58 recommendations.
2.4 UNIONS, FLANGES, MECHANICAL COUPLINGS, AND DIELECTRIC
CONNECTIONS
A. Unions for Pipe 2 Inches (50 mm) and Under:
B. Flanges for Pipe Over 2 Inches (50 mm):
C. Mechanical Couplings for Grooved and Shouldered Joints: Two or more curved
housing segments with continuous key to engage pipe groove, circular C-profile gasket,
and bolts to secure and compress gasket.
1. Dimensions and Testing: In accordance with AWWA C606.
2. Mechanical Couplings: Comply with ASTM F1476.
3. Bolts and Nuts: Hot dipped galvanized or zinc-electroplated steel.
4. When pipe is field grooved, provide coupling manufacturer's grooving tools.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Ream pipe and tube ends. Remove burrs. Bevel plain end ferrous pipe.
B. Prepare pipe for grooved mechanical joints as required by coupling manufacturer.
C. Remove scale and dirt on inside and outside before assembly.
D. Prepare piping connections to equipment using jointing system specified.
E. Keep open ends of pipe free from scale and dirt. Protect open ends with temporary
plugs or caps.
F. After completion, fill, clean, and treat systems. Refer to Section 23 2500 for additional
requirements.
3.2 INSTALLATION
B. Route piping in orderly manner, parallel to building structure, and maintain gradient.
C. Install piping to conserve building space and to avoid interfere with use of space.
D. Group piping whenever practical at common elevations.
E. Sleeve pipe passing through partitions, walls and floors.
F. Install firestopping to preserve fire resistance rating of partitions and other elements,
using materials and methods specified in Section 07 8400.
14-400-029-03 / 14-400-029-03 NMSU DHW & HHW CD'S
HYDRONIC PIPING
23 2113 - 3
G. Slope piping and arrange to drain at low points.
H. Install piping to allow for expansion and contraction without stressing pipe, joints, or
connected equipment. Refer to Section 23 0516.
1. Flexible couplings may be used in header piping to accommodate thermal growth,
thermal contraction in lieu of expansion loops.
I.
Pipe Hangers and Supports:
1. Install hangers to provide minimum 1/2 inch (13 mm) space between finished
covering and adjacent work.
2. Place hangers within 12 inches (300 mm) of each horizontal elbow.
3. Use hangers with 1-1/2 inch (38 mm) minimum vertical adjustment. Design
hangers for pipe movement without disengagement of supported pipe.
4. Support vertical piping at every other floor. Support riser piping independently of
connected horizontal piping.
5. Where several pipes can be installed in parallel and at same elevation, provide
multiple or trapeze hangers.
END OF SECTION
14-400-029-03 / 14-400-029-03 NMSU DHW & HHW CD'S
HYDRONIC PIPING
23 2113 - 4
SECTION 23 2123
HYDRONIC PUMPS
PART 2 PRODUCTS
1.1 HVAC PUMPS - GENERAL
A. Provide pumps that operate at specified system fluid temperatures without vapor
B. Products Requiring Electrical Connection: Listed and classified by UL or testing
agency acceptable to authority having jurisdiction as suitable for the purpose specified
and indicated.
END OF SECTION
14-400-029-03 / 14-400-029-03 NMSU DHW & HHW CD'S
HYDRONIC PUMPS
23 2123 - 1
SECTION 23 2123
HYDRONIC PUMPS
PART 2 PRODUCTS
1.1 HVAC PUMPS - GENERAL
A. Provide pumps that operate at specified system fluid temperatures without vapor
B. Products Requiring Electrical Connection: Listed and classified by UL or testing
agency acceptable to authority having jurisdiction as suitable for the purpose specified
and indicated.
END OF SECTION
14-400-029-03 / 14-400-029-03 NMSU DHW & HHW CD'S
HYDRONIC PUMPS
23 2123 - 1
SECTION 23 5233.13
FINNED WATER-TUBE BOILERS
PART 1 GENERAL
A. Boilers.
B. Controls and boiler trim.
C. Hot water connections.
D. Fuel connection.
E. Collector, draft hood, and chimney connection.
F. Collector, induced draft fan, and chimney connection.
G. Circulator.
H. Expansion tank.
A. ANSI Z21.13 - American National Standard for Gas-Fired Low-Pressure Steam and
Hot Water Boilers; 2012.
B. NEMA 250 - Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 Volts Maximum); National
Electrical Manufacturers Association; 2008.
C. NFPA 54 - National Fuel Gas Code; National Fire Protection Association; 2012.
D. NFPA 58 - Liquefied Petroleum Gas Code; National Fire Protection Association; 2014.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Provide data indicating general assembly, components, controls, safety
controls, and wiring diagrams with electrical characteristics and connection
requirements.
B. Manufacturer's Instructions: Indicate assembly, support details, connection
requirements, and include start up instructions.
C. Manufacturer's Field Reports: Indicate condition of equipment after start-up including
control settings and performance chart of control system.
D. Operation and Maintenance Data: Include manufacturer's descriptive literature,
operating instructions, cleaning procedures, replacement parts list, and maintenance and
repair data.
E. Warranty: Submit manufacturer warranty and ensure forms have been completed in
Owner's name and registered with manufacturer.
1.4 WARRANTY
14-400-029-03 / 14-400-029-03 NMSU DHW & HHW CD'S
23 5233.13 - 1
B. Provide a five year warranty to include coverage for heat exchangers.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURED UNITS
A. Hot water natural draft boiler with horizontal grid, finned tube heat exchanger, gas
burning system, refractory combustion chamber, controls, and boiler trim including
circulator and fill system consisting of diaphragm type expansion tank, fill and check
valve, and automatic air vent.
2.2 FABRICATION
A. Assembly: Finned copper tube heat exchanger assembled within combustion chamber
conforming to ASME BPVC-IV and BPVC-VIII-1 requirements, and tested for
maximum working pressure of 160 psi (1100 kPa).
B. Combustion Chamber: Line with interlocking refractory insulating panels of
vermiculite, high temperature cements, asbestos fiber and refractory clay for service
temperatures to 2100 degrees F (1150 degrees C).
C. Exchanger: Fabricate of finned copper tubing with stainless steel baffles and sealed
into bronze, steel, or cast iron headers with silicone O-ring gaskets.
D. Jacket: Galvanized steel with factory applied baked enamel, insulated with foil faced
fiberglass insulation.
2.3 FUEL BURNING SYSTEM
A. Induced Draft Gas Burner: Stainless steel burners for on-off firing and natural gas with
adjustable combustion air supply, gas pressure regulator, diaphragm gas valves, manual
shut-off, intermittent spark or glow coil ignition, thermistor flame sensing device, and
automatic 100% safety gas shut-off.
B. Safety Controls: Energize ignition, limit time for establishment of flame, prevent
opening of gas valve until pilot flame is proven, stop gas flow on ignition failure,
energize blower motor, and after air flow proven allow gas valve to open.
C. Flue Gas Collector and Draft Hood: Integral with boiler casing.
2.4 TRIM
A. ASME rated pressure relief valve set at 45 psi (310 kPa).
B. Low water cut-off and inlet flow switch to automatically prevent burner operation when
water falls below safe level or on low flow through boiler.
2.5 CONTROLS
A. Operating Controls: Pre-wired, factory assembled electric control including pilot safety
and thermocouple transformer, 24-volt gas valve, manual main and pilot valves, and
junction box.
14-400-029-03 / 14-400-029-03 NMSU DHW & HHW CD'S
23 5233.13 - 2
B. Operating temperature controller with outdoor reset to control burner operation to
maintain supply water temperature.
C. Electronic operating temperature controller:
1. NEMA 250 Type 1 enclosure with full cover for wall mounting.
2. Ambient temperature range -30 to 150 degrees F (-34 to 66 degrees C).
3. Adjustable reset ratio of outside air temperature change to discharge control point
change 1:2 to 100:1.
4. Integral set point adjustment 80 to 230 degrees F (27 to 110 degrees C).
5. Electronic primary and outdoor sensors.
6. Suitable for on-off switching of pilot duty single throw double pole relays.
D. High limit temperature controller with automatic reset for burner to prevent boiler water
temperature from exceeding safe system temperature.
2.6 CIRCULATOR
A. Type: Horizontal shaft, single stage, direct connected, with resiliently mounted motor
for in line mounting, oil lubricated, for 125 psi (860 kPa) maximum working pressure.
1. Casing: Cast iron.
2. Impeller: Cadmium plated steel, keyed to shaft.
3. Bearings: Two, oil lubricated bronze sleeves.
4. Shaft: Alloy steel with copper sleeve, integral thrust collar.
5. Seal: Carbon rotating against a stationary ceramic seat, 225 degrees F (107
degrees C) maximum continuous operating temperature.
6. Drive: Flexible coupling.
2.7 DIAPHRAGM TYPE EXPANSION TANK
A. Construction: Welded steel, tested and stamped in accordance with ASME
BPVC-VIII-1; rated for working pressure of 125 psi (860 kPa), with flexible diaphragm
sealed into tank, and steel legs or saddles.
B. Accessories: Pressure gage and air-charging fitting, tank drain; precharge to 12 psi (80
kPa).
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
B. Install boiler and provide connection of natural gas service in accordance with
requirements of NFPA 54 and applicable codes.
C. Install boiler and provide connection of liquified petroleum gas service in accordance
with requirements of NFPA 58 and applicable codes.
14-400-029-03 / 14-400-029-03 NMSU DHW & HHW CD'S
23 5233.13 - 3
SECTION 26 0500
BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes general electrical requirements, and specific requirements on
supports and electrical metering.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Illustrate and indicate style, material, strength, fastening provision, and
finish for each type and size of electrical support component used
B. Shop Drawings:
1. Descriptive information that states conformance to codes, recognized testing, or
manufacturing standards.
2. Manufacturer's name and catalog cuts listing type, model No., catalog No.,
materials, styles, finish.
C. Review submittals for equipment furnished under other Sections prior to installation
and electrical rough-in. Verify location, size, and type of connections. Coordinate
details of equipment connections with supplier and installer.
D. Contractor shall note any deviations from the requirements of the contract plans and
specifications.
A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories shall be listed and labeled as defined
in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having
jurisdiction such as Underwriters Laboratories, Inc., and marked for intended use.
B. Perform Work in accordance with the current edition of the National Electrical Code
(NEC) and the National Electrical Safety Code (NESC).
C. Perform Work in accordance with local ordinances, codes and statutes.
D. Work shown and specified in these Contract Documents establishes the minimum
standard of construction. Comply with any additional requirements of the codes or
local requirements.
1.4 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate chases, slots, inserts, sleeves, and openings with general construction work
and arrange in building structure during progress of construction to facilitate the
electrical installations that follow:
1. Set inserts and sleeves in poured-in-place concrete, masonry work, and other
structural components as they are constructed.
14-400-029-03 / 14-400-029-03 NMSU DHW & HHW CD'S
26 0500 - 1
B. Coordinate installing electrical materials and equipment for efficient flow of the Work.
Coordinate installing large equipment requiring positioning before closing in the
building.
C. Coordinate location of access panels and doors for electrical items that are concealed by
finished surfaces. Comply with the requirements of the NEC.
D. Where electrical identification devices are applied to field-finished surfaces, coordinate
installation of identification devices with completion of finished surface.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 SUPPORTING DEVICES
A. Continuous Slot Channel (Strut) Steel Support Systems: Comply with Metal Framing
Manufacturers Association Standard MFMA-3, factory-fabricated components for field
assembly.
1. Finishes:
a. Hot-dip galvanized: Hot-dip galvanized after fabrication and applied
according to MFMA-3.
b. Electro-galvanized: Electroplated coating of zinc after fabrication and applied
according to MFMA-3.
c. Pre-galvanized: Hot dip galvanized prior to fabrication applied according to
MFMA-3.
2. Fittings and Accessories: Products of channel and angle manufacturer and
designed for use with those items.
3. Fitting and Accessory Materials: Same as channels and angles.
4. Channel Dimensions: Selected for structural loading.
5. Rated Strength: Selected to suit structural loading.
B. Structural Steel for Fabricated Supports and Restraints: ASTM A 36/A 36M, steel
plates, shapes, and bars; black and galvanized.
C. Mounting, Anchoring, and Attachment Components: Items for fastening electrical
items or their supports to building surfaces include the following requirements.
1. Powder-Actuated Fasteners: Threaded-steel stud, for use in hardened Portland
cement concrete, steel, or wood, with tension, shear, and pullout capacities
appropriate for supported loads and building materials where used.
2. Mechanical-Expansion Anchors: Insert-wedge-type, zinc-coated or stainless steel
as required in Part 3 of this specification, for use in hardened Portland cement
concrete with tension, shear, and pullout capacities appropriate for supported loads
and building materials in which used.
3. Through Bolts: Structural type, hex head, high strength. Comply with ASTM
A325.
4. Toggle Bolts: All-steel springhead type.
5. Hanger Rods: Threaded steel.
14-400-029-03 / 14-400-029-03 NMSU DHW & HHW CD'S
26 0500 - 2
2.2 CONDUCTORS IN VERTICAL CONDUIT
A. Support for Conductors in Vertical Conduit: Provide a factory-fabricated assembly
consisting of threaded body and insulating wedging plug or plugs for non-armored
electrical conductors or cables in riser conduits. Plugs shall have number, size, and
shape of conductor gripping pieces as required to suit individual conductors or cables
supported. Body shall be malleable iron.
2.3 EQUIPMENT ENCLOSURES
A. Do not install equipment in a more severe environment than recommended by the
equipment manufacturer. When not indicated, provide enclosures suitable for the
environment in which they are located in accordance with NEMA Standard No. 250.
2.4 DISCONNECT MEANS
A. Provide each motor with a disconnecting means where required by the NEC.
2.5 DEVICE CONNECTIONS
A. Provide suitable lugs or connectors to accommodate line and load side conductors
shown on the Drawings. Where available device connections are inadequate for the
number and/or size of conductors required, provide bus extensions, adapter plates or
power distribution blocks as required.
2.6 TOUCHUP PAINT
A. For Equipment: Equipment manufacturer's paint selected to match installed equipment
finish.
B. Galvanized Surfaces: Zinc-rich paint recommended by item manufacturer.
2.7 FIRESTOPPING
A. Firestopping materials shall meet the requirements of Division 7 - Firestopping.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION
A. Headroom Maintenance: If mounting heights or other location criteria are not
indicated, arrange and install components and equipment to provide the maximum
possible headroom.
B. Materials and Components: Install level, plumb, and parallel and perpendicular to other
building systems and components, unless otherwise indicated.
C. Equipment: Install to facilitate service, maintenance, and repair or replacement of
components. Connect for ease of disconnecting, with minimum interference with other
installations.
D. Working clearance. Provide working clearance as required by the NEC.
14-400-029-03 / 14-400-029-03 NMSU DHW & HHW CD'S
26 0500 - 3
E. Dedicated space. Provide dedicated space for electrical equipment as required by the
NEC.
3.2 ELECTRICAL SUPPORTING DEVICE APPLICATION
A. Damp or Wet Locations and Outdoors: Provide hot dip galvanized steel slot (strut)
channel, aluminum channel, or stainless steel (Type 304 or 316) channel. Provide
stainless steel anchor bolts.
B. Indoor, Dry Locations: Provide pre-galvanized or electro-galvanized steel slot (strut)
channel.
C. Do not attach aluminum channel directly to concrete. Provide plastic spacers or coat
surfaces in contact with concrete with epoxy paint.
D. For channel attached to aluminum handrails or other aluminum structures, provide
aluminum or stainless steel channels with stainless steel hardware.
E. Field Cuts: Grind all edges smooth, make cuts square unless angles are required for
installation. Paint field cuts of galvanized steel channel with a galvanizing solution or
zinc rich paint.
3.3 SUPPORT INSTALLATION
A. Install support devices to securely and permanently fasten and support electrical
components.
1. Do not fasten supports to piping, ceiling support wires, ductwork, mechanical
equipment, or conduit.
2. Install surface-mounted cabinets and panelboards with minimum of four anchors.
3. Provide metal channel supports to stand cabinets and conduit one inch off wall in
wet locations.
4. Bridge studs top and bottom with channels to support flush-mounted cabinets and
panelboards in stud walls.
B. Install individual and multiple raceway hangers and riser clamps to support raceways.
Provide U-bolts, clamps, attachments, and other hardware necessary for hanger
assemblies and for securing hanger rods and conduits.
C. Support parallel runs of horizontal raceways together on trapeze- or bracket-type
hangers.
D. Size supports for multiple raceway installations so capacity can be increased by a 25
percent minimum in the future.
E. Support individual horizontal raceways with separate, malleable-iron pipe hangers or
clamps.
F. Install 1/4-inch- (6-mm-) diameter or larger threaded steel hanger rods, unless otherwise
indicated.
G. Spring-steel fasteners specifically designed for supporting single conduits or tubing may
be used instead of malleable-iron hangers for 1-1/2-inch (38-mm) and smaller raceways
serving lighting and receptacle branch circuits above suspended ceilings and for
14-400-029-03 / 14-400-029-03 NMSU DHW & HHW CD'S
26 0500 - 4
fastening raceways to slotted channel and angle supports. Do not use spring steel
fasteners in damp, wet or corrosive locations.
H. Arrange supports in vertical runs so the weight of raceways and enclosed conductors is
carried entirely by raceway supports, with no weight load on raceway terminals.
I.
Simultaneously install vertical conductor supports with conductors.
J.
Separately support cast boxes that are threaded to raceways and used for fixture
support. Support sheet-metal boxes directly from the building structure or by bar
hangers. If bar hangers are used, attach bar to raceways on opposite sides of the box
and support the raceway with an approved fastener not more than 24 inches (610 mm)
from the box.
K. Install metal channel racks for mounting cabinets, panelboards, disconnect switches,
control enclosures, pull and junction boxes, transformers, and other devices unless
components are mounted directly to structural elements of adequate strength.
L. Install sleeves for cable and raceway penetrations of concrete slabs and walls unless
core-drilled holes are used. Install sleeves for cable and raceway penetrations of
masonry and fire-rated gypsum walls and of all other fire-rated floor and wall
assemblies. Install sleeves during erection of concrete and masonry walls.
M. Securely fasten electrical items and their supports to the building structure per the
following requirements, unless otherwise indicated. Perform fastening according to the
following requirements unless other fastening methods are indicated. Verify with
manufacturer the suitability of fasteners in subparagraphs below for use in lightweight
concrete or concrete slabs less than 4 inches (100 mm) thick. Fasteners which fracture
or damage surfaces are not acceptable.
1. Wood: Fasten with wood screws or screw-type nails.
2. Masonry: Toggle bolts on hollow masonry units and expansion bolts on solid
masonry units.
3. New Concrete: Concrete inserts with machine screws and bolts.
4. Existing Concrete: Expansion bolts.
5. Instead of expansion bolts, threaded studs driven by a powder charge and provided
with lock washers may be used.
6. Steel: Welded threaded studs or spring-tension clamps on steel.
7. Welding to steel structure may be used only for threaded studs, not for conduits,
pipe straps, or other items.
8. Light Steel: Sheet-metal screws.
9. Fasteners: Select so the load applied to each fastener does not exceed 25 percent
of its proof-test load.
3.4 CONDUCTORS IN VERTICAL CONDUIT
A. Provide support for conductors in vertical conduit where required by Article 300 of the
NEC.
14-400-029-03 / 14-400-029-03 NMSU DHW & HHW CD'S
26 0500 - 5
3.5 FIRESTOPPING
A. Apply U.L. listed firestopping to cable and raceway penetrations of fire-rated floor and
wall assemblies to achieve fire-resistance rating of the assembly. See architectural
drawings for locations of fire rated floors, walls, ceilings and partitions.
3.6 EXISTING ELECTRICAL WORK
A. Verify that abandoned wiring and equipment serve only abandoned facilities.
B. Disconnect existing electrical systems in walls, floors, and ceilings indicated for
removal.
C. Existing Receptacle and Lighting circuits and devices which are not scheduled for
demolition, but which are inadvertently affected by demolition activities, will be
restored to full function.
D. Coordinate utility service outages and reconnections with Utility Company and Owner.
E. Provide temporary wiring and connections to maintain existing systems in service
1. Existing Electrical Service: Maintain existing system in service until new service
is complete and existing loads are reconnected.
2. Existing Electrical Feeders and Branch Circuits: Maintain feeders and branch
circuits in service until replacement circuits are installed and ready to connect.
3. Existing Fire Alarm System: Maintain existing system in service.
F. Maintain access to existing, active electrical installations.
G. Clean and repair existing materials and equipment which remain or are to be reused.
1. Panelboards: Clean and check tightness of electrical connections. Replace
damaged circuit breakers and provide closure plates for vacant positions. Revise
circuit directory.
3.7 CUTTING AND PATCHING
A. Cut, channel, chase, and drill floors, walls, partitions, ceilings, and other surfaces
required to permit electrical installations. Perform cutting by skilled mechanics of
trades involved.
B. Repair and refinish disturbed finish materials and other surfaces to match adjacent
undisturbed surfaces. Install new fireproofing where existing firestopping has been
disturbed. Repair and refinish materials and other surfaces by skilled mechanics of
trades involved.
3.8 REFINISHING AND TOUCHUP PAINTING
A. Refinish and touch up painting:
1. Clean damaged and disturbed areas and apply primer, intermediate, and finish
coats to suit the degree of damage at each location.
2. Follow paint manufacturer's written instructions for surface preparation and for
timing and application of successive coats.
14-400-029-03 / 14-400-029-03 NMSU DHW & HHW CD'S
26 0500 - 6
3.
4.
Repair damage to galvanized finishes with zinc-rich paint recommended by
manufacturer.
Repair damage to PVC or paint finishes with matching touchup coating
recommended by manufacturer.
3.9 CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A. On completion of installation, inspect and clean all electrical equipment and enclosures
including panelboard, switchboard, transformer, motor control center, control panel and
electrical enclosure interiors, light fixtures and lenses, outlet boxes, floor mounted
devices, fittings, and wiring devices. Remove burrs, dirt, paint spots, and construction
debris.
B. Protect equipment and installations and maintain conditions to ensure that coatings,
finishes, and cabinets are without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial
Completion.
END OF SECTION
14-400-029-03 / 14-400-029-03 NMSU DHW & HHW CD'S
26 0500 - 7
SECTION 26 0519
CONDUCTORS AND CABLES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes building wires and cables and associated connectors, splices, and
terminations for wiring systems rated 600 V and less.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Descriptive information that states conformance to codes, recognized testing or
B. Manufacturer's name and catalog cuts listing manufacturer, type, model No., catalog
No., conductor material and insulation. Electrical characteristics such as voltage and
ampacity, NEC designation and plenum rating where applicable.
A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in
NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction,
and marked for intended use.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 CONDUCTORS AND CABLES
A. Power and Lighting Circuits: Provide No. 12 AWG minimum conductors.
B. Conductor Material: Copper complying with ICEA S-95-658 /NEMA WC70 , solid
conductor for No. 10 AWG and smaller, stranded for No. 8 AWG and larger.
C. Service entrance, feeders, branch circuits and field wired control circuits operating at
120 volts or greater: 600 Volt THW or THWN insulation unless otherwise indicated.
D. Cord Drops and Portable Appliance Connections: Type SO, hard service cord.
E. MC cable shall not be used.
F. NM and NMC cable shall not be used.
2.2 CONNECTORS AND SPLICES
A. Description: Factory-fabricated connectors and splices of size, ampacity rating,
material, type, and class for application and service indicated. Soldered and taped
connections are not acceptable.
B. Connections: For No. 10 AWG wire and smaller, provide solderless connectors, Ideal
"Wire Nuts," 3M "Scotchlok," or equal. For No. 8 AWG wire and larger, provide
solderless connectors, Burndy, O.Z., Penn-Union or equal. All uninsulated joints shall
14-400-029-03 / 14-400-029-03 NMSU DHW & HHW CD'S
26 0519 - 1
be taped over with plastic tape, 3M "Scotch Brand" No. 33 Plus or equal, to provide an
insulation value greater than or equal to that on the wire.
2.3 TERMINATIONS
A. Compression type solderless lugs shall be tin plated cast copper and U.L. listed for the
application. Terminal lugs shall have a temperature rating that is equal or greater than
that of the wire and terminal equipment.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 CONDUCTOR DERATING
A. Conductors shown on the drawings are based on no more than three current carrying
conductors in a raceway. If the Contractor chooses to combine homeruns resulting in
more than three current carrying conductors in a raceway then the Contractor shall
apply the NEC derating factors for more than three current carrying conductors in a
raceway
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Conceal cables in finished walls, ceilings, and floors, unless otherwise indicated.
B. Use manufacturer-approved pulling compound or lubricant where necessary; compound
used must not deteriorate conductor or insulation. Do not exceed manufacturer's
recommended maximum pulling tensions and sidewall pressure values.
C. Use pulling means, including fish tape, cable, rope, and basket-weave wire/cable grips
that will not damage cables or raceway.
3.3 CONNECTIONS
A. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published
torque-tightening values. If manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those
specified in UL 486A and UL 486B.
B. Terminations: Terminate stranded wire at screw terminals with compression type lugs.
Terminations made by looping stranded wire around a terminal screw are not
acceptable.
C. Make splices and taps that are compatible with conductor material and that possess
equivalent or better mechanical strength and insulation ratings than unspliced
conductors.
END OF SECTION
14-400-029-03 / 14-400-029-03 NMSU DHW & HHW CD'S
26 0519 - 2
SECTION 26 0533
RACEWAYS AND BOXES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes raceways, fittings, boxes, enclosures, and cabinets for electrical
wiring.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For conduit, surface raceways, wireways and fittings, floor boxes,
hinged-cover enclosures, and cabinets.
B. Shop Drawings:
materials, styles, finish.
1.4 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate layout and installation of raceways, boxes, enclosures, cabinets, and
suspension system with other construction that penetrates ceilings or is supported by
them, including light fixtures, HVAC equipment, fire-suppression system, and partition
assemblies.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 METAL CONDUIT AND TUBING
A. Rigid Metal Conduit (RMC) - Steel: ANSI C80.1.
B. Intermediate Metal Conduit (IMC): ANSI C80.6.
C. Electrical Metallic Tubing (EMT) and Fittings: ANSI C80.3.
1. Fittings: Compression type only. Hydraulically crimped or set screw connections
are not acceptable.
D. Flexible Metal Conduit (FMC): Zinc-coated steel.
E. Fittings: NEMA FB 1; compatible with conduit and tubing materials.
14-400-029-03 / 14-400-029-03 NMSU DHW & HHW CD'S
RACEWAYS AND BOXES
26 0533 - 1
2.2 METAL WIREWAYS
A. Material and Construction: Sheet metal sized and shaped as indicated. Indoor
enclosures shall be rated NEMA 1 and outdoor or wet location enclosures shall be rated
NEMA 3R unless otherwise indicated.
B. Fittings and Accessories: Include couplings, offsets, elbows, expansion joints, adapters,
hold-down straps, end caps, and other fittings to match and mate with wireways as
required for complete system.
C. Select features, unless otherwise indicated, as required to complete wiring system and
to comply with NFPA 70.
D. Wireway Covers: Screw-cover type.
E. Finish: Manufacturer's standard enamel finish.
2.3 BOXES AND ENCLOSURES
A. Enclosure ratings: NEMA 250.
B. Sheet Metal Outlet and Device Boxes: NEMA OS 1.
C. Cast-Metal Outlet and Device Boxes: NEMA FB 1, Type FD, with gasketed cover.
D. Junction and Pull Boxes:
1. Boxes less than 100 cubic inches: NEMA OS 1.
2. Boxes larger than 100 cubic inches: UL 50.
3. Screw covers shall be used unless otherwise indicated on drawings.
2.4 FACTORY FINISHES
A. Finish: For raceway, enclosure, or cabinet components, provide manufacturer's
standard paint applied to factory-assembled surface raceways, enclosures, and cabinets
before shipping.
2.5 WEATHERPROOF HUBS
A. Provide weatherproof hubs for any conduit entry on the top of all enclosures located in
damp or wet locations.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 RACEWAY APPLICATION
A. General: Use of any of the conduit types in accordance with NEC, Articles 342
through 360, is acceptable with the following exceptions.
1. EMT shall not be installed in concrete, in wet locations as defined by NEC, in wet
locations as noted on the Drawings, or in direct contact with the earth.
2. Nonmetallic conduit shall only be installed underground or encased within poured
concrete structures. Nonmetallic conduit shall be adapted to the appropriate type
14-400-029-03 / 14-400-029-03 NMSU DHW & HHW CD'S
RACEWAYS AND BOXES
26 0533 - 2
of metal conduit before it emerges from concealment. All elbows shall be
metallic.
B. Outdoors, damp:
1. Exposed: RMC or IMC.
2. Concealed: RMC or IMC.
3. Connection to Vibrating Equipment (Including Transformers and Hydraulic,
Pneumatic, Electric Solenoid, or Motor-Driven Equipment): LFMC.
4. Boxes and Enclosures: NEMA 3R unless otherwise indicated.
C. Outdoors, wet:
Pneumatic, Electric Solenoid, or Motor-Driven Equipment): LFMC.
4. Boxes and Enclosures: NEMA 3R unless otherwise indicated.
D. Indoors, dry:
1. Exposed: EMT.
2. Concealed: EMT.
Pneumatic, Electric Solenoid, or Motor-Driven Equipment): FMC.
4. Connections to light fixtures above accessible ceilings: FMC.
5. Boxes and Enclosures: Type 1 unless otherwise indicated.
E. Indoors, damp:
Pneumatic, Electric Solenoid, or Motor-Driven Equipment): use LFMC.
5. Boxes and Enclosures: Type 4, stainless steel, unless otherwise indicated.
F. Indoors, wet:
Pneumatic, Electric Solenoid, or Motor-Driven Equipment): use LFMC.
5. Boxes and Enclosures: Type 4, stainless steel unless otherwise indicated.
G. Conduit Penetrations: All conduits penetrating through floor slabs, concrete walls or
grade shall be galvanized rigid steel with factory PVC coating or wrapped with PVC
tape. Coating shall extend 2 inches minimum above slab or finished grade. PVC tape
shall be 3M Scotchrap 50 (10 mils) or equal. Conduit shall be cleaned and painted with
3M Scotchrap pipe primer and tape shall be half-lapped to provide a minimum of 20
mils coating at any point on the conduit. Adapters from buried PVC conduit to
galvanized rigid steel conduit shall be wrapped with PVC tape after assembly.
14-400-029-03 / 14-400-029-03 NMSU DHW & HHW CD'S
RACEWAYS AND BOXES
26 0533 - 3
H. Minimum Raceway Size: 3/4-inch trade size (DN 21).
I.
Raceway Fittings: Compatible with raceways and suitable for use and location.
1. Intermediate Steel Conduit: Use threaded rigid steel conduit fittings, unless
2. EMT: Use compression fittings only. Set screw fittings are not acceptable.
J.
Do not install aluminum conduits embedded in or in contact with concrete or earth.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Keep raceways at least 8 inches (150 mm) away from parallel runs of flues and steam or
hot-water pipes. Install horizontal raceway runs above water and steam piping.
B. Complete raceway installation before starting conductor installation.
C. Support raceways as specified in Division 26 Section "Basic Electrical Materials and
Methods."
D. Install temporary closures to prevent foreign matter from entering raceways.
E. Protect stub-ups from damage where conduits rise through floor slabs. Arrange so
curved portions of bends are not visible above the finished slab.
F. Make bends and offsets so ID is not reduced. Keep legs of bends in the same plane and
keep straight legs of offsets parallel, unless otherwise indicated.
G. Conceal conduit within finished walls, ceilings, and floors, unless otherwise indicated.
1. Install concealed raceways with a minimum of bends in the shortest practical
distance, considering type of building construction and obstructions, unless
2. Conduits in unfinished areas associated with exposed equipment, and raceways on
open ceiling construction, may be installed exposed.
H. RMC and IMC: Support and securely fasten in place at intervals not to exceed 10'-0".
I.
EMT: Support and securely fasten in place at intervals not to exceed 5'-0".
J.
Install exposed raceways parallel or at right angles to nearby surfaces or structural
members and follow surface contours as much as possible.
1. Run parallel or banked raceways together on common supports.
2. When bending parallel conduits, all conduit bends shall have the same radius or
concentric bends.
3. Raceway installation shall not obstruct light fixtures, electrical equipment and
mechanical assemblies.
K. Join raceways with fittings designed and approved for that purpose and make joints
tight.
1. Use insulating bushings to protect conductors.
L. Terminations:
1. Where raceways are terminated with locknuts and bushings, align raceways to
enter squarely and install locknuts with dished part against box. Use two locknuts,
one inside and one outside box.
14-400-029-03 / 14-400-029-03 NMSU DHW & HHW CD'S
RACEWAYS AND BOXES
26 0533 - 4
2.
Where raceways are terminated with threaded hubs, screw raceways or fittings
tightly into hub so end bears against wire protection shoulder. Where chase
nipples are used, align raceways so coupling is square to box; tighten chase nipple
so no threads are exposed.
M. Install pull lines in empty raceways. Use polypropylene or monofilament plastic line
with not less than 200-lb (90-kg) tensile strength. Leave at least 12 inches (300 mm) of
slack at each end of pull line and tie to a support so that the line can not slip into
conduit.
N. Telephone and Signal System Raceways, 2-Inch Trade Size (DN 53) and Smaller: In
addition to above requirements, install indoor raceways in maximum lengths of 150 feet
(45 m) and with a maximum of two 90-degree bends or equivalent. Separate lengths
with pull or junction boxes where necessary to comply with these requirements.
O. Install raceway-sealing fittings at suitable, approved, and accessible locations and fill
them with UL-listed sealing compound. For concealed raceways, install each fitting in
a flush steel box with a blank cover plate having a finish similar to that of adjacent
plates or surfaces. Install raceway-sealing fittings at the following points:
1. Where conduits pass from warm to cold locations, such as boundaries of
refrigerated spaces.
2. Hazardous locations or where otherwise required by NFPA 70.
P. Flexible Connections: Use maximum of 72 inches (1830 mm) of flexible conduit for
recessed and semi-recessed lighting fixtures.
Q. Install hinged-cover enclosures and cabinets plumb. Support at each corner.
R. Fire Rated Penetrations: Where conductor raceways or cable trays penetrate fire rated
wall or floor assemblies, openings shall be firestopped with UL listed sealants, barriers,
or other devices specifically approved for the purpose.
S. Temperature:
1. Conduits exposed to changes in temperature or attached to structures that may
expand or contract shall be provided with expansion fittings.
2. Nonmetallic or PVC coated conduits shall not be installed in areas where the
temperature may exceed 122 degrees F for extended periods of time.
T. Provide raceway expansion joints where raceway crosses building and structural
expansion joints.
3.3 PENETRATION SLEEVES
A. Sleeves: Furnish sleeves for conduit passing through concrete walls, partitions, beams,
floors and roof while same are under construction. A conduit sleeve shall be one size
larger than the size of conduit which it serves except where sealing bushings are used in
sleeves through walls below grade. Sleeves are not required for conduits installed
before the wall, partition, floor, or roof is constructed.
B. Sleeves Set in Concrete Floor: Sleeves shall be 18-gauge galvanized steel or PVC.
Sleeves shall extend 2 inches above the finished floor. Conduit passing through
concrete or masonry walls shall have Schedule 40 galvanized steel sleeves. Sleeves
14-400-029-03 / 14-400-029-03 NMSU DHW & HHW CD'S
RACEWAYS AND BOXES
26 0533 - 5
shall be set flush with finished wall. If holes and sleeves are not properly installed and
cutting and patching become necessary, it shall be done at no expense to Owner.
Undertake no cutting or patching without first securing approval. Where penetrations
must be waterproofed, properly caulk with oakum and run full of asphalt mastic or
silicone rubber caulking.
C. Sleeves Penetrating Walls Below Grade: Sleeves shall be Schedule 40 black steel pipe
with 1/4-inch thick steel plate secured to the pipe with continuous fillet weld or a
factory made sealing fitting employing pressure rings and sealing grommet. The plate
shall be located in the middle of the wall and shall be 1/4-inch wider all around than the
sleeve which it encircles. The entire assembly shall be hot-dipped galvanized after
fabrication.
3.4 PROTECTION
A. Provide final protection and maintain conditions that ensure coatings, finishes, and
cabinets are without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.
1. Repair damage to galvanized finishes with zinc-rich paint recommended by
manufacturer.
2. Repair damage to PVC or paint finishes with matching touchup coating
recommended by manufacturer.
3.5 CLEANING
A. After completing installation of exposed, factory-finished raceways and boxes, inspect
exposed finishes and repair damaged finishes. Match factory finish with same material
and color.
END OF SECTION
14-400-029-03 / 14-400-029-03 NMSU DHW & HHW CD'S
RACEWAYS AND BOXES
26 0533 - 6
SECTION 26 0553
ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes electrical identification materials and devices required to comply
with ANSI C2, NFPA 70, OSHA standards, and authorities having jurisdiction, and to
provide a clearly labeled, easy to operate and maintain system.
B. A unique wire number shall be assigned to each control and alarm circuit conductor.
Letter prefixes may be used. Markers displaying the wire number shall be securely
attached to the conductor at all splices and at each and every connection to control
panels, terminal strips, control stations, indicators, starters, contacts, sensors, relays and
similar equipment.
C. Items requiring nameplates are listed in part 3 of this section.
D. Identification of each phase conductor of power and lighting circuits shall be
accomplished by color-coding. The color assigned to a particular phase shall be
consistent throughout the work.
E. Power feeder circuits 100 amps and larger, 600V and below, and all medium voltage
circuits shall be uniquely identified with a circuit number and the panel of origin.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each electrical identification product provided. Submit
manufacturers literature, part numbers, specification sheets, and installation
instructions.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 NAMEPLATES AND SIGNS
A. Safety Signs: Comply with ANSI C2, NFPA 70 and OSHA 1910.145.
B. Engraved Plastic Nameplates and Signs: Engraving stock, melamine plastic laminate,
minimum 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) thick for signs up to 20 sq. in. (129 sq. cm) and 1/8 inch
(3.2 mm) thick for larger sizes.
1. Engraved legend with black letters on white face.
2. Punched or drilled for mechanical fasteners.
C. Baked-Enamel Signs for Interior Use: Preprinted aluminum signs, punched or drilled
for fasteners, with colors, legend, and size required for the application. 1/4-inch
(6.4-mm) grommets in corners for mounting.
D. Exterior, Metal-Backed, Butyrate Signs: Weather-resistant, nonfading, preprinted,
cellulose-acetate butyrate signs with 0.0396-inch (1-mm) galvanized-steel backing; and
14-400-029-03 / 14-400-029-03 NMSU DHW & HHW CD'S
26 0553 - 1
with colors, legend, and size required for the application. 1/4-inch (6.4-mm) grommets
in corners for mounting.
E. Provide stainless steel nameplates, 0.025-inch thick minimum, 1.5 inches across, square
or round, with stamped lettering for field mounted measurement and control devices.
Provide Seton Name Plate Company, New Haven, Connecticut Style 250-S, SVT-15-S,
or equal.
F. Lettering Size:
1. For panelboards, motor control centers, transformers, floor-mounted control panel,
and switchboards: 0.75-inch high minimum.
2. For enclosed circuit breakers, safety switches, manual motor starters, magnetic
motor starters, lighting contactors, wall-mounted control panel, automatic transfer
switches, variable frequency drives and cables in manholes or handholes: 0.5-inch
high minimum.
3. For device legend plates: 0.125-inch high minimum.
4. For all other nameplates: 0.25-inch high minimum.
2.2 POWER CONDUCTORS
A. Colored Adhesive Tape: Self-adhesive vinyl tape not less than 3 mils thick by 1 to 2
inches wide (0.08 mm thick by 25 to 51 mm wide).
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Manufacturers nameplate shall remain attached to each piece of equipment or device.
Do not obscure the manufacturer's nameplate with mounting hardware, paint or the
device designation nameplate.
B. Identification Materials and Devices: Install at locations for most convenient viewing
without interference with operation and maintenance of equipment.
C. Lettering, Colors, and Graphics: Coordinate names, abbreviations, colors, and other
designations with corresponding designations in the Contract Documents or with those
required by codes and standards. Use consistent designations throughout Project.
D. Align markers so that numbering/lettering is visible from the access opening of the
panel or device.
E. Sequence of Work: If identification is applied to surfaces that require finish, install
identification after completing finish work.
F. Color-Coding of Secondary Phase Conductors: Use the following colors for power and
lighting phase conductors:
1. 208-volt, 3-phase:Red, Black and Blue
2. 480-volt, 3-phase:Yellow, Brown and Orange
3. 240-volt, 1-phase:Red and Black
4. Neutrals for 277 and 480-volt: Gray
14-400-029-03 / 14-400-029-03 NMSU DHW & HHW CD'S
26 0553 - 2
5.
6.
7.
Neutrals for 120, 208, and 240-volt: White
a. Neutrals for multi-wire circuits shall have a black, red or blue stripe to match
the phase color.
All Grounds: Green
Factory apply color the entire length of conductors, except the following
field-applied, color-coding methods may be used instead of factory-coded wire for
sizes larger than No. 10 AWG:
a. Colored, pressure-sensitive plastic tape in half-lapped turns for a distance of 6
inches (150 mm) from terminal points and in boxes where splices or taps are
made. Apply last two turns of tape with no tension to prevent possible
unwinding. Use ¾” inch minimum wide tape in colors specified. Adjust tape
bands to avoid obscuring cable identification markings.
b. Colored cable ties applied in groups of three ties of specified color to each
wire at each terminal or splice point starting 3 inches (76 mm) from the
terminal and spaced 3 inches (76 mm) apart. Apply with a special tool or
pliers, tighten to a snug fit, and cut off excess length.
G. Power Feeder Circuit Identification: Plastic laminate tags for cables, feeders, and
power circuits in vaults, pull and junction boxes, manholes, and switchboard rooms.
1. Legend: 1/4-inch- (6.4-mm-) letter and number engraving with legend
corresponding to indicated circuit designations.
2. Tag Fasteners: Nylon cable ties.
H. Apply identification to equipment as follows:
1. Indicate equipment name or designation, for example: PANEL LA
2. Indicate voltage, phase and wire characteristics, for example: 120/208 VOLTS, 3
PH, 4W.
I.
Apply identification to junction boxes as follows:
1. Identify all junction boxes 4” x 4” and larger
2. For power circuits identify power source and circuit number if applicable, for
example LA-12.
3. For other systems identify the system, for example: TEL, DATA, or FA
4. Use laminated plastic nameplates or permanent marker on the cover or door of the
junction box.
J.
Method of nameplate attachment:
1. Attach stamped stainless steel nameplates to the device with stainless steel wire or
chain or secure under a case screw(s) not removed during normal maintenance or
servicing.
2. Attach all other laminated plastic nameplates with screws, rivets or adhesive.
Double-sided tape is not acceptable. When adhesive is used, clean and degrease
surfaces.
3. Attach nameplates so that the enclosure rating for dust or moisture is not impaired.
K. Apply identification to conductors as follows:
1. Conductors to Be Extended in the Future: Indicate source and circuit numbers.
14-400-029-03 / 14-400-029-03 NMSU DHW & HHW CD'S
26 0553 - 3
2.
3.
Multiple Power or Lighting Circuits in the Same Enclosure: Identify each
conductor with source, voltage, circuit number, and phase. Use color-coding to
identify circuits' voltage and phase.
Multiple Control and Communication Circuits in the Same Enclosure: Identify
each conductor by its system and circuit designation. Use a consistent system of
tags, color-coding, or cable marking tape.
L. Apply warning, caution, and instruction signs as follows:
1. Warnings, Cautions, and Instructions: Install to ensure safe operation and
maintenance of electrical systems and of items to which they connect. Install
engraved plastic-laminated instruction signs with approved legend where
instructions are needed for system or equipment operation. Install metal-backed
butyrate signs for outdoor items.
2. Emergency Operation: Install engraved laminated signs with white legend on red
background with minimum 3/8-inch (9-mm) high lettering for emergency
instructions on power transfer, load shedding, and other emergency operations.
M. Equipment Identification Labels: Engraved plastic laminate. Install on each unit of
equipment, including central or master unit of each system. This includes power,
lighting, communication, signal, and alarm systems, unless units are specified with their
own self-explanatory identification. Apply labels for each unit of the following
categories of equipment as follows or as indicated.
1. Enclosed circuit breakers.
2. Panelboards, electrical cabinets, and enclosures.
END OF SECTION
14-400-029-03 / 14-400-029-03 NMSU DHW & HHW CD'S
26 0553 - 4
SECTION 26 2416
PANELBOARDS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes panelboards for systems 600 volts and below.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings: Include dimensions and manufacturers' technical data on features,
performance, electrical characteristics, ratings, and finishes. For each panelboard and
related equipment provide the following:
1. Dimensioned plans, elevations, sections, and details. Show tabulations of installed
devices, equipment features, and ratings. Include the following:
a. Enclosure types and construction details.
b. Bus configuration, current, and voltage ratings.
c. Short-circuit current rating of panelboards and overcurrent protective devices.
d. Features, characteristics, ratings, and factory settings of individual overcurrent
protective devices and auxiliary components.
e. Breaker layout and schedule.
B. Operation and Maintenance Data: For panelboards and components to include in
emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. In addition to items specified in
Section 01 3300 include the following:
1. Manufacturer's written instructions for testing and adjusting overcurrent protective
devices.
2. Manufacturer's written instructions provided with equipment.
A. Source Limitations: Obtain panelboards, overcurrent protective devices, components,
and accessories from a single manufacturer.
B. Comply with Federal Specification W-P-115b Type 1, Class 1 and NEMA PB 1.
1.4 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate layout and installation of panelboards and components with other
construction that penetrates walls or is supported by them, including electrical and other
types of equipment, raceways, piping, and encumbrances to workspace clearance
requirements.
14-400-029-03 / 14-400-029-03 NMSU DHW & HHW CD'S
PANELBOARDS
26 2416 - 1
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of
the following:
1. Panelboards, Overcurrent Protective Devices, Controllers, Contactors, and
Accessories:
a. Square D.
b. Eaton Corporation; Cutler-Hammer Products.
c. General Electric Co.; Electrical Distribution & Protection Div.
2.2 PANELBOARDS
A. Enclosures: Flush- or surface-mounted cabinets as indicated on drawings. Enclosure
ratings shall be per NEMA 250.
1. Front: Secured to box with concealed trim clamps. For surface-mounted fronts,
match box dimensions; for flush-mounted fronts, overlap box.
2. Door: Provide all panels with hinged door and keyed lock.
3. Finish: Manufacturer's standard enamel finish over corrosion-resistant treatment
or primer coat.
4. Directory Card: With transparent protective cover, mounted in metal frame, inside
panelboard door.
B. Phase and Ground Buses:
1. Material: Hard-drawn copper, 98 percent conductivity or tin-plated aluminum.
2. Equipment Ground Bus: Adequate for feeder and branch-circuit equipment ground
conductors; bonded to box.
C. Service Equipment Label: UL labeled for use as service equipment for panelboards
used as the main service equipment.
D. Future Devices: Provide mounting brackets, bus connections, circuit breaker fingers or
stabs and all necessary appurtenances required for future installation of circuit breakers
in all positions indicated as a space.
2.3 PANELBOARD SHORT-CIRCUIT RATING
A. Fully rated to interrupt symmetrical short-circuit current available at terminals. Series
rating is not acceptable.
2.4 OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICES
A. Molded-Case Circuit Breaker:
1. Circuit breakers shall meet the requirements of UL 489.
2. Interrupting Capacity: Provide circuit breakers with interrupting capacities equal
to or greater than the available fault currents shown on the Drawings. Minimum
allowable interrupting capacity of 120- and 240-volt circuit breakers is 10,000
14-400-029-03 / 14-400-029-03 NMSU DHW & HHW CD'S
PANELBOARDS
26 2416 - 2
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
RMS symmetrical amperes. Minimum allowable interrupting capacity of 277- and
480-volt circuit breakers is 14,000 RMS symmetrical amperes.
Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers: Inverse time-current element for low-level
overloads, and instantaneous magnetic trip element for short circuits. Adjustable
magnetic trip setting for circuit-breaker frame sizes 250 A and larger.
Electronic trip-unit circuit breakers shall have RMS sensing; field-replaceable
rating plug; and with the following field-adjustable settings:
a. Instantaneous trip.
b. Long- and short-time pickup levels.
c. Long- and short-time time adjustments.
d. Where indicated provide Ground-fault pickup level, time delay, and I2t
response.
e. Provide with a sealable cover over the adjusting means, except for adjustable
magnetic trips on thermal magnetic breakers which do not require covers.
Ground Fault Circuit Interrupter (GFCI) Circuit Breakers for Personnel Protection:
Provide UL Class A ground fault protection in addition to thermal magnetic
protection. Circuit breaker shall conform to UL 943.
Ground Fault Circuit Breakers for Equipment Protection: Provide 30 mA ground
fault protection in addition to thermal magnetic protection.
Multipole units enclosed in a single housing or factory-assembled to operate as a
single unit.
B. Molded-Case Circuit-Breaker Features and Accessories: Standard frame sizes, trip
ratings, and number of poles.
1. Lugs: Suitable for number, size, and conductor materials.
2. Application Listing: Appropriate for application; Type SWD for switching
fluorescent lighting loads.
3. Ground-Fault Protection: Integrally mounted relay and trip unit with adjustable
pickup and time-delay settings, push-to-test feature, and ground-fault indicator.
4. Shunt Trip: As shown on drawings.
5. Undervoltage Trip: As shown on drawings.
6. Auxiliary Contacts: As shown on drawings.
7. Key Interlock Kit: As shown on drawings.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install panelboards and accessories according to NEMA PB 1.1.
B. Provide enclosures rated for environmental conditions at installed location.
1. Outdoors, damp or wet: NEMA 250, Type 3R/12.
2. Indoors, dry: NEMA 250, Type 1.
3. Indoors, damp or wet: NEMA 250, Type 3R/12.
14-400-029-03 / 14-400-029-03 NMSU DHW & HHW CD'S
PANELBOARDS
26 2416 - 3
4.
Kitchen Areas, flush mounted: NEMA 250, Type 4 with stainless steel front
cover.
C. Mount plumb and rigid without distortion of box. Mount recessed panelboards with
fronts uniformly flush with wall finish.
D. Set field-adjustable switches and circuit-breaker trip ranges.
E. Install filler plates in unused spaces.
F. Flush Mounted Panels: Provide spare conduits installed in size and quantity to
accommodate future growth. Spare conduits shall be routed from the panelboard to an
accessible location suitable for adding conduit extensions, such as above ceilings, in
storage and equipment areas, etc. Number and size of conduits for each panelboard
shall be as follows: at least one 1-inch conduit, and one 3/4-inch conduit for every
three spare breakers or unused panelboard spaces.
G. Deliver panelboard keys provided with panels to the Owner.
3.2 IDENTIFICATION
A. Identify field-installed conductors, interconnecting wiring, and panelboards as specified
in Division 26 Section "Electrical Identification."
B. Create a directory to indicate installed circuit loads. Use a computer or typewriter to
create directory; handwritten directories are not acceptable.
A. Load Balancing: After Substantial Completion, but not more than 60 days after Final
Acceptance, measure load balancing and make circuit changes.
1. Measure as directed during period of normal system loading.
2. Perform load-balancing circuit changes outside normal occupancy/working
schedule of the facility and at time directed. Avoid disrupting critical 24-hour
services such as fax machines and on-line data processing, computing,
transmitting, and receiving equipment.
3. After circuit changes, recheck loads during normal load period. Record all load
readings before and after changes and submit test records.
4. Tolerance: Difference exceeding 20 percent between phase loads, within a
panelboard, is not acceptable. Rebalance and recheck as necessary to meet this
minimum requirement.
3.4 CLEANING
A. On completion of installation, inspect interior and exterior of panelboards. Remove
paint splatters and other spots. Vacuum dirt and debris; do not use compressed air to
assist in cleaning. Repair exposed surfaces to match original finish.
END OF SECTION
14-400-029-03 / 14-400-029-03 NMSU DHW & HHW CD'S
PANELBOARDS
26 2416 - 4
SECTION 26 2726
WIRING DEVICES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes wiring devices for systems 600 volts and below, which includes
receptacles, switches and similar equipment.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings:
materials, styles, finish and electrical ratings.
B. Operations and Maintenance Manuals shall include the following information:
1. All information submitted with shop drawings.
2. Manufacturer's maintenance and repair instructions.
3. Manufacturers written instructions provided with the equipment.
A. Source Limitations: Each type of wiring device shall be from a single manufacturer,
and shall be of the same style and model number.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 FINISHES
A. Color:
1. Wiring Devices Connected to Normal Power System: Gray, unless otherwise
indicated on drawings or required by NFPA 70.
2.2 RECEPTACLES
A. 20 Ampere, 125-volt Straight-Blade-Type Receptacles:
1. Comply with NEMA WD 1, NEMA WD 6, FEDERAL SPECIFICATION
W-C-596G, and UL 498.
2. 20 Ampere Grounding type duplex receptacles shall be Specification Grade,
NEMA 5-20R, Cooper No. 5352, Leviton No. 5352, Hubbell No. HBL 5352 Series
or equal.
3. 20 Ampere Grounding type single receptacles shall be Specification Grade, NEMA
5-20R, Cooper No. 5351, Leviton No. 5361, Hubbell No. 5361, or equal.
14-400-029-03 / 14-400-029-03 NMSU DHW & HHW CD'S
WIRING DEVICES
26 2726 - 1
B. Ground Fault Circuit Interrupting (GFCI) 20 Ampere, 125-volt Straight-Blade-Type
Receptacles:
1. Comply with NEMA WD 1, NEMA WD 6, FEDERAL SPECIFICATION
W-C-596G, UL 498 and UL 943.
2. GFCI 20 Ampere Grounding type duplex receptacles shall be Specification Grade,
NEMA 5-20R, Cooper No. XGF20, Leviton No. 6898, Hubbell No. GF5362 Series
or equal.
3. Unless otherwise indicated, feed-through feature shall not be used to protect
downstream receptacles.
C. Faceplates or Covers for 20 Ampere Receptacles:
1. Faceplates for surface-mounted boxes in exposed conduit work shall be galvanized
steel.
2. Faceplates for flush-mounted duplex receptacles shall be stainless steel, Cooper
93000 series, Leviton No. 84000 series, Hubbell No. S8 Series, or equal.
3. Faceplates for flush-mounted single receptacles shall be stainless steel, Cooper
93000 series, Leviton No. 84000 series, Hubbell No. S7 Series, or equal.
4. Faceplates for flush-mounted GFCI and TVSS receptacles shall be stainless steel,
Cooper 93000 series, Leviton No. 84000 series, Hubbell No. S26 Series, or equal.
5. Faceplates for weatherproof single receptacles shall be metal, heavy duty,
self-closing, Cooper 1990 or 992, Leviton No. 4925-2, Hubbell No. 7420 or equal.
6. Faceplates for weatherproof duplex receptacles shall be metal, heavy duty, Red Dot
No. CK5GV, Cooper No. 994 or 989, Leviton 4926 or 4970, Hubbell HBL
5205W0 or HBL 5206W0, or equal.
7. Faceplates for weatherproof ground fault interrupting duplex receptacles shall be
metal, heavy duty, self-closing, Cooper No. 966 or 1966, Leviton 6196-FS or
6196-VFS, Hubbell No. WP26, or WPFS26 or equal.
8. Weatherproof While In Use Covers: Where indicated and at all wet location
receptacles, provide weatherproof while in use covers in accordance with NEC
406.8. Covers shall be die cast aluminum, heavy duty, self-closing, rated NEMA
3R, and be lockable. Provide Thomas & Betts/Red Dot “Code Keeper” (metal)
series, Intermatic “Guardian” WP1000MC (metal) series, or equal.
2.3 SWITCHES
A. 20 Ampere, 120- to 277-volt, Toggle Type Snap Switch:
1. Comply with NEMA WD 1, FEDERAL SPECIFICATION W-C-896F and UL 20.
2. Single pole switches shall be Specification Grade, Cooper No. 2221, Leviton No.
1221, Hubbell No. HBL1221 Series or equal.
3. Double pole switches shall be Specification Grade, Cooper No. 2222, Leviton No.
4. Three-way switches shall be Specification Grade, Cooper No. 2223, Leviton No.
5. Four-way switches shall be Specification Grade, Cooper No. 2224, Leviton No.
14-400-029-03 / 14-400-029-03 NMSU DHW & HHW CD'S
WIRING DEVICES
26 2726 - 2
6.
7.
Key switches (utilizing a flat metal blade type key) shall be Specification Grade,
Cooper No. 2221L, Leviton No. 1221L, Hubbell No. HBL1221L Series or equal.
Pilot light switches (toggle illuminated when switch is “On”) shall be Specification
Grade, Cooper No. 2221PL, Leviton No. 1221PL, Hubbell No. HBL1221PL Series
or equal.
B. Faceplates or covers for Toggle Type Snap Switches:
1. Faceplates for surface-mounted switches in exposed conduit work shall be
galvanized steel.
2. Faceplates for flush-mounted switches shall be stainless steel, Cooper No. 93070
series, Leviton No. 84000, Hubbell No. S Series, or equal.
3. Faceplates for weatherproof switches shall be enclosed with external lever, Red
Dot No. CCT series, Leviton 1432 or equal
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install devices and assemblies level, plumb, and square with building lines.
B. Arrangement of Devices: Unless otherwise indicated, mount flush, with long
dimension vertical, and with grounding terminal of receptacles on top. Group adjacent
switches under single, multigang wall plates.
C. Remove wall plates and protect devices and assemblies during painting.
D. GFCI receptacle wiring. Each location shown as a GFCI receptacle shall have a GFCI
receptacle at that location. Each GFCI receptacle shall be wired to the line side
terminals. Unless specifically noted, no wiring shall be connected to the load terminals
of the GFCI receptacle.
A. Perform the following field tests and inspections and prepare test reports:
1. After installing wiring devices and after electrical circuitry has been energized, test
for proper polarity, ground continuity, and compliance with requirements.
2. Test GFCI operation with both local and remote fault simulations according to
manufacturer's written instructions.
B. Remove malfunctioning units, replace with new units, and retest as specified above.
END OF SECTION
14-400-029-03 / 14-400-029-03 NMSU DHW & HHW CD'S
WIRING DEVICES
26 2726 - 3
SECTION 26 2816
SAFETY SWITCHES AND ENCLOSED CIRCUIT BREAKERS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes safety switches (also known as disconnect switches, distribution
equipment switches, or disconnects) and enclosed circuit breakers.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For safety switches and enclosed circuit breakers.
B. Shop Drawings: For each type of safety switch, enclosed circuit breaker, circuit
breaker, accessory, and component indicated. Include dimensioned elevations, sections,
weights, and manufacturers' technical data on features, performance, electrical
characteristics, ratings, and finishes.
1. Enclosure types, ratings and outline drawings.
2. Current and voltage ratings.
3. Short-circuit current rating.
4. Features, characteristics, ratings, and factory settings of individual overcurrent
protective devices and auxiliary components.
5. Fuse ratings, type, and time-current coordination curves for each fuse.
C. Operation and Maintenance Data: For safety switches and enclosed circuit breakers to
include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. In addition to items
specified in Section 01 3300, include the following:
1. Manufacturer's written instructions for testing and adjusting safety switches and
circuit breakers.
B. Safety switches and all components shall be designed, manufactured and tested in
accordance with the latest applicable standards:
1. NEMA KS-1
2. UL 98
C. Fuses shall be UL listed and conform to NEMA FU1.
1.4 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate layout and installation of switches, circuit breakers, and components with
other construction, including conduit, piping, equipment, and adjacent surfaces.
Maintain required workspace clearances and required clearances for equipment access
doors and panels.
14-400-029-03 / 14-400-029-03 NMSU DHW & HHW CD'S
26 2816 - 1
1.5 EXTRA MATERIALS
A. Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed and that are
packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing
contents.
1. Fuses: Quantity equal to 20 percent of each fuse type and size, but no fewer than 3
of each type and size.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 SAFETY SWITCHES
A. Fusible and Non-Fusible Safety Switches, 1200 amp and smaller: Provide safety
switches, Heavy Duty Type HD conforming to NEMA KS-1 and Federal Specification
W-S-865C, 600-Volts, horsepower rated for motors as required. Provide number of
poles and ampacity as noted or required by Code. Switches shall be fused where
indicated, or where required by UL labeling or listing of equipment served. Handle
shall have provisions for padlocking in the off position and the door shall have
provisions for padlocking closed.
B. All safety switches in publicly accessible spaces shall have provisions for padlocking in
the on position or if indicated on the plans.
C. Switch blades shall be visible when the switch is in the “Off” position and the door is
open.
D. Provide factory installed neutral assembly for switches installed on circuits with a
neutral.
E. Provide factory installed ground lug kits.
F. Safety Switches shall have defeatable door interlocks that prevent the door from
opening when the handle is in the ON position. Defeater mechanism shall be accessible.
G. Fusible switches 30-amp through 600-amperes shall be furnished with rejection type
Class “R” fuse clips and 601-amp through 1200-amperes shall be furnished with Class
“L” fuse clips unless otherwise indicated.
H. The following factory modifications are to be included:
1. Factory installed auxiliary contacts
2.2 FUSES FOR SWITCHES
A. Interrupting Capacity: Provide fuses with interrupting capacities equal to or greater
than the available fault currents shown on the Drawings.
B. Type and Speed: Provide fuses of various types and of the appropriate speeds to
provide selective coordination. Submit time-current coordination curves for each fuse.
C. Labeling: Provide a nameplate or a manufacturer's preprinted label attached adjacent to
each fuse or set of fuses. Label shall indicate manufacturer's name, manufacturer's
catalog number, UL class, voltage rating, current rating, and speed.
14-400-029-03 / 14-400-029-03 NMSU DHW & HHW CD'S
26 2816 - 2
D. Manufacturer: All fuses provided shall be of the same manufacturer.
2.3 ENCLOSED CIRCUIT BREAKERS
A. Enclosed Circuit Breakers: Provide enclosures for thermal magnetic circuit breakers
conforming to NEMA 250 and UL 489. Handle shall have provisions for padlocking in
the off position and the door shall have provisions for padlocking closed.
B. All enclosed circuit breakers in publicly accessible spaces shall have provisions for
padlocking in the on position or if indicated on the plans.
C. Provide factory installed neutral assembly for enclosed circuit breakers installed on
circuits with a neutral.
D. Provide factory installed ground lug kits.
E. Circuit breakers: Provide circuit breakers with the current and voltage ratings as
shown. Circuit breakers shall be UL listed and conform to NEMA AB1, UL 489, and
Federal Specification W-C-375B/GEN.
F. Interrupting Capacity: Provide circuit breakers with interrupting capacities equal to or
greater than the available fault currents shown on the Drawings. Minimum allowable
interrupting capacity of 120- and 240-volt circuit breakers is 10,000 RMS symmetrical
amperes. Minimum allowable interrupting capacity of 277- and 480-volt circuit
breakers is 14,000 RMS symmetrical amperes.
G. Series Rating: Do not apply circuit breakers at series interrupting ratings. Each breaker
shall be capable of interrupting the fault current available at that location in the
distribution system without the assistance of any other device(s).
H. Adjustable Circuit Breakers: Provide with a sealable cover over the adjusting means,
except for adjustable magnetic trips on thermal magnetic breakers which do not require
covers.
I.
Molded Case thermal Magnetic Circuit Breakers: Provide circuit breakers with
overcenter toggle type mechanisms for quick make and break, trip free operation.
Breakers shall provide thermal overload and instantaneous magnetic trip for each pole
of the unit. Breakers larger than 100 amperes shall have adjustable magnetic trip.
Multiple pole breakers shall have one common operating handle.
J.
Ground Fault Trip for Thermal Magnetic Circuit Breakers: Where shown on the
Drawings, provide a ground fault sensing unit and a shunt trip circuit breaker. Ground
fault sensing unit shall be a solid state device and shall conform to UL 1053. Sensing
unit shall have adjustable pickup current and time delay. The unit shall have a test
button and an indicator to show when the unit has tripped. Provide any current
transformers required by the unit.
K. Accessories: Provide auxiliary contacts, shunt tripping mechanisms, handle locking
devices, lugs or terminals, and any other accessory as specified, indicated on the
Drawings, or where required to perform the functions indicated.
14-400-029-03 / 14-400-029-03 NMSU DHW & HHW CD'S
26 2816 - 3
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Provide enclosures rated for environmental conditions at installed location.
1. Outdoors, damp or wet: NEMA 250, Type 3R/12.
2. Indoors, dry: NEMA 250, Type 1.
3. Indoors, damp or wet: NEMA 250, Type 3R/12.
B. Mount plumb and rigid without distortion of enclosure.
3.2 IDENTIFICATION
A. Identify field-installed conductors, interconnecting wiring, and components; provide
warning signs as specified in Division 26 Section "Electrical Identification."
B. Enclosure Nameplates: Label each enclosure with engraved metal or laminated-plastic
nameplate as specified in Division 26 Section "Electrical Identification."
3.3 FUSE APPLICATIONS
A. Service Entrance: Class RK1 time delay.
B. Feeders: Class RK1, fast acting.
C. Motor Branch Circuits: Class RK5 time delay.
D. Spare Fuses: For each fuse of a particular amperage, voltage, type, and speed installed,
provide 20 percent spare fuses, three minimum.
3.4 ADJUSTING
A. Set field-adjustable circuit-breaker trip ranges.
3.5 CLEANING
A. On completion of installation, vacuum dirt and debris from interiors; do not use
compressed air to assist in cleaning.
B. Inspect exposed surfaces and repair damaged finishes.
END OF SECTION
14-400-029-03 / 14-400-029-03 NMSU DHW & HHW CD'S
26 2816 - 4
3.2 SYSTEM STARTUP
A. Provide the services of manufacturer's field representative for starting and testing unit.
3.3 CLOSEOUT ACTIVITIES
A. Train operating personnel in operation and maintenance of units.
3.4 SCHEDULES
A. Finned Water Tube Boilers
1. Drawing Code:
2. Location:
3. Manufacturer:
4. Model:
5. Input:
6. Output:
7. Circulator
a. Flow Rate:
b. Head Pressure:
c. Motor:
8. Expansion Tank Size:
END OF SECTION
14-400-029-03 / 14-400-029-03 NMSU DHW & HHW CD'S
23 5233.13 - 4

AiM 2589 Coca Cola and Field House, Hot Water Upgrades Project

Transcription

Similar documents

Hymax Couplings 1.5

Pharmaceutical Facility Process Piping Installation

ePIPE Blatchley Middle School, AK

INSUL-TEK Ductile Iron

Process Piping - Based on CSA B51/ASME 31.3 2 Days

Steamfitting - UA Piping Industry College of British Columbia

Croton Water Treatment Plant– Plumbing, Mosholu Golf Course

ProTek Composite Pipe Shoe Information Sheet

Steamfitting - UA Piping Industry College of British Columbia